33 12 16.26 - 001-A - Response AAN-ANR Butterfly Valves - Garney ...

Garney Construction
785 E Warren
Gardner, KS 66030
Phone: 816-278-5950
Fax: 816-278-5931
SUBMITTAL ITEM
NO. 33 12 1626-001
PACKAGE NO: 33 12 1626
TITLE:
PROJECT:
Butterfly Valves
Ward County Pump Station Project
REQUIRED START:
REQUIRED FINISH:
2/15/2012
3/7/2012
DRAWING:
STATUS:
BIC:
ANR
HP
DAYS HELD: 0
DAYS ELAPSED: 11
DAYS OVERDUE: -10
RECEIVED FROM
HP
DB
SENT TO
FNI
NL
RETURNED BY
FNI NL
FORWARDED TO
HP
DB
Revision
No.
Description / Remarks
Received
Sent
Drawing
Returned Forwarded Status Sepias Prints Date HeldElapsed
A Butterfly Valves 2/15/2012 2/15/2012 2/23/2012 2/26/2012 ANR 0 1 0 11
Nick,
Please find the attached submittal for your review and approval.
Thank you,
Freese and Nichols Response:
Approved as Noted / Approved as Noted - Resubmit
Bryan Jann Comments:
Approved as Noted.
1. Refer to Garney Comment No. 4 - This valve is shown to be removed from the Scope of Supply (See Item 8.0 - QTY 0).
2. Refer to GA-11298: OPS valves shall have a bevel gear and 2" nut in lieu of a handwheel.
3. Refer to GA-11304: Provide bevel gear and vertical stem similar to GA-12040.
James Johnson Comments:
1. Approved as noted.
2. Refer to GA-11298: TPS valves shall have a bevel gear and 2" nut per sheet DT-1.
3. Refer to GA-11862: Provide horizontal shaft per sheet TPS-2.
Expedition ®
Jeff Hensley Comments:
Motor Operators:
1. Approved as Noted. Additional information required. Formally address all comments in writing. Provide revised data per
review comments.
2. Show contacts for REMOTE ENABLED output. Terminations shall be labeled per the FNI control schematics. Update
control schematics to reflect this.
3. Control schematics shall show what valve it is associated with. Just showing Line Item: 4, etc. is not acceptable.
4. All motor operator drawings shall state what valve they are associated with.
5. The hook-up diagram shows 24 VDC being supplied by the Customer. We are not providing 24 VDC to the valves. Any
power required to operate the valve shall be provided internally. The
only power source being supplied is 480V, 3 phase.
6. Provide open/close indicating lights.
7. Per the FNI control schematics, only a remote OPEN and remote CLOSE signal are being provided to the operator. A
remote STOP signal is not being supplied. Also, since only one common terminal is being provided in the operator for
terminating the common wire associated with the remote STOP and OPEN, clarify how many field wires and what size wires
can be terminated to this terminal. FNI will be running 2 separate wires for each remote OPEN and remote CLOSE signal.
Therefore the common terminal would need to be able to terminate 2 #14 AWG field wires.
8. Verify whether a space heater is being provided for the operators. This was not shown on control schematics/wiring
diagrams.
9. Verify that the installation drawings for the motor operators provided by Rotork match those that Pratt is providing.

Garney Construction
785 E Warren
Gardner, KS 66030
Phone: 816-278-5950
Fax: 816-278-5931
SUBMITTAL ITEM
NO. 33 12 1626-001
PACKAGE NO: 33 12 1626
TITLE:
PROJECT:
Butterfly Valves
Ward County Pump Station Project
REQUIRED START:
REQUIRED FINISH:
2/15/2012
3/7/2012
DRAWING:
STATUS:
BIC:
ANR
HP
DAYS HELD: 0
DAYS ELAPSED: 11
DAYS OVERDUE: -10
RECEIVED FROM
HP
DB
SENT TO
FNI
NL
RETURNED BY
FNI NL
FORWARDED TO
HP
DB
Revision
No.
Drawing
Description 9. Verify that / the Remarks installation drawings Receivedfor the Sent motor operators Returned provided Forwarded by Rotork Status match Sepias those Prints that Pratt Date is providing. HeldElapsed
Rebecca Sandoval Comments:
The following comments refer to the Motor Operators and the Limit Switches for TPS-YP5-BFV1.
Refer to Jeff Hensley for comments.
Approved as Noted.
Garney Construction
Ward County Pump Station Project
Submittal No. 33 12 1626-001
This submittal has been reviewed and approved with respect to
the contract documents and specification section33 12 1626
Approval or acceptance of the submittal does not relieve the
vendor of their responsibility to comply with the contract
documents.
Supplier/Sub:
HP
Date: ______________ Reviewed by: _________________
®
Expedition Page 2 of 2

SUBMITTALS
https://projectdox.freese.com/imarkupwg/form.asp?formid=6390&wfdirect=&debug=&co...
Page 1 of 2
2/26/2012
Project No:
Project:
Client:
Contractor:
CMD11269C
CMAR Ward County Transmission System - Valves
Colorado River Municipal Water District
Garney
Shop Drawing #004
URGENT Butterfly Valves
WORKFLOW COMPLETED 2/23/2012 9:43 AM
SUBMITTAL INFORMATION
SUBMITTAL
TYPE:
SUBMITTAL #: CONTRACTOR REF #: SPEC SECTION: PLAN SHEET: SUBMITTAL STATUS:
Shop
Drawing 004
33 12 16.26 -
001-A
33 12 16.26
Approved As Noted, Revise
and Resubmit, Additional
Information Required
SUBMITTAL
DESCRIPTION:
URGENT Butterfly Valves
UPLOAD SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
33 12 16.26 - 001-A - Butterfly Valves .pdf 2/16/2012 12:01 PM Debby Greer
CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION
CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
Debby,
Please find the attached submittal for your review and approval.
Thank you,
HOW WILL THE COPIES BE SUBMITTED:
Electronic
NUMBER OF COPIES SUBMITTED: 1
This shop drawing has been reviewed by the Contractor and certified to be in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by addenda, field orders, and
change orders. Deviations can only be approved by field order or change order. Approval is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance
with the intent of the information given in the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site; for information
that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to techniques of construction; and for the work of all trades.
SUBMITTED BY: Jeff Cohen
DATE: 2/16/2012 11:10 AM
REVIEWER COMMENTS
REVIEWER NAME: REVIEWER EMAIL: COMPANY / ORGANIZATION DATE SENT: DATE
COMPLETED:
Bryan Jann
bcj@freese.com
Freese & Nichols, Inc.
2/16/2012
2/23/2012
REVIEWER
COMMENTS:
Approved as Noted.
1. Refer to Garney Comment No. 4 - This valve is shown to be removed from the Scope of
Supply (See Item 8.0 - QTY 0).
2. Refer to GA-11298: OPS valves shall have a bevel gear and 2" nut in lieu of a handwheel.
3. Refer to GA-11304: Provide bevel gear and vertical stem similar to GA-12040.
REVIEWER NAME: REVIEWER EMAIL: COMPANY / ORGANIZATION DATE SENT: DATE
COMPLETED:
James
Johnson
jkj@freese.com
Freese and Nichols Inc. 2/16/2012
2/16/2012
REVIEWER
COMMENTS:
1. Approved as noted.
2. Refer to GA-11298: TPS valves shall have a bevel gear and 2" nut per sheet DT-1
3. Refer to GA-11862: Provide horizontal shaft per sheet TPS-2
REVIEWER NAME: REVIEWER EMAIL: COMPANY / ORGANIZATION DATE SENT: DATE
COMPLETED:
Jeff Hensley
jnh@freese.com
4055 International Plaza
2/21/2012
2/22/2012

SUBMITTALS
https://projectdox.freese.com/imarkupwg/form.asp?formid=6390&wfdirect=&debug=&co...
Page 2 of 2
2/26/2012
REVIEWER
COMMENTS:
Motor Operators:
1. Approved as Noted. Additional information required. Formally address all comments in
writing. Provide revised data per review comments.
2. Show contacts for REMOTE ENABLED output. Terminations shall be labeled per the FNI
control schematics. Update control schematics to reflect this.
3. Control schematics shall show what valve it is associated with. Just showing Line Item: 4,
etc. is not acceptable.
4. All motor operator drawings shall state what valve they are associated with.
5. The hook-up diagram shows 24 VDC being supplied by the Customer. We are not providing
24 VDC to the valves. Any power required to operate the valve shall be provided internally. The
only power source being supplied is 480V, 3 phase.
6. Provide open/close indicating lights.
7. Per the FNI control schematics, only a remote OPEN and remote CLOSE signal are being
provided to the operator. A remote STOP signal is not being supplied. Also, since only one
common terminal is being provided in the operator for terminating the common wire
associated with the remote STOP and OPEN, clarify how many field wires and what size wires
can be terminated to this terminal. FNI will be running 2 separate wires for each remote OPEN
and remote CLOSE signal. Therefore the common terminal would need to be able to terminate 2
#14 AWG field wires.
8. Verify whether a space heater is being provided for the operators. This was not shown on
control schematics/wiring diagrams.
9. Verify that the installation drawings for the motor operators provided by Rotork match those
that Pratt is providing.
REVIEWER NAME: REVIEWER EMAIL: COMPANY / ORGANIZATION DATE SENT: DATE
COMPLETED:
Rebecca
Sandoval
rs@freese.com
Freese and Nichols, Inc
2/21/2012
2/22/2012
REVIEWER
COMMENTS:
2/22/12
The following comments refer to the Motor Operators and the Limit Switches for TPS-YP5-
BFV1.
Refer to Jeff Hensley for comments.
Approved as Noted.
UPLOAD SUPPORTING REVIEW DOCUMENTS
DISPLAY ROUTING SLIP
Current Workflow Step: DCS Admin: Debby Greer Workflow Initiator: Jeff Cohen
(Click on the Names above to Email User)
FNI Forms v1.04

Garney Construction
785 E Warren
Gardner, KS 66030
Phone: 816-278-5950
Fax: 816-278-5931
SUBMITTAL ITEM
NO. 33 12 1626-001
PACKAGE NO: 33 12 1626
TITLE:
PROJECT:
Butterfly Valves
Ward County Pump Station Project
REQUIRED START:
REQUIRED FINISH:
2/15/2012
3/7/2012
DRAWING:
STATUS:
BIC:
NEW
FNI
DAYS HELD: 0
DAYS ELAPSED: 0
DAYS OVERDUE: -21
RECEIVED FROM
HP
DB
SENT TO
FNI
NL
RETURNED BY
FNI NL
FORWARDED TO
HP
DB
Revision
No.
Description / Remarks
Received
Sent
Drawing
Returned Forwarded Status Sepias Prints Date HeldElapsed
A Butterfly Valves 2/15/2012 2/15/2012 NEW 0 1 0 0
Nick,
Please find the attached submittal for your review and approval.
Thank you,
Garney Construction
Ward County Pump Station Project
Submittal No. 33 12 1626-001
This submittal has been reviewed and approved with respect to
the contract documents and specification section33 12 1626
Approval or acceptance of the submittal does not relieve the
vendor of their responsibility to comply with the contract
documents.
Supplier/Sub:
HP
Date: ______________ Reviewed by: _________________
Expedition ®

Colorado River Municipal Water District
Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project
Submittal 33 12 16.26 – 001-A – Butterfly Valves
Table of Contents
Page 1
Page 2
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Page 8
Page 8
Page 13
Page 17
Page 18
Page 24
Page 38
Page 39
Page 39
Page 49
Page 53
Page 58
Page 61
Page 61
Page 68
Page 70
Page 82
Page 84
Page 98
Page 100
Page 107
Page 109
Page 113
Page 125
Page 139
Page 152
Page 165
Garney Cover Letter
Garney Table of Contents
Garney Review Comments
Manufacturer’s Cover Letter
Manufacturer’s Table of Contents
TAB 1 – General Information
Scope of Supply
Estimated Ship Date Schedule
Valve Weights
Valve Torque Calculations
Electric Motor Torque Calculations
Submittal Detail Highlights
TAB 2 – Drawings
Valve Dimensional Drawings
Valve Cross Section Drawings
Manual Actuator Drawings
Valve Accessory Drawings
TAB 3 – Valves
AWWA 2FII BFV 3” to 20” Brochure
AWWA 2FII BFV 3” to 20” Spec Sheet
AWWA BFV Segmented Seat Brochure
AWWA BFW Segmented Seat Spec Sheet
Triton XR-70 BFV Brochure
Triton XR-70 BFV Spec Sheet
HP 250 II BFV Brochure
HP 250 II & 350 BFV Spec Sheet
HP 350 BFV Brochure
AWWA 2FII BFV 3” to 20” O&M
Triton XR-70 BFV O&M
HP 250 II BFV O&M
HP 350 BFV O&M
Diviner Position Indicator O&M

Page 173
Page 174
Page 179
Page 179
Page 189
Page 203
Page 204
Page 207
Page 209
Page 210
Page 211
Page 212
Page 213
Page 214
Page 244
Page 268
Page 300
Page 300
Page 307
Page 311
Page 318
Page 319
Page 339
Page 425
BFV Extended Storage and Installation Information
BFV Liquid Epoxy Coating
TAB 4 – Manual Actuators and Gearboxes
MDT Manual Actuator Brochure
MDT Manual Actuator O&M
MDT Actuator Mounting Positions Chart
AUMA Actuator Data Sheets
AUMA Actuator Dimensional Drawings
AUMA Actuator Output Mounting Flange Dimensions
AUMA Actuator Mounting Positions Chart
AUMA Limit Switch Position Indicator Drawing
AUMA Limit Switch Position Indicator Wiring Diagram
AUMA Limit Switch Position Indicator Specification
AUMA Actuator Gearbox Catalog Valve Position Indicator
AUMA Multi-Turn Bevel Gear Catalog
AUMA Part-Turn Gearboxes Catalog
TAB 5 – Electric Actuators & Accessories
Rotork Actuator Data Sheets
Rotork Actuator Wiring Diagrams
Rotork Actuator Installation / Dimensional Drawings
Rotork Actuator Mounting Positions Chart
Rotork IQ and IQT Range Brochure
Rotork IQ Range Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Instructions
Rotork IQ Range Basic Instructions

Colorado River Municipal Water District
Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project
Submittal 33 12 16.26 – 001-A – Butterfly Valves
Garney Review Comments
1. This submittal includes information on the Butterfly Valves, Gearboxes, and
Actuators.
2. All of the valves in this submittal will be provided with a mechanically fastened,
segmented seat with the exception of OPS-PL-BFV1, OPS-PL-BFV2, OPS-PL-
BFV3, OPS-PL-BFV4, and OPS-PL-BFV5.
3. The following valves will be shipped prepped for long term storage; OPS-YP1-
BFV, OPS-P1-BFV2, OPS-P2-BFV2, TPS-P1-BFV2, TPS-P2-BFV2, TPS-P3-
BFV2, TPS-P4-BFV2, WPS-P1-BFV1, WPS-P2-BFV1, WPS-P3-BFV1, TP-
BFV2, TP-BFV3, and TP-BFV4.
4. OPS-YP1-BFV will be provided as a spare part to the owner.
5. Per the discussion at the Pre-Submittal Meeting 4 Rotork Remote Setting Tools
will be provided to the owner with these valves.
6. A table showing number of turns for each of the different sizes of valves will be
included in the operation and maintenance manual.
7. Henry Pratt has over 10 years of successful experience manufacturing this type of
valve in the sizes included in this submittal.
8. Testing and conformance documentation will be provided prior to valve shipment
and will be included in the Operation & Maintenance manual for these valves.
9. The O&M Manual for the Segmented Seat Valves will be included in the O&M
Manual.
10. Concerning the limit switches for the 48” Butterfly Valve. Henry Pratt has had
discussions with Auma concerning this issue and are proposing the switches as
shown in the catalog beginning on page 214 of this manual. Auma has had a lot
of success with this arrangement and they do not offer individual lever type limit
Switches as discussed during the pre-submittal meeting. As these gear
assemblies require the bevel etc. Pratt cannot modify the wormgear to add Limit
Switches as this would void Auma’s product warranty. Having the self contained
arrangement. This arrangement does offer some substantial benefits, see pages
234 and 235 of this submittal, enclosure type ( IP 68) and lubricated for life.

Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project Transmission,
Odessa and Well Field Pump Stations
Butterfly Valves
Cover Letter
Table of Contents
Tab 1 - General Information
Scope of Supply
Estimated Ship Date Schedule
Valve Weights
Valve Torque Calculations
Electric Motor Torque Calculations (Rotork)
Submittal Detail Highlights
Tab 2 - Drawings
Valve Dimensional Drawings
Cross Section Drawings
Manual Actuator Drawings
Valve Accessory Drawings
Tab 3 – Valves
BFV Valve 2F2 Bonded Seat Brochure
BFV Valve 2F2 Bonded Seat Spec Sheet
BFV Segmented Seat Brochure
BFV Segmented Seat Spec Sheet
BFV Valve Triton XR-70 Brochure
BFV Valve Triton XR-70 Spec Sheet
BFV Valve HP250II Brochure
BFV HP250II Spec Sheet
BFV Valve HP350 Brochure
BFV HP350 Spec Sheet
BFV Valve 2F2 Operation and Maintenance Manual
BFV Valve Triton XR-70 Operation and Maintenance Manual
BFV HP250II Operation and Maintenance Manual
BFV HP350 Operation and Maintenance Manual
BFV Extended Storage and Installation Information
BFV Valve Coating
Tab 4 – Manual Actuators
Manual Actuator Brochure
Manual Actuator O&M Manual

Manual Actuator Mounting Positions Chart
Actuator Data Sheets (Auma)
Actuator Dimensional Drawings (Auma)
Actuator Output Drive/Mounting Flange Drawings (Auma)
Actuator Mounting Positions Chart (Auma)
Limit Switch General Arrangement Drawing (Auma)
Limit Switch Wiring Diagram (Auma)
Limit Switch Spec (Auma)
Actuator Gearbox Catalog Valve Position Indicator (Auma)
Actuator Multi-turn Bevel Gears Catalog (Auma)
Actuator Part-turn Gearbox Catalog (Auma)
Tab 5 – Electric Actuators & Accessory
Actuator Data Sheets (Rotork)
Actuator Wiring Diagrams (Rotork)
Actuator Installation/Dimensional Drawings (Rotork)
Actuator Mounting Positions Chart (Rotork)
Rotork IQ & IQT Range
Rotork IQ Range Installation & Maintenance Instructions
Rotork IQ Range Basic Setting Instructions

1513188 HP
Page 1 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
Product Submittal : FEBRUARY 10, 2012
Customer : GARNEY COMPANIES INC
Customer PO#
Pratt Order #
Project
: LOI
: 1513188 HP
: WARD COUNTY
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
1.0 4 TPS-P1-BFV1,
TPS-P2-BFV1,
TPS-P3-BFV1,
TPS-P4-BFV1
2.0 4 TPS-P1-BFV2,
TPS-P2-BFV2,
TPS-P3-BFV2,
TPS-P4-BFV2
3.0 2 OPS-P1-BFV1,
OPS-P2-BFV1
30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT MDT5 OL S/S
18 350 FL BFV MDT4S HW OL
S/S
36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT MDT5 HW OL S/S
PAINT
INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
DRAWING
GA: GA-11298
C.S.: D71094-1
C.S.: D71094-2
A.C.S.: GA-11566
G.A.: GA-11862
C.S.: GA-11724
A.C.S.: GA-11500
GA: GA-11298
C.S.: D71094-1
C.S.: D71094-2
A.C.S.: GA-11566
4.0 5 OPS-P1-BFV2,
OPS-P2-BFV2,
WPS-P1-BFV1,
WPS-P2-BFV1,
WPS-P3-BFV1
18 150B FL BFV OC EMO HW
OL S/S (ROTORK)
INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
MILS)
G.A.: GA-10658
C.S.: GA-11486
A.D.S.: 1M017701
W.D.: WD21026
I.D.: 1M017701-02
A.C.S. Actuator Cross Section A.D. Accessory Drawing A.D.D. Actuator Dimensional Drawing
A.D.S. Actuator Data Sheet AD Accessory Drawing C.S. Cross Section
CS Cross Section G.A. General Arrangement GA General Arrangement
I.D. Installation Drawing W.D. Wiring Diagram

1513188 HP
Page 2 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
PAINT
DRAWING
5.0 1 TPS-YP1-BFV1 30 150B FL BFV SEGMENT INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 GA: GA-12040
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: D71094-1
WORM GEAR)
MILS)
C.S.: D71094-2
XSTEM: NONE
A.D.: GA-11456
WG: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
A.D.: GA-11339
MILS)
A.D.S.:
A120170-DS002
A.D.D.: SD112799
A.D.D.: SK099241
6.0 2 TPS-YP2-BFV1,
TPS-YP3-BFV1
48 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)
INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
XSTEM: NONE
WG: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
MILS)
GA: GA-12040
C.S.: D71094-1
C.S.: D71094-2
AD: GA-11456
AD: GA-11339
A.D.S.:
A120170-SD004
A.D.D.: SD112800
A.D.D.: SK099241
7.0 1 TPS-YP5-BFV1 48 350 FLG BFV BSN OL S/S INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 GA: GA-12225
EXS W/LIMIT SWITCH (AUMA EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: GA-11338
WORK GEAR)
MILS)
AD: GA-11456
XSTEM: NONE
AD: GA-11339
WG: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
A.D.S.:
MILS)
A120170-SD004
A.D.D.: SD112800
A.D.D.: SK099241
8.0 0 OPS-YP1-BFV 30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 G.A.: GA-12040
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 CS: D71094-1
WORM GEAR)
MILS)
CS: D71094-2
DUPLICATE OF OPS-PL-BFV6
XSTEM: NONE
AD: GA-11456
WG: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
NOW ON LINE
AD: GA-11339
MILS)
A.D.S.:
A120170-DS002
A.D.D.: SD112799
A.D.D.: SK099241
A.C.S. Actuator Cross Section A.D. Accessory Drawing A.D.D. Actuator Dimensional Drawing
A.D.S. Actuator Data Sheet AD Accessory Drawing C.S. Cross Section
CS Cross Section G.A. General Arrangement GA General Arrangement
I.D. Installation Drawing W.D. Wiring Diagram

1513188 HP
Page 3 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
PAINT
DRAWING
9.0 1 OPS-YP2-BFV1 36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 GA: GA-12040
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: D71094-1
WORM GEAR)
MILS)
C.S.: D71094-2
XSTEM: NONE
AD: GA-11456
WG: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
AD: GA-11339
MILS)
A.D.S.:
A120170-DS003
A.D.D.: SD112799
A.D.D.: SK099241
12.0 2 WPS-YP1-BFV1,
WPS-YP1-BFV2
18 150B FL BFV OC EMO HW
OL S/S TFS (ROTORK)
INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
TT/FLRSTD: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
MILS)
G.A.: GA-10660
C.S.: GA-11486
A.D.S.: 1M017702
W.D.: WD21025
W.D.: WS21035
W.D.: WS21034
I.D.: 1M017702-02
13.0 3 WPS-YP1-BFV3,
WPS-YP2-BFV1,
WPS-YP3-BFV1
36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS
(ROTORK)
INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
TT/FLRSTD: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
MILS)
G.A.: GA-10769
C.S.: D71094-1
CS: D71094-2
A.D.S.: 1M017801
W.D.: WD21025
W.D.: WS21035
I.D.: 1M017801-02
14.0 1 WPS-YP4-BFV1 20 150B FL BFV OC EMO HW INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 G.A.: GA-10660
OL S/S TFS (ROTORK)
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: GA-11486
MILS)
A.D.S.: 1M017703
TT/FLRSTD: AMERCOAT 370
W.D.: WD21025
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
W.D.: WS21035
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4 W.D.: WS21034
MILS)
I.D.: 1M017703-02
15.0 1 WPS-YP4-BFV2 36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 GA: GA-10769
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: D71094-1
(ROTORK)
MILS)
C.S.: D71094-2
TT/FLRSTD: AMERCOAT 370
A.D.S.: 1M017802
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
W.D.: WD21025
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4 W.D.: WS21035
MILS)
I.D.: 1M017802-02
A.C.S. Actuator Cross Section A.D. Accessory Drawing A.D.D. Actuator Dimensional Drawing
A.D.S. Actuator Data Sheet AD Accessory Drawing C.S. Cross Section
CS Cross Section G.A. General Arrangement GA General Arrangement
I.D. Installation Drawing W.D. Wiring Diagram

1513188 HP
Page 4 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
PAINT
DRAWING
16.0 1 WPS-YP5-BFV1 30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 GA: GA-10769
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 CS: D71094-1
(ROTORK)
MILS)
CS: D71094-2
TT/FLRSTD: AMERCOAT 370
A.D.S.: 1M017804
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
W.D.: WD21025
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4 W.D.: WS21035
MILS)
I.D.: 1M017804-02
17.0 1 WPS-YP5-BFV2 36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370 G.A.: GA-10769
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: D71094-1
(ROTORK)
MILS)
C.S.: D71094-2
TT/FLRSTD: AMERCOAT 370
A.D.S.: 1M017803
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
W.D.: WD21025
MILS)
EMO: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4 W.D.: WS21035
MILS)
I.D.: 1M017803-02
18.0 3 WPS-YP1-BFV5,
WPS-YP1-BFV6,
OPS-PL-BFV6
30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)
INT/EXT: AMERCOAT 370
EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
XSTEM: NONE
WG: VENDOR PAINT (Min. 4
MILS)
GA: GA-12040
CS: D71094-1
C.S.: D71094-2
AD: GA-11456
AD: GA-11339
A.D.S.:
A120170-DS002
A.D.D.: SD112799
A.D.D.: SK099241
22.0 3 TP-BFV2,
TP-BFV3,
TP-BFV4
48 250B FL BFV WG40-300 BSN
OL S/S
INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
G.A.: GA-11774
C.S.: GA-11338
A.C.S.: GA-11881
23.0 1 OPS-PL-BFV1 30 150B FL BFV MDT5 BSN OL INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT GA: GA-11304
S/S
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: GA-11338
MILS)
A.C.S.: GA-11528
24.0 1 OPS-PL-BFV2 24 150B FL BFV MDT4S BSN INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT G.A.: GA-11304
OL S/S
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8 C.S.: GA-11337
MILS)
A.C.S.: GA-11499
A.C.S. Actuator Cross Section A.D. Accessory Drawing A.D.D. Actuator Dimensional Drawing
A.D.S. Actuator Data Sheet AD Accessory Drawing C.S. Cross Section
CS Cross Section G.A. General Arrangement GA General Arrangement
I.D. Installation Drawing W.D. Wiring Diagram

1513188 HP
Page 5 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
25.0 3 OPS-PL-BFV3,
OPS-PL-BFV4,
OPS-PL-BFV5
30 150B FL BFV MDT5 BSN OL
S/S
PAINT
INT/EXT/OPER: AMERCOAT
370 EPOXY (A-69636A) (Min. 8
MILS)
Included in Submittal:
Customer to verify extension lengths on GA-10769 & GA-10660 - See Detail Highlights form.
BFV Catalog Data (2F2 - Bonded Seat)
BFV Catalog Data (Triton)
BFV Catalog Data (HP250II)
BFV Catalog Data (HP350)
BFV Paint Data (A069636A)
Pratt Valve Torque Calculations
Rotork Electric Motor Torque Calculations
O&M Manual - BFV
DRAWING
GA: GA-11304
C.S.: GA-11338
A.C.S.: GA-11528
Note:
Start Up assistance not provided in this quotation.
EMO and Worm Gear spare parts not included.
Test Certs available at time of shipment.
A.C.S. Actuator Cross Section A.D. Accessory Drawing A.D.D. Actuator Dimensional Drawing
A.D.S. Actuator Data Sheet AD Accessory Drawing C.S. Cross Section
CS Cross Section G.A. General Arrangement GA General Arrangement
I.D. Installation Drawing W.D. Wiring Diagram

1513188 HP
Page 1 of 4
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
Product Submittal : FEBRUARY 14, 2012
Customer : GARNEY COMPANIES INC
Customer PO#
Pratt Order #
Project
: LOI
: 1513188 HP
: WARD COUNTY
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
1.0 4 TPS-P1-BFV1,
TPS-P2-BFV1,
TPS-P3-BFV1,
TPS-P4-BFV1
2.0 4 TPS-P1-BFV2,
TPS-P2-BFV2,
TPS-P3-BFV2,
TPS-P4-BFV2
3.0 2 OPS-P1-BFV1,
OPS-P2-BFV1
30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT MDT5 OL S/S
18 350 FL BFV MDT4S HW OL
S/S
36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT MDT5 HW OL S/S
E S D Release 2/15 E S D Release 2/29
7/20/12 7/20/12
4/6/12 4/20/12
7/20/12 7/20/12
4.0 5 OPS-P1-BFV2,
OPS-P2-BFV2,
WPS-P1-BFV1,
WPS-P2-BFV1,
WPS-P3-BFV1
18 150B FL BFV OC EMO HW
OL S/S (ROTORK)
6/20/12 7/12/12

1513188 HP
Page 2 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
E SD Release 2/15 E S D Release 2/29
5.0 1 TPS-YP1-BFV1 30 150B FL BFV SEGMENT 7/20/12 7/20/12
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)
6.0 2 TPS-YP2-BFV1,
TPS-YP3-BFV1
48 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)
6/29/12 7/20/12
7.0 1 TPS-YP5-BFV1 48 350 FLG BFV BSN OL S/S 6/29/12 7/20/12
EXS W/LIMIT SWITCH (AUMA
WORK GEAR)
8.0 1 OPS-YP1-BFV 7/20/12 7/20/12
30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)

1513188 HP
Page 3 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
EE S D Release 2/15 ESD Release 2/29
9.0 1 OPS-YP2-BFV1 36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT 7/20/12 7/20/12
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)
12.0 2 WPS-YP1-BFV1,
WPS-YP1-BFV2
18 150B FL BFV OC EMO HW
OL S/S TFS (ROTORK)
6/20/12 7/12/12
13.0 3 WPS-YP1-BFV3,
WPS-YP2-BFV1,
WPS-YP3-BFV1
36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS
(ROTORK)
7/27/12 7/27/12
14.0 1 WPS-YP4-BFV1 20 150B FL BFV OC EMO HW 6/20/12 7/12/12
OL S/S TFS (ROTORK)
15.0 1 WPS-YP4-BFV2 7/27/12 7/27/12
36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS
(ROTORK)

1513188 HP
Page 4 of 5
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora IL, 60506-5563
Phone: 630-844-4000
Fax: 630-844-4160
LINE QTY TAG/LOCATION DESCRIPTION
E S D Release 2/15 ESD Release 2/29
16.0 1 WPS-YP5-BFV1 30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT 7/27/12 7/27/12
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS
(ROTORK)
17.0 1 WPS-YP5-BFV2 36 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT 7/27/12 7/27/12
SEAT OC EMO HW OL S/S TFS
(ROTORK)
18.0 4 WPS-YP1-BFV5,
WPS-YP1-BFV6,
OPS-PL-BFV5,
OPS-PL-BFV6
22.0 3 TP-BFV2,
TP-BFV3,
TP-BFV4
30 150B FLG BFV SEGMENT
SEAT BSN OL S/S EXS (AUMA
WORM GEAR)
48 250B FL BFV WG40-300 BSN
OL S/S
7/27/12 7/27/12
5/9/12 5/25/12
23.0 1 OPS-PL-BFV1 30 150B FL BFV MDT5 BSN OL 3/9/12 3/23/12
S/S
24.0 1 OPS-PL-BFV2
24 150B FL BFV MDT4S BSN
OL S/S
3/2/12 3/16/12
25.0 2 OPS-PL-BFV3,
OPS-PL-BFV4
30 150B FL BFV MDT5 BSN OL 3/9/12 3/23/12
S/S

Ward County Water Supply Expansion Project Transmission,
Odessa and Well Field Pump Stations
Butterfly Valve Weights
Valve Size and Pressure Class
Weight per unit
18” 2FII 150B 600
18” 2FII 150B w/Rotork EMO 1050
18” 2FII 150B w/Rotork EMO & TT/Flrstnd 1300
18” HP350 1100
20” 2FII 150B w/Rotork EMO & TT/Flrstnd 1150
24” Triton 150B 1050
30” Triton 150B 1900
30” Triton 150B w/Auma WG 2000
30” Triton 150B w/Rotork EMO & TT/Flrstnd 2600
36” Triton 150B 2650
36” Triton 150B w/Auma WG 2700
36” Triton 150B w/Rotork EMO & TT/Flrstnd 2950
48” Triton 150B w/Auma WG 6000
48” HP250II 4900
48” HP350 w/Auma WG 8300

AWWA Butterfly Valves
3" – 20"
Engineering Creative Solutions
for Fluid Systems Since 1901

A Tradition of Excellence
With the development of the first rubber seated butterfly
valve more than 70 years ago, the Henry Pratt Company
became a trusted name in the flow control industry,
setting the standard for product quality and customer
service. Today Pratt provides the following range of
superior products to the water, wastewater and power
generation industries.
Butterfly Valves: from 3" to 162"
Rectangular Valves: 1' x 1' to 14' x 16'
Ball Valves —
Rubber Seated: from 4" to 60"
Metal Seated: from 6" to 48"
Plug Valves: from 1/2" to 36", 3 ways
Hydraulic Control Systems
Valve Controls
Energy Dissipating Valves
and Fixed Energy Dissipaters
Cone Valves
Check Valves
A Commitment to Meeting
The Customers’ Needs
Henry Pratt valves represent a long-term commitment
to both the customer and to a tradition of product
excellence. This commitment is evident in the number
of innovations we have brought to the industries we
serve. In fact, the Henry Pratt Company was the first to
introduce many of the flow control products in use today,
including the first rubber seated butterfly valve, one of
the first nuclear N-Stamp valves, and the bonded seat
butterfly valve.
Innovative Products
For Unique Applications
Though many of the standard valves we produce are
used in water filtration and distribution applica tions, Pratt
has built a reputation on the ability to develop specialized
products that help customers to meet their individual
operational challenges.
Creative Engineering
for Fluid Systems
Pratt’s ability to provide practical solutions to complex
issues is demonstrated by the following case histories.
Earthquake Proof Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured hydraulically actuated
valves for a water storage application so that the valves
would automatically operate in the event of earthquakes.
This lead to the development of a valve that will withstand
acceleration forces of up to 6g’s.
Custom Actuation/Isolation Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured valves that would
isolate a working chamber in the event of a nuclear
emergency during the decommissioning of armed
nuclear warheads. The valves were able to close in
a millisecond using specially designed Pratt electropneumatic
actuators.
Valves Designed for
Harsh Environments
Pratt designed and manufactured a 144" diameter
butterfly valve for the emergency cooling system at
a jet engine test facility. The valve was designed to supply
water to help dissipate the tremen dous heat generated by
the engines during testing.
Through experience, commitment and creative engineering, Pratt is uniquely
suited to provide superior products for our customers’ special needs.
For more information, contact our corporate headquarters in Aurora, Illinois.

Scope of Line:
AWWA In-Plant Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
Model 2FII Butterfly Valve
Model 2FII Flanged Butterfly Valve
Sizes: 3 through 20 inches
Body Style: Flanged x flanged ends
Other Body Style Options:
n Mechanical joint
n Victaulic
n Flanged & mechanical joint
n Push-on
n Push-on & flanged
Pressure Class:
n Class 150B per AWWA Standard C504
Working Pressure: 150 psig
Flanges:
n Flat faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1,
Class 125 standards.
Rubber Seat: Bonded seat-in-body
Actuation Options:
n Pratt hand lever
n MDT manual actuator with AWWA nut, handwheel or
chainwheel
n Pratt Dura-Cyl hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder
n Pratt Positron electric actuator
Monoflange MKII Wafer Butterfly Valve
Sizes: 3 through 20 inches
Body Style: Wafer-type
Pressure Class:
n Class 150B per AWWA Standard C504
Working Pressure: 150 psig
Rubber Seat:
n Bonded seat-in-body extends over inner surface to
form self-gasketing feature
Actuation Options:
n Pratt hand lever
n MDT manual actuator with AWWA nut, handwheel or
chainwheel
n Pratt Dura-Cyl hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder
n Pratt Positron electric actuator
Monoflange MKII Butterfly Valve
2 | Henry Pratt Company

Design Details:
Models 2FII and MKII
Self Adjusting Permanent Packing
Chevron type packing increases sealing force
as line pressure increases. The self adjusting
packing bears on turned, ground and polished
stainless steel, minimizing wear and assuring
long life. Packing is accessible for replacement
without dismantling the valve per AWWA
Standard C504.
Lifetime Bearings
Pratt’s chemically inert nylon bearings are
sized to meet or exceed AWWA specification
pressure loads. They are self-lubricating,
require no periodic maintenance and are
designed to outlast the life of the pipeline.
Corrosion Resistant Shafts
The shafts in Pratt’s rubber seated butterfly
valves, 3” through 20”, are constructed of
centerless, ground ASTM A276 type 304 or
type 316 stainless steel bar and thus are not
susceptible to corrosion as are carbon steel or
other similar materials. Shafts are one-piece,
through-shaft construction, sized to meet or
exceed the requirements of AWWA Standard
C504 for Class 150B butterfly valves.
Streamlined Discs
Pratt’s lens-shaped discs are designed to
minimize pressure drop and turbulence. In
the full open position, the disc creates no
more friction loss than a 45° elbow. Discs
are secured to shafts by stainless steel pins
to transmit required torques and withstand
stresses imposed under a variety of operating
conditions.
Body Seat
Our standard seats are constructed of Buna N
rubber and bonded to the valve body in Pratt’s
manufacturing facility using a unique thermal
process. This molding process ensures that
the disc-to-seat interference will not cause
excessive wear or abrasion under normal
operating conditions. On the wafer type MKII
bodies, the rubber seat covers the entire inner
surface plus the outside face of the valve body
to provide a self-gasketing feature. Pratt’s
seat-in-body design minimizes the effects of
corrosive buildup on the inside of the valve
because deposits are swept away by the hard
sealing edge of the disc each time the valve is
exercised.
Heavy Duty Bodies
Both Monoflange MKII and Model 2FII bodies
are heavy duty cast iron. Model 2FII flanges are
fully faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI
B16.1, Class 125 standard for cast iron flanges.
Monoflange MKII bodies incorporate an
overlapping seat which also forms a gasket for
the flange face. The actuator mounting trunnion
is machined and drilled for a 4-bolt connection.
Henry Pratt Company | 3

Features and Benefits:
of Pratt Models 2FII and MKII
Feature
Seat-in-body design
Seat molded in recessed body cavity,
protected by metal on 3 sides
Valve withstood proof-of-design testing
of 100,000 cycles — AWWA only
requires
10,000 cycle proof-of-design testing
Through-disc pinning
Symmetrical lens-shaped disc
Nonmetallic bearings
Chevron V-type packing
Benefit
• Reduces seat failure due to corrosive buildup in the valve and
pipeline. No hardware to loosen. No periodic maintenance required.
Rubber protected from flow media to increase seat life.
• Proven reliability over the life of the valve
• Provides a tight disc-to-shaft pin connection, greatly reducing the
possibility of loosening through vibration
• Higher Cv : lower head loss results in energy savings for customer’s
system
• Prevents galvanic corrosion and provides lower coefficient of friction
• Self-adjusting, lasts the life of the valve
Valve
Size
C v
Valve
Size
C v
Valve
Size
3" 323 10" 4458 16" 11413
4" 575 12" 6420 18" 14444
6" 1294 14" 8738 20" 17832
8" 2300 C v values for the 2FII and MKII in the full open position
C v
Standard
Material
Body
Type of Material
Disc
0255 Cast Iron Cast Iron
316 edge
0132 Ductile Iron SS 316
(MKII 3" – 6")
0274 Ductile Iron
(MKII 8" +)
Cast Iron
316 edge
Shaft
SS,
Type 304
SS,
Type 316
SS,
Type 304
Specifications for
Materials of Construction
Cast Iron:
ASTM A126, Class B (2FII Body)
Ductile Iron:
ASTM A536 (65-45-12) (MKII Body)
4 | Henry Pratt Company

Suggested Specification for the Pratt
Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve, Sizes 3 through 20 inches
General
Butterfly valves shall be manufactured in accordance
with the latest revision of AWWA C504, Class 150B and
conform to NSF Standard 61. The manufacturer shall
have produced AWWA butterfly valves for a minimum of
five years. All valves shall be either Henry Pratt Model 2FII
or Monoflange MKII and comply with the following details.
Valve Bodies
Valve bodies shall be constructed of ASTM A126, Class B
cast iron for flanged valves or ASTM A536 (65-45-12) for
wafer style. Flanged valves shall be fully faced and drilled
in accordance with ANSI Standard B16.1, Class 125.
Valve Seats
Rubber body seats shall be of one piece construction,
simultaneously molded and bonded into a recessed cavity
in the valve body. Seats may not be located on the disc or
be retained by segments and/or screws. For wafer style
valves, the seat shall cover the entire inner surface of the
valve body and extend over the outside face of the valve
body to form a flange gasket.
Valve Bearings
Valve bearings shall be of a self-lubricating, nonmetallic
material to effectively isolate the disc-shaft assembly from
the valve body. Metal-to-metal thrust bearings in the flow
stream are not allowed.
Valve Disc
The disc shall be a lens-shaped design to afford
minimal pressure drop and line turbulence. Materials of
construction shall be:
• 3"-6" — ASTM A351 Gr. CF8M stainless steel disc
• 8"-20" — ASTM A126, Class B cast iron disc with a
stainless steel type 316 edge
Painting
All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry and
free from grease before painting. The valve interior and
exterior, except for disc edge, rubber seat and finished
portions shall be evenly coated with an NSF61 approved
2-part liquid epoxy. Minimum dry film thickness shall be
4-6 Mils.
Testing
Hydrostatic and seat leakage tests shall be conducted in
strict accordance with AWWA Standard C504.
Proof of Design
The manufacturer furnishing valves under the
specification shall be prepared to provide Proof of Design
Test reports to illustrate that the valves supplied meet the
design requirements of AWWA C504.
Manual Actuators: Manual actuators shall be of the
traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed
to hold the valve in any intermediate position between
fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering.
Actuators shall be equipped with mechanical stop-limiting
devices to prevent overtravel of the disc in the open
and closed positions. Actuators shall be fully enclosed
and designed to produce the specified torque with a
maximum pull of 80 lb. on the handwheel or chainwheel.
Actuator components shall withstand an input torque of
450 Lb. Ft. at extreme operator position without damage.
Manual actuators shall conform to AWWA C504 and shall
be Pratt MDT or an approved equal.
Powered Actuators: Refer to Pratt’s Butterfly Valve
Actuator brochure for suggested specifications and
detailed information regarding cylinder actuators and
electric actuators.
Discs shall be retained by stainless steel pins which
should extend through the full diameter of the shaft to
withstand the specified line pressure up to valve rating
and the torque required to operate the valve. Disc stops
located in the flow stream are not allowed.
Valve Shafts
Valve shafts shall be of stainless steel type 304. At the
operator end of the valve shaft, a packing gland utilizing
“V” type chevron packing shall be utilized. “O” ring and/or
“U” cup packing is not allowed.
Henry Pratt Company | 5

Dimensional Data:
Model 2FII, Flanged Butterfly Valve
E
Nominal Valve
Size A B C D E F G
3 43⁄4 31⁄4 71⁄2 5 3⁄4 4 – 5⁄8 6
4 51⁄2 31⁄2 9 5 15 ⁄16 8 – 5⁄8 71⁄2
6 61⁄2 51⁄8 11 5 1 8 – 3⁄4 91⁄2
8 73⁄4 61⁄2 131⁄2 6 11⁄8 8 – 3⁄4 113⁄4
10 9 97⁄8 16 8 1 3 ⁄16 12 – 7⁄8 141⁄4
12 101⁄2 113⁄8 19 8 11⁄4 12 – 7⁄8 17
14 117⁄8 123⁄4 21 8 13⁄8 12 – 1 183⁄4
16 131⁄2 143⁄8 231⁄2 8 1 7 ⁄16 16 – 1 211⁄4
18 143⁄8 151⁄4 25 8 1 9 ⁄16 16 – 11⁄8 223⁄4
20 16 167⁄8 271⁄2 8 11 1 ⁄16 20 – 11⁄8 25
All dimensions shown in inches.
D
— Available in sizes
3 through 20 inches
E
Dimensional Data:
Monoflange MKII Wafer Butterfly Valve
Nominal Valve
Size A B C D
3 43⁄4 31⁄4 51⁄4 2 1 ⁄16
4 51⁄2 31⁄2 63⁄4 2 5 ⁄16
6 61⁄2 51⁄8 85⁄8 2 15 ⁄16
8 73⁄4 61⁄2 107⁄8 3 1 ⁄16
10 9 97⁄8 131⁄4 3 3 ⁄16
12 101⁄2 11 5 ⁄16 16 3 7 ⁄16
14 117⁄8 123⁄4 175⁄8 3 11 ⁄16
16 131⁄2 143⁄8 201⁄8 4 3 ⁄16
18 143⁄8 151⁄4 211⁄2 4 11 ⁄16
20 16 16 13 ⁄16 233⁄4 5 3 ⁄16
All dimensions shown in inches.
1/16"
1/16"
D
VALVE
SIZE
(in.)
DISC
O.D.
(in.)
MINIMUM
MATING PIPE I.D.
(in.)*
3 3.089 2.41
4 4.074 3.44
6 6.070 5.38
8 8.078 7.53
10 10.098 9.62
12 12.108 11.64
14 13.339 12.86
16 15.336 14.79
18 17.370 16.75
20 19.380 18.71
6 | Henry Pratt Company

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Pratt Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve Specs, Sizes 3”-20”
Tag Number(s): OPS-P1-BFV2, OPS-P3-BFV2, WPS-P1-BFV1, WPS-P2-BFV1, WPS-P3-
BFV1, WPS-YP1-BFV1, WPS-YP1-BFV2, WPS-YP4-BFV1
General
Butterfly valves are manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C504, Class 150B
and conform to NSF Standard 61.
Valve Body
Valve bodies are constructed of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron for flanged valves. Flanged valves
are fully faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI Standard B16.1, Class 125.
Valve Seats
Rubber body seats are of one piece construction, simultaneously molded and bonded into a
recessed cavity in the valve body. Seat material is Buna-N.
Valve Bearings
Valve bearings are of a self-lubricating, nonmetallic material to effectively isolate the disc-shaft
assembly from the valve body.
Valve Disc
The disc is lens-shaped design to afford minimal pressure drop and line turbulence.
Materials of construction is:
• 8"-20" — ASTM A126, Class B cast iron disc with a stainless steel type 316 edge
Discs are retained by stainless steel pins which extend through the full diameter of the shaft to
withstand the specified line pressure up to valve rating and the torque required to operate the valve.
Valve Shafts
Valve shafts are made of stainless steel type 304. At the operator end of the valve shaft, a packing
gland of “V” type chevron packing is utilized.
Painting
All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry and free from grease before painting. The valve
interior and exterior, except for disc edge, rubber seat and finished portions shall be evenly coated
with an NSF61 approved 2-part liquid epoxy. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 8-10 Mils.

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Testing
Hydrostatic and seat leakage tests will be conducted in strict accordance with AWWA Standard
C504.
Electric Actuator
See Rotork spec sheet

AWWA Butterfly Valves
Engineering Creative Solutions
for Fluid Systems Since 1901

3" through 20" Butterfly Valves
Scope of Line
511A Flanged — 3" through 20" ..................................3
510A Mechanical Joint — 4" through 20" ...........................3
Design Details .....................................................4
Features and Benefits — 20" and smaller ...........................5
Cv Values — 20" and smaller .....................................5
Suggested Specifications — 20" and smaller .........................6
Dimensions
511A Flanged — 3" through 20" ..................................7
510A Mechanical Joint — 4" through 20" ...........................7
Actuator Dimensional Data — 20" and smaller ...........................8
Optional Accessories ................................................8
24" and Larger Butterfly Valves
Scope of Line
511 Flanged — 24" through 72" ...................................9
510 Mechanical Joint — 24" through 48" ...........................9
Features and Benefits — 24" and larger .................................9
Dimensions
511 Flanged — 24" through 72" ..................................10
510 Mechanical Joint — 24" through 48" ..........................10
Suggested Specifications — 24" and larger .............................11
page 2

Scope of Line: AWWA Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
Model 511A Flanged Butterfly Valve
Sizes: 3 through 20 inches
Body Style: Flanged x flanged ends
Pressure Class:
Class 150B per AWWA Stan dard C504
Working Pressure: 150 psig
Flanges:
Flat faced and drilled in ac cor dance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125
standards.
Rubber Seat: Bonded seat-in-body
Model 511A Butterfly Valve
Actuation Options:
MDT manual ac tu a tor with AWWA nut, handwheel or
chainwheel
Hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder
Electric actuator
Model 510A Mechanical Joint Butterfly Valve
Sizes: 4 through 20 inches
Body Style: MJ x MJ ends
Pressure Class:
Class 150B per AWWA Stan dard C504
Working Pressure: 150 psig
Rubber Seat:
Bonded seat-in-body ex tends over inner surface to form selfgasketing
feature
Actuation Options:
MDT manual ac tu a tor with AWWA nut
Model 510A Butterfly Valve
Please see the outside back cover for a listing of other Henry Pratt products
page 3

Design Details: Models 511A and 510A — 20" and Smaller
Self Adjusting Permanent Packing
Chevron type packing increases sealing
force as line pres sure increases. The self
adjusting pack ing bears on turned, ground
and polished stain less steel, min i miz ing
wear and assuring long life. Pack ing is
ac ces si ble for re place ment with out dis mantling
the valve per AWWA Stan dard C504.
Lifetime Bearings
Chemically inert nylon bearings are sized
to meet or exceed AWWA specification
pres sure loads. They are self-lu bri cat ing,
require no pe ri od ic main te nance and are
de signed to outlast the life of the pipe line.
Corrosion Resistant Shafts
Shafts in rubber seated butterfly valves, 3”
through 20”, are con struct ed of centerless,
ground ASTM A276 type 304 or type 316
stainless steel bar and thus are not sus cepti
ble to corrosion as are carbon steel or other
similar materials. Shafts are one-piece,
through-shaft con struc tion, sized to meet or
ex ceed the re quire ments of AWWA Standard
C504 for Class 150B butterfly valves.
Streamlined Discs
The lens-shaped discs are designed to mini
mize pres sure drop and turbulence. In
the full open po si tion, the disc creates no
more friction loss than a 45° el bow. Discs
are secured to shafts by stain less steel pins
to trans mit re quired torques and with stand
stress es imposed under a va ri ety of op er ating
con di tions.
Body Seat
Our standard seats are constructed of Buna
N rub ber and bond ed to the valve body.
This mold ing pro cess ensures that the discto-seat
in ter fer ence will not cause ex ces sive
wear or abrasion under normal op er at ing
con di tions. The seat-in-body de sign mini
miz es the ef fects of corrosive build up on
the in side of the valve be cause deposits are
swept away by the hard seal ing edge of the
disc each time the valve is ex er cised.
Heavy Duty Bodies
Both Models 511A and 510A bodies are
heavy duty cast iron. Model 511A flang es
are fully faced and drilled in accordance
with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 standard for
cast iron flang es. Model 510A mechanical
joint end connections are in accordance
with AWWA C111 and ANSI 21.11. The
actuator mounting trun nion is ma chined
and drilled for a 4-bolt connection.
page 4

Features and Benefits
of Henry Pratt Models 511A and 510A — 20" and Smaller
Feature
Seat-in-body design
Seat molded in recessed body cavity,
protected by metal on 3 sides
Valve withstood proof-of-design testing
of 100,000 cycles - AWWA only requires
10,000 cycle proof-of-design testing
Through-disc pinning
Symmetrical lens-shaped disc
Nonmetallic bearings
Chevron V-type packing
Benefit
Reduces seat failure due to corrosive buildup
in the valve and pipeline. No hard ware to
loosen. No periodic maintenance required.
Rubber protected from flow media to increase
seat life.
Proven reliability over the life of the valve
Provides a tight disc-to-shaft pin connection,
greatly reducing the possibility of loosening
through vibration
Higher Cv : lower head loss results in energy
savings for customer’s system
Prevents galvanic corrosion and provides lower
coefficient of friction
Self-adjusting, lasts the life of the valve
Valve
Size
C v
Valve
Size
C v
Valve
Size
3" 323 10" 4458 16" 11413
4" 575 12" 6420 18" 14444
6" 1294 14" 8738 20" 17832
8" 2300 Cv values for the 511A and 510A in the full open position
C v
Type of Material
Valve Size Body Disc Shaft
3" - 4" Ductile Iron CF-8M Type 304SS
6" Cast Iron CF-8M Type 304SS
8" - 20" Cast Iron Cast Iron/316SS Edge Type 304SS
Other materials available upon request
page 5

Suggested Specification for the Henry Pratt
Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve, Sizes 3 through 20 inches
General
Butterfly valves shall be manufactured in accordance
with the latest revision of AWWA C504, Class 150B
and conform to NSF Standard 61. The manufacturer
shall have produced AWWA butterfly valves for a
minimum of five years. All valves shall be either 511A
Flanged or 510A Mechanical Joint and comply with
the following details.
Valve Bodies
Valve bodies shall be constructed of ASTM A126,
Class B cast iron. Flanged valves shall be fully faced
and drilled in accordance with ANSI Stan dard B16.1,
Class 125. Mechanical joint end connections are in
accordance with AWWA C111 and ANSI 21.11.
Valve Seats
Rubber body seats shall be of one piece construction,
si mul ta neous ly mold ed and bond ed into a recessed
cavity in the valve body. Seats may not be located on
the disc or be retained by segments and/or screws.
Valve Bearings
Valve bearings shall be of a self-lubricating, nonme
tal lic material to ef fec tive ly isolate the disc-shaft
as sem bly from the valve body. Metal-to-metal thrust
bear ings in the flow stream are not allowed.
Valve Disc
The disc shall be a lens-shaped design to afford mini
mal pressure drop and line turbulence. Materials of
construction shall be:
stainless steel type 316 edge
Discs shall be re tained by stain less steel pins which
extends through the full diameter of the shaft to withstand
the spec i fied line pres sure up to valve rating
and the torque re quired to oper ate the valve. Disc
stops located in the flow stream are not allowed.
Painting
All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry
and free from grease before paint ing. The valve
interior and exterior, except for disc edge, rubber
seat and finished portions shall be evenly coated with
a 2-part liquid epoxy to comply with NSF61 and
AWWA Standard C504.
Testing
Hydrostatic and seat leakage tests shall be conducted
in strict accordance with AWWA Stan dard C504.
Proof of Design
The manufacturer furnishing valves under the spec i-
fi ca tion shall be prepared to provide Proof of Design
Test reports to illustrate that the valves supplied meet
the design requirements of AWWA C504.
Manual Actuators: Manual actuators shall be of the
trav el ing nut, self-lock ing type and shall be de signed
to hold the valve in any in ter me di ate position
between ful ly open and ful ly closed without creeping
or flut ter ing. Ac tu a tors shall be equipped with
mechanical stop-limiting devices to pre vent overtravel
of the disc in the open and closed po si tions. Ac tu a tors
shall be ful ly en closed and de signed to produce the
spec i fied torque with a max i mum pull of 80 lb. on the
handwheel or chain wheel. Actuator components shall
with stand an input torque of 450 Lb. Ft. at extreme
op er a tor position without dam age. Manual ac tu a tors
shall conform to AWWA C504 and shall be Henry
Pratt MDT or an approved equal.
Valve Shafts
Valve shafts shall be of stainless steel type 304. At the
op er a tor end of the valve shaft, a packing gland uti lizing
“V” type chevron packing shall be utilized.
page 6

Dimensional Data: Model 511A, Flanged Butterfly Valve 3" – 20"
Nominal Valve
Size A B C D E F G
3 4 3 ⁄4 3 7 ⁄8 7 1 ⁄2 5 3 ⁄4 4 – 5 ⁄8 6
4 5 1 ⁄2 4 1 ⁄8 9 5 1 5 ⁄16 8 – 5 ⁄8 7 1 ⁄2
6 6 1 ⁄2 5 1 ⁄8 11 5 1 8 – 3 ⁄4 9 1 ⁄2
8 7 3 ⁄4 6 1 ⁄2 13 1 ⁄2 6 1 1 ⁄8 8 – 3 ⁄4 11 3 ⁄4
10 9 9 7 ⁄8 16 8 1 3 ⁄16 12 – 7 ⁄8 14 1 ⁄4
12 10 1 ⁄2 11 3 ⁄8 19 8 1 1 ⁄4 12 – 7 ⁄8 17
14 11 7 ⁄8 12 3 ⁄4 21 8 1 3 ⁄8 12 – 1 18 3 ⁄4
16 13 1 ⁄2 14 3 ⁄8 23 1 ⁄2 8 1 7 ⁄16 16 – 1 21 1 ⁄4
18 14 3 ⁄8 15 1 ⁄4 25 8 1 9 ⁄16 16 – 1 1 ⁄8 22 3 ⁄4
20 16 16 7 ⁄8 27 1 ⁄2 8 1 11 ⁄16 20 – 1 1 ⁄8 25
All dimensions shown in inches
E
D
— Available in sizes
3 through 20 inches
E
Dimensional Data: Model 510A Mechanical Joint End
Butterfly Valve — 4" – 20"
PIPE
I.D.
Installation Diagram
Note: The following items to
be furnished by others unless
otherwise specified in contract:
Bolts, Glands, Nuts, Gaskets
R
F=NO. & SIZE OF BOLTS
E E
D A B
X=
LAYING LENGTH
PIPE
O.D.
NOM.
VALVE
SIZE
G=BOLT
CIRCLE
See Note 1.
PIPE PIPE PIPE I.D.
SIZE O.D. MIN.
4 4.80 3.10
6 6.90 5.69
8 9.05 7.65
10 11.10 9.93
12 13.20 11.70
14 15.30 12.91
16 17.40 14.91
18 19.50 16.95
20 21.60 18.96
— Available in sizes
4 through 20 inches
C
Nominal Valve
Size A B C D E F G X
4 5 1 ⁄2 3 1 ⁄2 9 8 1 ⁄8 1 4 – 3 ⁄4 7 1 ⁄2 3 1 ⁄8
6 6 1 ⁄2 5 1 ⁄8 11 8 1 ⁄2
11 ⁄16 6 – 3 ⁄4 9 1 ⁄2 3 1 ⁄2
8 7 3 ⁄4 6 1 ⁄2 13 1 ⁄4 8 5 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄8 6 – 3 ⁄4 11 3 ⁄4 3 5 ⁄8
10 9 9 3 ⁄4 15 9 ⁄16 9 1 ⁄4
13 ⁄16 8 – 3 ⁄4 14 4 1 ⁄4
12 10 1 ⁄2 11 3 ⁄8 17 15 ⁄16 9 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄4 8 – 3 ⁄4 16 1 ⁄4 4 1 ⁄4
14 11 7 ⁄8 12 3 ⁄4 20 5 ⁄16 11 1 ⁄2
15 ⁄16 10 – 3 ⁄4 18 3 ⁄4 4 1 ⁄2
16 13 1 ⁄2 14 1 ⁄2 22 9 ⁄16 12 1 3 ⁄8 12 – 3 ⁄4 21 5
18 14 3 ⁄8 15 3 ⁄8 24 11 ⁄16 12 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 12 – 3 ⁄4 23 1 ⁄4 5 1 ⁄4
20 16 17 27 3 ⁄32 12 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 14 – 3 ⁄4 25 1 ⁄2 5 1 ⁄2
All dimensions shown in inches.
Mechanical joint end is in compliance with ANSI 21.11.
page 7

Actuator Dimensional Data for Models 511A and 510A —
20" and Smaller
MDT Manual Actuator
J
All di men sions
shown in inches
L
Valve
Size
MDT
Size
J L M N P Q R S T V W
3 to 12" MDT-2 4 11 ⁄16 2 2 1 ⁄8 2 4 1 ⁄2 4 1 ⁄4 8 1 ⁄4 7 7 ⁄8 7 7 ⁄8 8 9 1 ⁄8 32
14, 16" MDT-3 5 5 ⁄8 2 7 ⁄16 3 1 ⁄4 3 5 ⁄32 5 5 ⁄8 5 3 ⁄8 10 3 ⁄8 10 1 ⁄2 10 1 ⁄8 12 9 1 ⁄8 30
18, 20" MDT-4 6 3 ⁄8 22 7 ⁄32 3 3 ⁄8 4 7 5 ⁄16 6 3 ⁄4 11 5 ⁄16 11 1 ⁄2 11 12 9 1 ⁄8 40
# Turns
to Close
Optional Accessories
Henry Pratt offers a variety of actuator extensions to meet our customer’s requirements. The choice of extension
style is determined by the need for valve position indication, location of the actuator and application.
Extension Stem with AWWA Nut
Used to extend the 2” nut on a buried service
actuator.
Extension Bonnet
Used to extend the actuator from the valve in
situations when there may be space constraints, or it
is not desirable to mount the actuator directly on the
valve.
Can be used for submerged service (such as reservoir
inlet) and buried service applications.
Extension Stem
With 2" AWWA Nut
Indicating Handwheel Floorstand, Torque Tube Floorstand,
Motor Actuator on Floorstand
Choice of floorstands or torque tube floorstand are determined
by the need for valve position indication and angular
alignment.
External Packing Bonnet
There are two styles offered based on valve size. Both styles
serve the same purpose; to allow for the valve packing to be
replaced without removing the actuator.
Stem Guide
A stem guide is a support designed to restrict the bending of a
long vertical pipe.
Extension
EXTENSION
Bonnet BONNET
Indicating Handwheel
Floorstand
FLOORSTAND
Torque Tube
Floorstand
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
Motor Actuator
Floorstand
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
Steady
Bearing
1"
Support bracket
when required
* To be
determined
by customer
when wall
bracket is
required.
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
UNIVERSAL JOINT
Torque tube and
extension bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
CLOSED
UNIVERSAL JOINT
page 8

Henry Pratt Model 511 Flanged/
510 Mechanical Joint
Sizes: 24 through 72 inches
Body Styles:
Flanged (24" - 72") Mechanical Joint (24" - 48")
Pressure Class:
Class 150B per AWWA Standard C504
Actuation Options:
Handwheel
Electric Motor
Pneumatic or
Hydraulic Cylinder
Buried Service
Chainwheel
Materials of Construction:
Body – ASTM A126 CLB cast iron
Disc – ASTM A536 Ductile Iron
Disc Edge – ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel
Seat – Buna N/EPDM rubber retained in the body
Seat Segments – ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel
Shaft – ASTM A276 Type 304 stainless steel
Bearings – Teflon lined fiberglass backed
Packing – Buna N/EPDM – V type packing
Paint – Liquid epoxy conforming to NSF 61 (lined and coated)
Features and Benefits
Rubber seat in body
Recessed segmented seat retention
Mechanically adjustable seat
Epoxy paint
Flow though disc design
Reduces the chance of seat damage from
tuberculation or other solids
Allows for simple bi-directional point
adjustment on rubber seat while keeping
hardware out of flowstream
No special tools or training required to adjust
and/or replace the seat
Reduces potential corrosion and extends valve
life
Disc design results in lower head-loss than
solid or hollow disc designs
page 9

Figure 511
24" - 72" Class 150 B Flanged Ends
Flanged End
Valve
Size
A B C D E F G
NOMINAL VALVE SIZE
G = BOLT CIRCLE
C = FLANGE OD
A
B
D
E
24 18 5 ⁄8 16 1 ⁄2 32 8 1 7 ⁄8 20 – 1 1 ⁄4 29 1 ⁄2
30 21 1 ⁄2 24 1 ⁄8 38 3 ⁄4 12 2 1 ⁄8 28 – 1 1 ⁄4 36
36 25 7 ⁄16 28 46 12 2 3 ⁄8 32 – 1 1 ⁄2 42 3 ⁄4
42 29 7 ⁄8 32 11 ⁄16 53 12 2 5 ⁄8 36 – 1 1 ⁄2 49 1 ⁄2
48 34 1 ⁄16 36 7 ⁄8 59 1 ⁄2 15 2 3 ⁄4 44 – 1 1 ⁄2 56
54 37 1 ⁄2 40 11 ⁄16 66 1 ⁄4 15 3 44 – 1 1 ⁄2 62 3 ⁄4
60 41 3 ⁄4 45 3 ⁄16 73 15 3 1 ⁄8 52 – 1 3 ⁄4 69 1 ⁄4
66 46 1 ⁄16 49 1 ⁄2 80 18 3 3 ⁄8 52 – 1 3 ⁄4 76
72 50 53 1 ⁄8 86 1 ⁄2 18 3 1 ⁄2 60 – 1 3 ⁄4 82 1 ⁄2
*Contact Henry Pratt for larger sizes
Figure 510
24" - 48" Class 150 B Mechanical Joint
Mechanical Joint End
Valve
Size
A B C D E F G X
24 18 5 ⁄8 16 1 ⁄2 31 9 ⁄16 14 1 ⁄8 1 5 ⁄8 16 3 ⁄4 30 7 1 ⁄8
30 21 1 ⁄2 24 1 ⁄8 39 20 1 13 ⁄16 20 -- 1 36 7 ⁄8 10
36 25 7 ⁄16 28 45 7 ⁄8 22 2 24 -- 1 43 3 ⁄4 14
42 29 7 ⁄8 33 53 22 2 28 -- 1 1 ⁄4 50 5 ⁄8 14
48 34 1 ⁄16 36 7 ⁄8 59 7 ⁄8 24 2 32 -- 1 1 ⁄4 57 1 ⁄2 16
*Contact Henry Pratt for larger sizes
Design Detail
page 10

Suggested Specification (24" and Larger)
General:
All butterfly valves shall be of the tight closing,
rubber seat type conforming to the design standards
of ANSI/AWWA C504 latest revision. Valves shall
be bubble-tight at the rated pressure in either
direction and shall be suitable for throttling service
and/or operation after long periods of inactivity.
Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years
experience producing AWWA butterfly valves.
Body:
All valve bodies shall be constructed of ASTM A126
Class B cast iron. Flanged valves shall have ANSI
B16.1 flanges with class 125# drilling. Mechanical
Joint Valves shall have ends conforming to the
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 standard.
Seat:
On 24” and larger valves the seat shall be adjustable
and replaceable in the field without the use of
special tools. Valve seats on valves 24” and larger
will be designed for bi-directional adjustment
without removal of the seat. Valve designs with the
rubber seat on the disc are not acceptable.
Disc:
The discs shall be constructed of ASTM A536
Ductile Iron with a 316 stainless steel edge. 24” and
larger discs will be the flow through design.
Shaft:
The valve shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel
ASTM A276 type 304. On valves 24” and larger, a
taper pin of 316 stainless steel will be used as the
disc/shaft connection.
Bearings:
All shaft bearing shall be of the self-lubrication,
corrosion-resistant sleeve type. Bearings shall be
designed for horizontal and/or vertical shaft loading.
Packing:
On valves 24” and larger the packing will be
V-type. All packing will be self adjusting and wear
compensating. Valve packing arrangement shall be
designed so that actuator removal will not result in
packing seal failure.
Paint:
Valves 24” and larger will be lined and coated with
a liquid epoxy conforming to AWWA C550 and
NSF61. Coatings will be a minimum of 8 mils DFT.
Testing:
All valves shall be hydrostatic and leak tested in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C504.
Manual Actuators:
Manual actuators shall be AWWA approved
worm gear actuators. The actuator incorporates a
hardened worm with bronze heavy duty quadrant
locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve
in any intermediate position between fully open and
fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Worm
gear to be rated 450 foot pounds at the stops.
Valves shall be Henry Pratt model 511/510 or
approved equivalent.
page 11

PRATT PRODUCT GUIDE
Model
2FII
Monoflange
MKII
Plug
Valve
Triton ®
XR70
Indicating Butterfly Valve
UL & FM approved
Tilting Disc
Check Valve
Triton ®
XL
N-Stamp Nuclear
Butterfly Valve
Cone
Valve
Rectangular
PIVA Post Indicating Valve Assembly
UL & FM approved
Sleeve
Valve
Rubber Seated
Ball Valve
Triton ®
HP250
Check
Valve
Groundhog ®
Valve
Control
Systems
Compact Controllable
Energy Dissipater
Metal Seated
Ball Valve
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506-5563
United States
630-844-4000
Fax 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
ISO 9001: 2000 Certified
©2012 Henry Pratt Company | Printed in the U.S.A. | AWWA BFV 0112

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Specifications for 150B pressure class Butterfly Valves
24” and Larger Segmented seat design
Tag numbers: TPS-P1-BFV1, P2-BFV1, P3-BFV1, P4-BFV1; OPS-P1-BFV1, P2-BFV1;
TPS-YP1-BFV1, YP2-BFV1, YP3-BFV1; OPS-YP2-BFV1; WPS-YP1-BFV3,
YP2-BFV1, YP3-BFV1; WPS-YP4-BFV2; WPS-YP5-BFV-1, YP5-BFV2,
WPS-YP1-BFV5, YP1-BFV6; OPS-PL-BFV6
General
All butterfly valves are tight closing, rubber seated type and fully comply with the latest revision of
AWWA Standard C504/C516 and NSF61, where applicable. Valves are bubble-tight at rated
pressures in either direction, and shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling
service and for applications requiring valve actuation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs
rotate 90˚ from the full open position to the tight shut position. Regardless of valve size, angular
misposition of disc can be up to 1˚ off center without leakage.
Valve Body
All valve bodies are cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, narrow body design. Flange drilling is in
accordance with ANSI B16.1 standard for cast iron flanges. Body thickness is in strict accordance
with AWWA C504.
Valve Disc
All valve discs are constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536 with a stainless steel seating edge. The disc
shall not have any hollow chambers that can entrap water. Disc and shaft connection are made with
stainless steel pins.
Valve Shaft
All shafts are turned, ground, polished and constructed of ASTM A-276 Type 304 stainless steel. Shafts
are of two-piece, stub type and keyed for actuator connection. Shaft diameters meet minimum
requirements established by the latest revision of AWWA Standard C504 for their class.
Valve Seat
All seats are constructed of Buna N and suitable for bidirectional shutoff at rated pressure. Seats are
retained in the valve body by recessed segmented seat retention. Seats are full 360˚ without interruption
and have a plurality of grooves mating with a spherical disc edge seating surface. Valve seats are field
adjustable around the full 360˚ circumference and replaceable without dismantling the actuator, disc or
shaft and without removing the valve from the line.
Shaft Seals
The shaft seals are self adjusting “V” type chevron packing. Shaft seals are designed to allow
replacement without removing the valve shaft.

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Valve Bearings
All butterfly valves are fitted with sleeve-type bearings. Bearings are corrosion resistant and selflubricating.
Bearing material is Teflon-lined with a special fiberglass backing. Bearing load do not exceed
1⁄5 of the compressible strength of the bearing or shaft material.
Manual Valve Actuator for tag #TPS-P1-BFV1, P2-BFV1, P3-BFV1, P4-BFV1; OPS-P1-BFV1,
P2-BFV1
Valve actuators conform to AWWA Standard C504 and are designed to hold the valve in any intermediate
position between full open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuators are equipped with
mechanical stop-limiting devices to prevent overtravel of the disc in the open and closed positions. The
buried service MDT actuator has a mechanical stop which will withstand and input torque of 450 ft. lbs at
extreme actuator position without damage.
Bevel gear worm gear
See actuator spec sheet
Electric Valve Actuator
See actuator spec sheet
Painting
Valve interior and exterior surfaces except for seating shall be coated with two coats of epoxy paint
Amercoat 370 in accordance with TT-C-494A and AWWA C504.
Testing
Hydrostatic and seat leakage tests will be conducted in strict accordance with AWWA Standard C504

Triton XR-70 Butterfly Valve
Engineering Creative Solutions
for Fluid Systems Since 1901

A Tradition of Excellence
With the development of the first rubber seated butterfly
valve more than 70 years ago, the Henry Pratt Company
became a trusted name in the flow control industry,
setting the standard for product quality and customer
service. Today Pratt provides the following range of
superior products to the water, wastewater and power
generation industries.
Butterfly Valves: from 3" to 162"
Rectangular Valves: 1' x 1' to 14' x 16'
Ball Valves —
Rubber Seated: from 4" to 60"
Metal Seated: from 6" to 48"
Plug Valves: from 1/2" to 36", 3 ways
Hydraulic Control Systems
Valve Controls
Energy Dissipating Valves
and Fixed Energy Dissipaters
Cone Valves
Check Valves
A Commitment to Meeting
The Customers’ Needs
Henry Pratt valves represent a long-term commitment
to both the customer and to a tradition of product
excellence. This commitment is evident in the number
of innovations we have brought to the industries we
serve. In fact, the Henry Pratt Company was the first to
introduce many of the flow control products in use today,
including the first rubber seated butterfly valve, one of
the first nuclear N-Stamp valves, and the bonded seat
butterfly valve.
Innovative Products
For Unique Applications
Though many of the standard valves we produce are
used in water filtration and distribution applications, Pratt
has built a reputation on the ability to develop specialized
products that help customers to meet their individual
operational challenges.
Creative Engineering
for Fluid Systems
Pratt’s ability to provide practical solutions to complex
issues is demonstrated by the following case histories.
Earthquake Proof Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured hydraulically actuated
valves for a water storage application so that the valves
would automatically operate in the event of earthquakes.
This lead to the development of a valve that will withstand
acceleration forces of up to 6g’s.
Custom Actuation/Isolation Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured valves that would
isolate a working chamber in the event of a nuclear
emergency during the decommissioning of armed
nuclear warheads. The valves were able to close in
a millisecond using specially designed Pratt electropneumatic
actuators.
Valves Designed for
Harsh Environments
Pratt designed and manufactured a 144" diameter
butterfly valve for the emergency cooling system at
a jet engine test facility. The valve was designed to supply
water to help dissipate the tremendous heat generated by
the engines during testing.
Through experience, commitment and creative engineering, Pratt is uniquely
suited to provide superior products for our customers’ special needs.
For more information, contact our corporate headquarters in Aurora, Illinois.

401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506-5563
www.henrypratt.com
phone: 630.844.4000
fax: 630.844.4160
Table of Contents
Pratt / Triton XR-70 Butterfly Valve
Scope of Line .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2
Features & Benefits .........................................................................................................................................................................................3
Design Details ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
E-Lok Seat Design ...........................................................................................................................................................................................6
Flow Through Design .....................................................................................................................................................................................6
Coatings and Rubber Linings ......................................................................................................................................................................7
Water Flow Characteristics ...........................................................................................................................................................................8
Valve End Types and Dimensions: Flanged End .................................................................................................................................9
Valve End Types and Dimensions: Mechanical Joint End ............................................................................................................ 10
Suggested Specifications for Butterfly Valves 24"
and larg er Cast Construction .................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Actuation ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12

Scope of Line:
Triton XR-70 Butterfly Valve
Sizes: 24 through 144 inches
Standard Body Styles:
- Flange x flange ends
- Mechanical Joint ends (24"-48")
- Flange and Mechanical Joint ends (24", 30", 36")
Standards:
- Conforms to AWWA C504 requirements
Pressure Class:
- AWWA pressure classes 75B (54"-144") and 150B
Seat: Rubber seat-in-body
Actuation Options:
- Pratt MDT manual ac tu a tor with AWWA nut,
handwheel or chainwheel
- Worm gear actuators
- Pratt Dura-Cyl hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder
Accessories/Options:
Anti-cavitation device, bonnets, floorstands, lantern
glands, shaft locking devices, external epoxy injection
port, snubbers, expansion joints, rubber lining
Consult factory for accessory details.
Optional Body Styles:
- Victaulic Ends
- Concrete Pipe Ends
Consult factory for lead times.
Pratt Triton XR-70
2 | Henry Pratt Company

Features and Benefits:
Triton XR-70 Butterfly Valve
Feature
E-Lok seat in design
Rubber seat located in body
Optional external injection port
Seat material also available in EPDM
Valve cycle tested per AWWA C504 requirements
Flow through disc on 30 inch and larger
Nonmetallic bearings
V-type shaft packing
Through disc pinning
Benefit
– No hardware to loosen. Precision rubber seat
installation and uniform interference provide long seat
life. Foolproof adjustment and/or replacement (in
most cases without re mov ing the valve from the line)
– Reduces performance problems related to
corrosive buildup in valve body and pipeline.
– E-Lok seat can be adjusted and/or repaired in
the field without dewatering the pipe line
– Can accommodate tem per a tures up to 250 degrees F
– Proven reliability over the life of the valve
– More strength, less weight, greater free flow
area. Higher C v : lower head loss results in
energy savings for cus tom er’s system
– Prevents galvanic corrosion and provides
lower coefficient of friction
– Self-adjusting, lasts the life of the valve
– Provides a tight disc-to-shaft pin connection, greatly
reducing the possibility of loosening through vibration
Specifications for
Materials of Construction
Body Material:
Cast Iron (24"-48") — ASTM A126, Class B
Ductile Iron (54" & Larger) – ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12
Disc Material:
Ductile Iron — ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12
Disc Edge:
Stainless Steel – ASTM A-240 Type 316
Shaft Material:
304 Stainless Steel — ASTM A276 Type 304
Bearing Material:
TLFB — Teflon lined, Fiberglass backed
Henry Pratt Company | 3

Design Details:
Triton XR-70 Butterfly Valve
4 | Henry Pratt Company

Design Details:
Triton XR-70 Butterfly Valve
1) Corrosion Resistant Shafts
To prevent corrosion of a vital structural component,
shafts are con struct ed of centerless ground ASTM A276
type 304. This material is superior to car bon steel or
similar materials that afford little protection against the
harmful effects of cor ro sion. Pratt’s standard line consists
of a two-piece, stub-type shaft keyed for the actuator
connection.
2) Packing and Packing Gland Assemblies
Packing is self adjusting “V” type. The packing gland or
shaft seal is uti lized only in the top trunnion of the valve
body where the shaft protrudes for actuator connection.
The packing as sem bly incorporates a nylon pack ing
re tain er accompanied by several rings of packing. Other
available packing gland ar range ments include water seals
(lantern glands) for pos i tive and negative pressures, and
reverse “V” type for vacuum ap pli ca tions. Where access
to packing is required, open-type bonnets can be provid
ed. When this option is specified, “V” type packing is
held in place with a bronze retaining gland which is fastened
to the valve trunnion with plated steel cap screws.
3) Bearings
Self-lubricating, sleeve-type bearings are used in both
trun nions of the valve body. Bearings support the shaft
and pro vide minimum friction during shaft rotation.
Bear ing material is Teflon-lined with a special fi berglass
back ing. This type of bearing offers electrical
insulating qual i ties between the disc/shaft assembly
and the valve body, thereby diminishing the effects of
galvanic corrosion. In addition, its reduced co ef fi cient of
friction requires far less torque than the metallic bear ing
materials.
4) Rubber Seat
The multi-ridge surface of Pratt’s E-Lok seat seals a
full 360˚ against a stainless steel spherical disc edge.
Be cause of the laterally spaced grooves, rubber stress
is sub stan tial ly reduced, resulting in less sealing torque.
The grooved seat design, coupled with the wide spher i-
cal ly shaped seating edge of the disc, also allows greater
disc closure tolerance. Regardless of valve size, angular
misposition of the disc can be 1˚ off center without
leakage. The seat is mechanically retained by a unique
ep oxy in jec tion process which moves the seat against the
disc to conform to the exact radius of the disc with uniform
con tact pressure. It is fully adjustable by local epoxy
in jec tion and can be replaced in the field. As an option,
valves may be pur chased with an ex ter nal in jec tion port
which allows seat adjustment and repair to be performed
with out re mov ing the valve or de w a ter ing the pipeline.
For additional in for ma tion regarding the E-Lok seat, refer
to the “E-Lok Seat Design” section of this brochure.
5) Shaft Connection
Disc-to-shaft connection is accomplished by
conservative ly sized stainless steel or monel taper pins,
threaded at one end and secured with lockwashers and
nuts. On 24 inch valves, stainless steel dowel pins are
used. Pratt’s through-pin design provides the tightest
possible con nec tion between the shaft and disc.
6) Valve Disc
Pratt valve discs are constructed of the high est strengthto-weight
ra tio materials available. On our 24 inch valve,
the arch side of the disc is closed and the flat side is open,
forming a slightly concave surface. On valves 30 inches
and greater, a flow through disc design is em ployed to
minimize line tur bu lence and lower head loss. The great er
free flow area pro vides less pres sure drop in the full-open
position than other disc shapes. For ad di tion al in for mation
re gard ing Pratt’s flow through disc de sign, refer to
“Flow through Design” section of this brochure.
7) Valve Body
The bodies of the XR-70 are constructed of heavy cast
iron ASTM A126. On flange end bod ies, flange drilling
is provided in ac cor dance with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron
flanges through 72 inches. Larger sizes where applicable
per AWWA C207.
8) Thrust Bearing Assembly
The two-way thrust bearing is preset at the factory. On
valves 30 inches and larger, the thrust bearing assembly
consists of a stainless steel or monel stud fastened to
the bottom of the valve shaft. The stud extends beyond
the bottom cover. The thrust collar is threaded to the
stud and pinned. On the 24 inch valve, the thrust collar
is pinned to the shaft and fitted with bronze spacers. The
bottom cover cap is then bolted to the bot tom cover and
retains the thrust collar which, in turn, retains the position
of the disc assembly. The cavity con tain ing the thrust
collar is packed with grease providing lifetime lubrication
of the thrust bearing assembly. The cap is fully gasketed
to prevent leakage.
Valve End Connection Options
A wide range of valve end con nec tion options for the
Pratt Triton XR-70 are available. See “Valve End Types
and Dimensions” section for details.
Actuation Options
See “Actuation” section for Pratt actuators or refer to
Pratt’s Actuator brochure for the many ac tu a tion op tions
available for the Tri ton XR-70.
Henry Pratt Company | 5

E-Lok Seat Design
Years of Reliable Service
The Triton XR-70 uti lizes the unique and patented* E-Lok
seat-in-body design. With years of reliable performance,
the E-Lok’s seat retention system still remains one of the
most in no va tive con cepts in butterfly valve seat de sign.
This design is often imitated without the superior results
that only Pratt experience can deliver.
How the E-Lok Seat Provides
Bubble Tight Closure
The rubber seat, which is mount ed in the valve body, seals
a full 360˚ against a stainless steel disc edge with low
torque and high tol er ance to seating angle. The ridg es
molded into the seat surface greatly reduce the pos sibil
i ty of the seat being over compressed and minimizes
compression set of rubber. In man u fac tur ing, a two
part epoxy com pound is injected into a channel behind
the rub ber seat with the disc in the closed position.
This ensures equal interference around the complete
circumference of the disc/seat contact area. The epoxy
hardens, bonding neither to the met al seat channel nor to
the rubber seat, yet me chan i cal ly re tains the seat in the
body. Since the seat is installed and remains in a “relaxed”
state, the possibility of damaging the seat is greatly
reduced as compared to a seat that is “stressed” when
bolted on to a body or disc as in other designs.
port, the seat can be adjusted from the out side of the valve
without de wa ter ing the pipe line. The injection process can
be achieved by utilizing simple tools and an in expen sive,
disposable seat injection kit.
Easy Seat Replacement
In the unlikely event that seat replacement is required, it
can be performed on valves 30 inch es and larger without
re mov ing the valve from the pipeline (as long as a
tech ni cian can access inside the valve), on all sizes with out
re mov ing the shaft and/or disc. The original rub ber seat
and hardened epoxy com pound used to retain the seat
can be removed from the valve with ordinary hand tools.
A re place ment seat can then be installed, re turn ing the
valve to its original bubble tight condition.
Flow Through Design
The Triton disc design distributes material where it is
need ed to resist loads, achieving more strength at less
weight than any other disc design currently on the mar ket.
The flow through disc has a greater free flow area than
conventional lens-shaped or offset disc designs, resulting
in lower pumping costs.
During injection, the seat is moved against the disc as
the epoxy fills the cavity to provide uni form disc-to-seat
interference around the en tire seating surface. The
re sult is the bub ble tight closure. This system eliminates
con ven tion al seat retention hardware that can loosen and
corrode, potentially damaging pumps and other costly
auxiliary equipment.
Simple Seat Adjustment
Another significant feature of the E-Lok seat is that it can
be easily adjusted or re placed in the field while the valve
is installed in the line. Ad just ment is achieved by local
injection of ep oxy directly through the seat material into
the chan nel be hind the seat. The epoxy travels the circum
fer ence of the valve body channel until it finds the void
and moves the seat ma te ri al outward toward the disc edge,
bringing the valve back into bubble tight condition. If the
valve was supplied with the op tion al** ex ter nal in jec tion
SPHERE
OF CONTACT
DISC
METAL TO METAL
CLEARANCE
UP TO 1/4"
SEAT
CAST
EPOXY
* U.S. Patent Nos. 3,304,050 and 3,418,411
** U.S. Patent No. 5,538,029
6 | Henry Pratt Company

Coatings and Rubber Linings
Withstanding Harsh Conditions
and the Test of Time
In many industrial facilities, valves are reg u lar ly subject ed
to harsh conditions, in clud ing re cir cu lat ing wa ter loops
where cor ro sive ness in creas es each time the water
pass es through the sys tem, and cooling water sys tems
which utilize brack ish wa ter or salt wa ter as a me di um.
This is especially true at fossil and nu cle ar pow er
gen erating plants, which fre quent ly use sea water as their
main cooling wa ter resource.
To com bat the damaging effects of these harsh
condi tions, Pratt utilizes epoxy coatings and rub ber
linings in conjunction with superior design fea tures to
help ensure that the Triton XR-70 butterfly valves will
withstand the test of time.
The unique construction of the Pratt Triton rub ber seated
butterfly valve makes both epoxy coatings and rubber
lin ings much more ef fec tive than other butterfly valve
de signs. Since all surfaces of the Triton disc are exposed,
there is no possibility for corrosion to start in hidden,
un pro tect ed areas like the inside of a hollow, lens-shaped
offset disc. Since there is no seat retention hardware,
coating and/or lining breakdown in this area is also
elim i nat ed.
Rubber Linings
Pratt lines corrosion-susceptible surfaces with a 3 ⁄16-inch
thick rubber of 60 Shore A durom e ter. The surfaces are
prepared and blasted to a near- white metal finish. The
linings are ap plied by the “hand-lay-up-meth od” (similar
to tank lining techniques) and then cured in an open
steam autoclave using 40 to 50 psig steam pres sure.
Following application and curing, the linings are vi su al ly
inspected for air bubbles and checked at 7,000 volts with
a positive control high-volt age spark tester.
Epoxy Coatings
Pratt has an extensive coating facility which ap plies
and cures coatings in a controlled en vi ron ment. Prior
to ap pli ca tion of the epoxy, valves are sand blast ed and
thoroughly cleaned to ensure a prop er bond. The in te ri or
and external sur fac es of each valve are coated with a
Polya mide-cured, rust inhibiting epoxy, NSF ap proved.
A mag net ic dry film thickness gauge is used to con firm
that the coat ing thick ness match es the project/or der
spec i fi ca tion re quire ments. Electron ic test ing for pin
holes (hol i days) is per formed.
In applications involving salt water and/or en trained
sol ids which can cause erosion, the su pe ri or i ty of rubber
lining on the valve disc has been clearly demonstrated by
Pratt but ter fly valves placed in service decades ago that
are still providing bubble tight closure today. Both ep oxy
coat ing and rub ber lin ing have also suc cess ful ly pro tect ed
the valve bodies in these corrosive ser vice con di tions
as illustrated by Pratt’s long track record of quality and
re li abil i ty at in dus tri al facilities and power plants around
the world.
3/16" RUBBER
Other rubber lining features include Pratt’s shaft-bearing
being thor ough ly pro tect ed by rubber shaft seals to
maintain bearing performance throughout the life of the
valve. Also, the shaft bore in disc is sealed with a rubber
seal. The juncture of the rubber liner to the rubber seat is
also protected by a sealant applied under pressure.
LINING
CORROSION-RESISTANT
DISC EDGE
LINING
Complete coverage of corrosion
susceptible wetted surfaces is demonstrated
in these drawings. Body
lining in conjunction with the seat
creates a water barrier and protects
against corrosion.
Henry Pratt Company | 7

Water Flow Characteristics
Proven Performance
During its product development phase, the Triton butterfly valve was test ed to en sure that it met our own rigorous
standards for flow ca pac i ty. The Tri ton but ter fly valve con sis tent ly pro duced high C v values which trans lates to low er flow
re sis tance, in turn, low er ing system operating costs to the user over the life of the valve.
Full Open C v Valves
Triton XR-70 Valves
Class 150B
10 Bar
Size Flat Arch
24 25380 26378
30 39657 41216
36 59351 62447
42 85899 89170
48 112195 116466
54 141808 146563
60 172343 176486
66 208535 213548
72 248174 254139
78 291260 298261
84 337793 345912
90 387772 397093
96 441199 451803
102 498072 510043
108 558392 571813
114 622159 637113
120 689373 705942
132 834171 854190
144 992697 1016557
8 | Henry Pratt Company

Valve End Types and Dimensions: Flanged End
NOMINAL VALVE SIZE
G = BOLT CIRCLE
C = FLANGE OD
A
B
D
E
Notes:
– Dimensions shown in inches.
– Size = Nominal valve size.
– For bolts smaller than 1 3 ⁄4 inches in diameter, bolt holes will be 1 ⁄8 inches
larger than diameter of bolts. For bolts 1 3 ⁄4 inches in diameter and larger,
bolt holes will be 1 ⁄4 inches larger than diameter of bolts. Dimensions and
drilling of end flanges conform to ANSI B16.1 Standard for cast iron
flanges.
– Allow 3 1 ⁄2 inches for thrust bearing removal.
– F = Number and size of bolts. Class 125. Holes in trunnion area are
tapped, see note.
Note: TAPPED HOLES: “F” SIZE UNC-2B X “E” DEEP
24" VALVE 4 HOLES 2 TOP & 2 BOTTOM
30" & UP 8 HOLES 4 TOP & 4 BOTTOM
EACH FLANGE
FLANGED END DIMENSIONS
SIZE A B C D E F G
24 18⅝ 18⅜ 32 8 1⅞ 20-1¼ 29½
30 21½ 24⅛ 38¾ 12 2⅛ 28-1¼ 36
36 257⁄16 28 46 12 2⅜ 32-1½ 42¾
42 29⅞ 3211⁄16 53 12 2⅝ 36-1½ 49½
48 341⁄16 36⅞ 59½ 15 2¾ 44-1½ 56
54 37½ 4011⁄16 66¼ 15 3 44-1¾ 62¾
60 41¾ 453⁄16 73 15 3⅛ 52-1¾ 69¼
66 461⁄16 49½ 80 18 3⅜ 52-1¾ 76
72 50 53⅛ 86½ 18 3½ 60-1¾ 82½
Henry Pratt Company | 9

Valve End Types and Dimensions: Mechanical Joint End
A
B
Notes:
– Dimensions shown in inches.
– Size = nominal valve size.
– Bolts, nuts, glands and gaskets not furnished unless otherwise specified
in contract.
– Allow 31⁄2 inches for thrust bearing removal.
– F = Number and size of bolts.
NOMINAL VALVE SIZE
G = BOLT CIRCLE
C
D
X= LAYING
LENGTH
E
Installation Diagram
MECHANICAL JOINT END DIMENSIONS
SIZE A B C D E F G X
24 18⅝ 18⅜ 319⁄16 13¼ 1⅝ 16-¾ 30 6⅜
30 21½ 24⅛ 39 18 113⁄16 20-1 36⅞ 10
36 257⁄16 28 45⅞ 22 2 24-1 43¾ 14
42 29⅞ 32¾ 53 22 2 28-1¼ 50⅝ 14
48 341⁄16 36⅞ 59⅞ 24 2 32-1¼ 57½ 16
10 | Henry Pratt Company

Suggested Specifications: Butterfly Valves 24"
and larg er Cast Construction
General
All butterfly valves shall be of the tight closing, rubber
seated type and fully comply with the latest revision
of AWWA Stan dard C504/C516 and NSF61, where
applicable. Valves shall be bubble-tight at rated
pressures in either direction, and shall be satisfactory
for applications involving throttling service and for
applications requiring valve actuation af ter long periods
of inactivity. Valve discs shall rotate 90˚ from the full open
position to the tight shut position. Re gard less of valve
size, angular misposition of disc can be up to 1˚ off center
without leakage.
The manufacturer shall have manufactured tight closing,
rub ber seated butterfly valves for a period of at least ten
years. All valves from 24" through 144" shall be the Triton
XR-70 as man u fac tured by the Henry Pratt Company or
an approved equal.
Valve Body
All valve bodies shall be cast iron ASTM A126, Class B,
narrow body design. Flange drilling shall be in ac cordance
with ANSI B16.1 standard for cast iron flanges. Body
thickness shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C504
where applicable.
Valve Disc
All valve discs shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM
A536 with a stainless steel seating edge. The disc shall
not have any hollow chambers that can entrap wa ter. All
surfac es shall be visually inspected and mea sur able to
assure all struc tur al members are at full disc strength.
Disc and shaft con nec tion shall be made with stainless
steel pins.
Typical Applications for Triton XR-70
Thousands of Triton XR-70 but ter fly valves have
been installed in plants and in dus tri al fa cil i ties
around the world. Some typ i cal ap pli ca tions include
the following:
– Water treatment – Pumping stations
– Wastewater treatment – Reservoirs
– Cooling water systems – Pipelines
– Circulating water systems
– Nuclear, fossil fuel and cogeneration power plants
Valve Shaft
All shafts shall be turned, ground, polished and construct
ed of ASTM A-276 Type 304 or Type 316 stainless
steel. Shafts shall be two-piece, stub type and keyed for
ac tu a tor connection. Shaft di am e ters shall meet minimum
re quirements established by the latest revision of AWWA
Standard C504 for their class, where applicable.
Valve Seat
All seats shall be constructed of synthetic rubber
compound such as Buna N or EPDM and suitable for
bi di rection al shutoff at rated pressure. Seats shall be
retained in the valve body by mechanical means without
re tain ing rings, segments, screws or hardware of any
kind in the flow stream. Seats shall be a full 360˚ with out
interruption and have a plu ral i ty of grooves mating with a
spher i cal disc edge seating sur face. Valve seats shall be
field ad just able around the full 360˚ circumference and
re place able with out dis mantling the ac tu a tor, disc or shaft
and without re mov ing the valve from the line.
Valve Bearings
All butterfly valves shall be fitted with sleeve-type
bearings. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant and selflu
bri cating. Bear ing load shall not exceed 1 ⁄5 of the compress
ible strength of the bearing or shaft material.
Valve Actuator
Valve actuators shall conform to AWWA Standard C504
and shall be designed to hold the valve in any in ter medi
ate po sition between full open and fully closed without
creeping or flut ter ing.
Painting
All surfaces of the valve shall be clean, dry and free from
grease before applying paint or coating. The valve in teri
or and ex te ri or surfaces, except for the seating surfac
es, shall be pro vid ed with the manufacturer’s standard
coating un less otherwise spec i fied by contract.
Testing
Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in strict
ac cor dance with AWWA Standard C504.
Proof of Design
The manufacturer furnishing the valves under the
specification shall be prepared to show proof that the
valves provided meet the design requirements of AWWA
Stan dard C504.
Henry Pratt Company | 11

Actuation
Traveling Nut Type Manual Actuator
The Pratt MDT manual compound lever-traveling nut type actuator is the ideal manual actuation option for the Triton
XR-70 butterfly valve. The MDT provides characterized closure, minimizing the possibility of line shock by slowing down
the valve travel as the valve disc approaches the closed position. The high input torque capacity (450 foot pound maximum
and a 200 pound pull on the handwheel or chainwheel) provides inherent protection from actua tor misuse.
The Pratt MDT actuator is self locking without a unidirectional sustained force from the valve. It can be relied upon to
maintain exact valve position under conditions of fluctuating, turbulent and intermittent flow.
Completely in conformity to the latest revision of AWWA Standard C504, the Pratt Triton valve, coupled with the MDT
actuator, offers single source responsibility and reliability for both actuator and valve. To ensure that we can meet the
delivery requirements of our valued customers, Pratt maintains an inventory of selected valves equipped with MDT
actuators. Consult factory for availability.
Chainwheel
Handwheel
MDT Mounting Positions
M
2" St’d.
AWWA Nut
W=
DIA.
V=
DIA.
N
CLOSED
OPEN
PRATT
P
PRATT
OPEN
PRATT
OPEN
Q
Spur Gear
S
T
R
End Cover
Standard
Position
Alternate
Position
J
L
Notes:
– Clockwise to close (open left) unless otherwise specified.
– Spur gear and end cover apply only to MDT6S.
MDT
Dimensions
Size J L M N P Q R S T V W
MDT-3 7¾ 41⁄16 3¼ 35⁄22 5⅝ 5⅜ 9¼ 10½ 10 12 9⅛
MDT-4 8 4½ 3⅜ 4 75⁄16 6¾ 10½ 11½ 11 12 9⅛
MDT-5 10 5⅝ 4½ 5½ 8¾ 10½ 17 17⅛ 17⅞ 18 167⁄16
MDT-5S 10¾ 6⅛ 5⅝ 7 10⅝ 1515⁄16 1911⁄16 20 20¾ 24 22¼
MDT-6S 12⅞ 7⅝ 7 8¼ 12⅝ 18⅝ 26½ 26¾ 25 7 ⁄8 24 22¼
* The Triton XR-70 can be equipped with a wide range of cylinder actuators and electric motor actuators to
meet your special operating requirements. Please consult our factory for additional in formation.
12 | Henry Pratt Company

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Specifications for 150B pressure class Butterfly Valves
24” and Larger
Tag numbers: OPS-PL-BFV1, OPS-PL-BFV2, OPS-PL-BFV3, BFV4, BFV5
General
All butterfly valves are tight closing, rubber seated type and fully comply with the latest revision of
AWWA Standard C504/C516 and NSF61, where applicable. Valves are bubble-tight at rated
pressures in either direction, and shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling
service and for applications requiring valve actuation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs
rotate 90˚ from the full open position to the tight shut position. Regardless of valve size, angular
misposition of disc can be up to 1˚ off center without leakage.
Valve Body
All valve bodies are cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, narrow body design. Flange drilling is in
accordance with ANSI B16.1 standard for cast iron flanges. Body thickness is in strict accordance
with AWWA C504.
Valve Disc
All valve discs are constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536 with a stainless steel seating edge. The disc
shall not have any hollow chambers that can entrap water. Disc and shaft connection are made with
stainless steel pins.
Valve Shaft
All shafts are turned, ground, polished and constructed of ASTM A-276 Type 304 stainless steel. Shafts
are of two-piece, stub type and keyed for actuator connection. Shaft diameters meet minimum
requirements established by the latest revision of AWWA Standard C504 for their class.
Valve Seat
All seats are constructed of synthetic rubber compound such as Buna N and suitable for bidirectional
shutoff at rated pressure. Seats are retained in the valve body by mechanical means without retaining
rings, segments, screws or hardware of any kind in the flow stream. Seats are full 360˚ without
interruption and have a plurality of grooves mating with a spherical disc edge seating surface. Valve seats
are field adjustable around the full 360˚ circumference and replaceable without dismantling the actuator,
disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line.
Shaft Seals
The shaft seals are self adjusting “V” type chevron packing. Shaft seals are designed to allow
replacement without removing the valve shaft.
Valve Bearings
All butterfly valves are fitted with sleeve-type bearings. Bearings are corrosion resistant and selflubricating.
Bearing material is Teflon-lined with a special fiberglass backing. Bearing load do not exceed
1⁄5 of the compressible strength of the bearing or shaft material.

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Painting
Valve interior and exterior surfaces except for seating shall be coated with two coats of epoxy paint
Amercoat 370 in accordance with AWWA C550 and AWWA C504. Coating is NSF-61 approved.
Valve Actuator
Valve actuators conform to AWWA Standard C504 and are designed to hold the valve in any intermediate
position between full open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuators are equipped with
mechanical stop-limiting devices to prevent overtravel of the disc in the open and closed positions. The
buried service MDT actuator has a mechanical stop which will withstand and input torque of 450 ft. lbs at
extreme actuator position without damage.

A Tradition of Excellence
With the development of the first rubber seated
butterfly valve more than 70 years ago, the Henry
Pratt Company became a trusted name in the flow
control industry, setting the standard for product
quality and customer service. Today Pratt provides the
following range of superior products to the water,
waste water and power generation industries.
BUTTERFLY VALVES: from 3" to 162"
RECTANGULAR VALVES: 1' x 1' to 14' x 16'
BALL VALVES —
RUBBER SEATED: from 4" to 60"
METAL SEATED: from 6" to 48"
PLUG VALVES: from 1/2" to 36", 3 ways
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
VALVE CONTROLS
ENERGY DISSIPATING VALVES
AND FIXED ENERGY DISSIPATERS
CONE VALVES
CHECK VALVES
A Commitment to Meeting
The Customers’ Needs
Henry Pratt valves represent a long-term commitment
to both the customer and to a tradition of product
excellence. This commitment is evident in the number
of innovations we have brought to the industries we
serve. In fact, the Henry Pratt Company was the first
to introduce many of the flow control products in use
today, including the first rubber seated butterfly valve,
one of the first nuclear N-Stamp valves, and the
bonded seat butterfly valve.
Innovative Products
For Unique Applications
Though many of the standard valves we produce are
used in water filtration and distribution applications,
Pratt has built a reputation on the ability to develop
specialized products that help customers to meet their
individual operational challenges.
Creative Engineering
for Fluid Systems
Pratt’s ability to provide practical solutions to complex
issues is demonstrated by the following case histories.
Earthquake Proof Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured hydraulically
actuated valves for a water storage application so that
the valves would automatically operate in the event of
earthquakes. This lead to the development of a valve
that will withstand forces of up to 6g’s.
Custom Actuation/
Isolation Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured valves that would
isolate a working chamber in the event of a nuclear
emergency during the decommissioning of armed
nuclear warheads. The valves were able to close in a
millisecond using specially designed Pratt electropneumatic
actuators.
Valves Designed for
Harsh Environments
Pratt designed and manufactured a 144" diameter
butterfly valve for the emergency cooling system at
a jet engine test facility. The valve was designed to
supply water to help dissipate the tremendous heat
generated by the engines during testing.
Through experience, commitment and creative engineering, Pratt is uniquely
suited to provide superior products for our customers’ special needs.
For more information, contact our corporate headquarters in Aurora, Illinois.

SCOPE OF THE LINE: PRATT HP250II BUTTERFLY VALVE
Sizes: 3" through 20" Bonded Seat
24" through 48" E-Lok Seat
Body Styles: End connections
■ Flanged
■ Mechanical Joint
■ Flanged x Mechanical Joint
Pressure Class:
■ AWWA 250 B
Actuation Options*:
■ Nut
■ Handwheel
■ Buried Service
*Consult factory for other end connections
and acutation options
Stainless steel shaft
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
■
Ductile iron valve body
“V” type packing
Ductile iron
body
■
■
■
Stainless steel shaft
Ductile iron disc
Rubber seat
Ductile iron
disc
Rubber seat
MATING CHART
Steel
Cast Iron/Ductile Iron
HP250 AWWA C207-01 Class F ANSI B16.1 Class 250
HP250II AWWA C207-01 Class B ANSI B16.1 Class 125
Class D AWWA C110 Class 125
Class E
MSS Sp-44 Steel C1.150
ASME B16.47-96 Steel C1.150 Series A
page 2
Henry Pratt Company

HP250II BUTTERFLY VALVE
FEATURE
■ Higher Pressures
■ Wide Size Range
■ Low Seating/Unseating
Torques
■ Unique Disc Design
■ Adjustable/Replaceable Seat
on 24" and larger
■ Choice of Valve Ends
■ Actuators and Accessories
BENEFIT
■ Working pressures to 250 psi with
temperatures to 150° F.
■ Available in sizes 3" - 72" (flanged ends);
6" - 48" (mechanical joint ends).
■ Increases seat life and reduces actuator size.
■ Provides more strength, less weight, and
greater free-flow area than conventional disc
designs.
■ Patented E-LOK ® design retains seat in body
without metal hardware. If adjustable or
replacement is required, both can be done in
the field utilizing simple hand tools.
■ Flange and Mechanical Joint. Flanges are in
full accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125#
cast iron flanges where applicable. Mechanical
joint ends conform to AWWA C111. For ANSI
Class 250# Flange, see page 8.
■ Available with manual traveling nut or worm
gear, electric motor or cylinder actuators; plus
full range of extensions, indicators, positioners,
remote controls and other accessories.
APROVEN STANDARD FOR BUBBLE-TIGHT CLOSURE...
The patented E-LOK ® seating system features a rubber seat
that provides multiple sealing lines which permit higher
levels of radial compression. The multiple ridges are
designed to reduce rubber stress levels for lower seating
torques and better seating action. Unique epoxy injection
process locks the seat against the disc with uniform
pressure control around the entire periphery to provide a
bubble-tight seal. Design also allows easy seat replacement
without removing the valve from the line where possible.
Valves for the 21st Century
page 3

THE HENRY PRATT SEAT ON BODY DESIGN ADVANTAGE
A key aspect of butterfly valve design relates to
location of the rubber seat. Essentially the seat can be
positioned on the body or on the disc per AWWA
C504.
But the sum of Pratt design, testing, and field
experience has proven conclusively that seat on body
design is preferred because it provides maximum
reliability.
The major advantage of seat on body design is that
the risk of damage to the rubber seat is minimized
because the sealing edge of the disc is much harder
than any corrosion deposits built up within the valve
body or pipeline. (See Figures 1 and 2) This is
important because build up can interfere with the
swing radius of the disc. Additionally, seats on body
are recessed and thus more protected than seat on
disc designs.
Seat on disc designs are much more susceptible to
damage because it is the relatively soft rubber seat on
the disc that comes into contact with corrosion
deposits and build up. Also any solid materials flowing
in the fluid can impinge on a rubber seat located on
the disc. (See Figure 3)
Another disadvantage of seat on disc design is that
since the maximum velocity in a pipeline occurs at the
upstream and downstream leading edges of the disc,
the rubber seat on disc designs are much more
susceptible to wear, vibration and potential loosening
of hardware.
Conclusion: Henry Pratt seat on body designs which
do not depend on retaining hardware in the waterway
for seat retention have recognized these potential
problems and addressed them in advance. Successful
field performance has substantiated the credibility of
this design approach!!
Pratt – Rubber Seat on Body Designs
Rubber Seat on Disc
Design by Others
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 FIGURE 3
page 4
Henry Pratt Company

HP250II BUTTERFLY VALVE, 125# FLANGED & MJ SPECIFICATION
General
Butterfly valves shall be manufactured in accordance
with the latest revision of AWWA Standard C504 Class
250B, shall be suitable for a differential pressure of
250 psig, and be certified to NSF Standard 61. Valves
shall be Henry Pratt Model HP250+ and comply with
the following details:
Valve Bodies
The body shall be constructed of Ductile Iron ASTM
A536 Gr. 65-45-12, with flanged end connections drilled
in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, Class 250,
or Mechanical Joint ends. The body wall thickness shall
be in strict accordance with AWWA C504.
Valve Shafts
The shaft shall be made of ASTM A-564 Type 630
condition H-1150. The shaft seals shall be “V” type
packing. Shaft seals shall be of a design allowing
replacement without removing the valve shaft. No O-
ring or “U” cup packing shall be allowed. The bearing
shall be a stainless steel backed Teflon material.
Bearing load shall not exceed 1/5 of the compressible
strength of the bearing or shaft material.
Valve Discs
The disc shall utilize an on-center shaft and
symmetrical design, cast from Ductile Iron ASTM A536
Gr. 65-45-12. The disc edge shall be stainless steel
type 316. Disc shall be retained by pins that extend
thought the full diameter of the shaft. The pin material
shall be the same as the shaft material. Torque plugs
or tangential fasteners shall not be allowed. For valve
sizes 3" through 20" the rubber seat shall be of one
piece construction, simultaneously molded and bonded
directly into the body. The seat material shall be either
Buna-N or EPDM rubber.
Valve Actuators
Manual actuators shall be of the traveling nut, selflocking
type and shall be designed to hold the valve in
any intermediate position between fully open and fully
closed without fluttering or creeping. The actuator shall
have mechanical stops that will withstand and input
torque of 450 ft/lb. against each stop. Manual
actuators shall conform to AWWA Standard C504 and
shall be Pratt MDT or an approved equal.
HP250II 6"-16", DUCTILE IRON BODY, FLANGED X MJ
Valve
Size A B C CC D DD E EE F FF G GG X
6 6-1/2 5-1/8 11 11 6-3/4 4-1/4 1-1/16 1-1/16 8-3/4 6-3/4 9-1/2 9-1/2 4-1/4
8 7-3/4 6-1/2 13-1/2 13-1/4 7-5/16 4-5/16 1-1/8 1-1/8 8-3/4 6-3/4 11-3/4 11-3/4 4-13/16
10 9 9-7/8 16 15-9/16 8-5/8 4-5/8 1-1/4 1-3/16 12-7/8 8-3/4 14-1/4 14 6-1/8
12 10-1/2 11-3/8 19 17-15/16 8-5/8 4-5/8 1-1/4 1-1/4 12-7/8 8-3/4 17 16-1/4 6-1/8
16 13-1/2 14-3/8 23-1/2 22-9/16 10 6 1-7/16 1-3/8 16-1 12-3/4 21-1/4 21 6-1/2
Actuator
Number
Size J L M N P Q R of Turns
MDT-2S 4-11/16 2 2-1/8 2 4-1/2 4-1/2 8-1/4 32
MDT-3S 5-5/8 2-7/16 3-1/4 3-5/32 5-5/8 5-3/8 10-3/8 30
MDT-45 6-3/8 2-27/32 3-3/8 4 7-5/16 6-3/4 11-5/16 40
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES.
2. “D” DIMENSION ±1/16" FOR 6" THRU 10" VALVES.
“D” DIMENSION ±1/8" FOR 12" THRU 20" VALVES.
3. FOR BOLTS SMALLER THAN 01-3/4, BOLT HOLES
WILL BE 1/8" LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF BOLT.
FOR BOLTS 01-3/4 OR LARGER, BOLT HOLES WILL
BE 1/4" LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF BOLT.
4. DIMENSIONS AND DRILLING OF END FLANGE
CONFORM TO THE AMERICAN CAST IRON FLANGE
STANDARDS, CLASS 125 (B16.1).
5. DIMENSIONS AND DRILLING OF MECHANICAL
JOINT END CONFORM TO ANSI/AWWA
C111/A21/11.
6. VALVES MANUFACTURED & TESTED IN
ACCORDANCE WITHE AWWA SPECIFICATION C504
LATEST REVISION, CLASS 250B.
7. RECOMMENDATION FOR MATING FLANGES:
WHERE INSULATING BUSHINGS ARE USED, IT IS
NECESSARY THAT BOLT HOLES BE DRILLED
OVERSIZE BY AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO TWO TIMES
THE INSULATING SLEEVE THICKNESS TO
MAINTAIN THE SAME MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR
BOLTS.
Valves for the 21st Century
page 5

HP250II 3"- 20", DUCTILE IRON BODY, ANSI 125# FLANGED ENDS
Actuator Valve Number
Size Size J L M N P Q R of Turns
MDT-2S 3-8" 4-11/16 2 2-1/8 2 4-1/2 4-1/4 8-1/4 32
MDT-3S 10-14" 5-5/8 2-7/16 3-1/4 3-5/32 5-5/8 5-3/8 10-3/8 30
MDT-4S 16&18" 6-3/8 2-27/32 3-3/8 4 7-5/16 6-3/4 11-5/16 40
MDT-5 20" 7-9/16 3-15/32 4-1/2 5-1/2 8-3/4 10 17 44
Valve
Size A B C D E F G
3 4-3/4 3-3/4 7-1/2 5 3/4 4-5/8 6
4 5-1/2 4-1/2 9 5 15/16 8-5/8 7-1/2
6 6-1/2 5-1/2 11 5 1 8-3/4 9-1/2
8 7-3/4 6-3/4 13-1/2 6 1-1/8 8-3/4 11-3/4
10 9 9-11/16 16 8 1-3/16 12-7/8 14-1/4
12 10-1/2 11-3/16 19 8 1-1/4 12-7/8 17
14 11-7/8 12-9/16 21 8 1-3/8 12-1 18-3/4
16 13-1/2 14-3/16 23-1/2 8 1-7/16 16-1 21-1/4
18 14-3/8 15-1/16 25 8 1-9/16 16-1-1/8 22-3/4
20 16 16-11/16 27-1/2 8 1-11/16 20-1-1/8 25
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES.
2. “D” DIMENSION ±1/16" FOR 3" THRU 10" VALVES.
“D” DIMENSION ±1/8" FOR 12" THRU 20" VALVES.
3. FLANGE THROUGH BOLT HOLES WILL BE 1/8" LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF BOLT.
4. DIMENSIONS AND DRILLING OF END FLANGES CONFORM TO THE AMERICAN CAST IRON FLANGE
STANDARDS, CLASS 125 (B16.1).
5. VALVES MANUFACTURED & TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITHE AWWA SPECIFICATION C504 LATEST
REVISION, CLASS 250B.
6. RECOMMENDATION FOR MATING FLANGES: WHERE INSULATING BUSHINGS ARE USED, IT IS
NECESSARY THAT BOLT HOLES BE DRILLED OVERSIZE BY AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO TWO TIMES THE
INSULATING SLEEVE THICKNESS TO MAINTAIN THE SAME MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR BOLTS.
HP250II 24"- 48", DUCTILE IRON BODY, ANSI 125# FLANGED ENDS
Actuator
Number
Size J L M N P Q R of Turns
MDT-5 7-9/16 3-15/32 4-1/2 5-1/2 8-3/4 10 17 44
MDT-5S 8-5/16 3-15/16 5-1/2 7 10-1/2 15-15/16 19-7/8 136
MDT-6S 9-7/8 5-1/16 7 8-1/4 12-5/8 14-3/16 26-1/2 215
Valve
Size A B C D E F G
24 18-5/8 18-3/8 32 8 1-7/8 20/1-1/4 29-1/2
30 21-1/2 24-1/8 38-3/4 12 2-1/8 28/1-1/4 36
36 25-7/16 28 46 12 2-3/8 32/1-1/2 42-3/4
42 29-7/8 32-11/16 53 12 2-5/8 36/1-1/2 49-1/2
48 34-1/16 36-7/8 59-1/2 15 2-3/4 44/1-1/2 56
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES.
2. “D” DIMENSION ±1/8" FOR 24" AND LARGER VALVES.
3. FOR BOLTS SMALLER THAN 01-3/4, BOLT HOLES WILL BE 1/8" LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF BOLT. FOR
BOLTS 01-3/4 OR LARGER, BOLT HOLES WILL BE 1/4" LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF BOLT.
4. DIMENSIONS AND DRILLING OF END FLANGES CONFORM TO THE AMERICAN CAST IRON FLANGE
STANDARDS, CLASS 125 (B16.1).
5. VALVES MANUFACTURED & TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA SPECIFICATION C504 LATEST
REVISION, CLASS 250B.
6. RECOMMENDATION FOR MATING FLANGES: WHERE INSULATING BUSHINGS ARE USED, IT IS
NECESSARY THAT BOLT HOLES BE DRILLED OVERSIZE BY AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO TWO TIMES THE
INSULATING SLEEVE THICKNESS TO MAINTAIN THE SAME MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR BOLTS.
7. CAUTION: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT VALVES BE INSTALLED INTO PIPING SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE
WITH AWWA M-11 TO PREVENT ANY UNDUE PIPING STRESS, DEFLECTION OR BENDING THAT MAY
EFFECT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE VALVE.
8. EXTENSION STEM CAN BE USED WITH STANDARD VALVE BOXES OR 5" SOIL PIPE.
page 6
Henry Pratt Company

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Specifications for 250B and 350# pressure class Butterfly Valves
Tag numbers: 250B – TP-BFV2, 3, 4
350# - TPS-P1-BFV2, TPS-P2-BFV2, TPS-P3-BFV2, TPS-P4-BFV2,
TPS-YP5-BFV1
General
All butterfly valves are tight closing, rubber seated type and fully comply with the latest revision of
AWWA Standard C504/C516 and NSF61, where applicable. Valves are bubble-tight at rated
pressures in either direction, and shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling
service and for applications requiring valve actuation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs
rotate 90˚ from the full open position to the tight shut position. Regardless of valve size, angular
misposition of disc can be up to 1˚ off center without leakage.
Valve Body
All valve bodies are ductile iron ASTM A536, Class B, narrow body design. Flange drilling is ANSI
Class 250 with 250# drilling pattern.
Valve Disc
All valve discs are constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536 with a stainless steel seating edge. The disc
shall not have any hollow chambers that can entrap water. Disc and shaft connection are made with
stainless steel pins.
Valve Shaft
All shafts are turned, ground, polished and constructed of ASTM A-564 Type 630 Condition H-1150.
Shafts are of two-piece, stub type and keyed for actuator connection.
Valve Seat
All seats are constructed of Buna N and suitable for bidirectional shutoff at rated pressure. Seats are
retained in the valve body by mechanical means without retaining rings, segments, screws or hardware of
any kind in the flow stream. Seats are full 360˚ without interruption and have a plurality of grooves mating
with a spherical disc edge seating surface. Valve seats are field adjustable around the full 360˚
circumference and replaceable without dismantling the actuator, disc or shaft and without removing the
valve from the line.
Shaft Seals
The shaft seals are self adjusting “V” type chevron packing. Shaft seals are designed to allow
replacement without removing the valve shaft.
Valve Bearings
All butterfly valves are fitted with sleeve-type bearings. Bearings are corrosion resistant and selflubricating.
Bearing material is Teflon-lined with a special fiberglass backing. Bearing load do not exceed
1⁄5 of the compressible strength of the bearing or shaft material.

401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506
P 630-844-4000 F 630-844-4160
www.henrypratt.com
Manual Valve Actuator for tag TPS-P1-BFV-2, P2-BFV2, P3-BFV2, P4-BFV2
Valve actuators conform to AWWA Standard C504 and are designed to hold the valve in any intermediate
position between full open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuators are equipped with
mechanical stop-limiting devices to prevent overtravel of the disc in the open and closed positions. The
buried service MDT actuator has a mechanical stop which will withstand and input torque of 450 ft. lbs at
extreme actuator position without damage.
Manual Valve worm gear actuator for tag TP-BFV2, BFV3, BFV4
Same as above except of the worm gear type which will withstand input torque of 300 ft. lbs at extreme
actuator position without damage. See worm gear technical information.
Manual valve worm gear with bevel attachment for tag TPS-YP5-BFV1
See AUMA spec sheet
Painting
Valve interior and exterior surfaces except for seating shall be coated with two coats of epoxy paint
Amercoat 370 in accordance with AWWA C550 and AWWA C504. Coating is NSF-61 approved.
Testing
Hydrostatic and leakage tests will be conducted in strict accordance with AWWA Standard C504.

HP350
401 S. Highland Avenue
Aurora, Illinois 60506-5563
www.henrypratt.com
phone: 877.436.7977
fax: 630.844.4160
Scope of Line: Pratt HP350 Butterfly Valve
Sizes:
6" through 48"
(FL ends)
6" through 24"
(MJ ends)
Pressure:
- 350 psi
- 525 shell test
Body Styles:
- ANSI 250# with
250 drilling
Actuation
Options:
-Nut
-Handwheel
-Buried Service
Features and Benefits:
Features
Benefits
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Higher pressures Working pressures to 350
psi with temperatures to
250˚F
Ductile iron valve body
17-4 Stainless steel shaft
Ductile iron disc
Wide size range and
end connections
Rubber seat
located in body
Unique Disc Design
Nonmetallic bearings
V-type shaft packing
Actuators and
Accessories
Available in sizes 6"
through 48" (FL x FL)
and 6" through 24"
(MJ x MJ)
Reduces performance
problems related to
corrosive buildup
in valve body
and pipeline
Provides more
strength, less weight,
and greater free-flow
area than conventional
disc design
Prevents galvanic
corrosion and
provides lower
coefficient of friction
Self-adjusting, lasts
the life of the valve
Available with manual
traveling nut or
worm gear, electric
motor or cylinder
actuator; plus full
range of extensions,
indicators, positioners,
remote controls and
other accessories

Suggested Specification:
Butterfly valves shall be manufactured for a full differential pressure of 350 psig. Valves shall be
Henry Pratt Model HP350 and comply with the following details.
The body shall be constructed of Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr. 65-45-12, with flanged end
connections drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 250, or mechanical joint ends drilled in
accordance with AWWA C111. The body wall thickness shall be in strict accordance with AWWA
C504. Table #1, for gray iron 250B valves.
The disc shall utilize an on-center shaft and symetrical design, cast from Ductile Iron ASTM A536
Gr. 65-45-12. The disc edge shall be stainless steel type 316. Discs shall be retained by pins
that extend through the full diameter of the shaft. The pin material shall be the same as the shaft
material. Torque plugs or tangential fasteners shall not be allowed.
The shaft shall be made of ASTM A-564 Type 630 condition H-1150. The shaft seals shall be “V”
type packing. Shaft seals shall be of a design allowing replacement without removing the valve
shaft. No O-ring or “U” cup packing shall be allowed. The bearing shall be a stainless steel backed
teflon material. Bearing load shall not exceed 1/5 of the compressible strength of the bearing or
shaft material.
Manual actuators shall be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the
valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without fluttering or creeping.
The actuator shall have mechanical stops that will withstand an input torque of 450 lb./ ft. against
each stop. Manual actuators shall conform to AWWA Standard C504 and shall be Pratt MDT or an
approved equal.

6" - 48" HP350 Flanged Ends, Manual Actuator
Valve
Size
A B C D E F G
6" 7 1/4 8 3/8 12 1/2 6 1 7/16 12 - 3/4 10 5/8
8" 8 1/2 9 5/8 15 8 1 5/8 12 - 7/8 13
10" 9 3/4 11 17 1/2 8 1 7/8 16 - 1 15 1/4
12" 11 1/2 12 5/8 20 1/2 8 2 16 - 1 1/8 17 3/4
14" 12 3/4 13 7/8 23 12 2 1/8 20 - 1 1/8 20 1/4
16" 14 15 1/8 25 1/2 12 2 1/4 20- 1 1/4 22 1/2
18" 15 1/4 16 3/8 28 12 2 3/8 24 - 1 1/4 24 3/4
20" 17 17 5/8 30 1/2 12 2 1/2 24 - 1/14 27
24" 19 3/4 20 1/4 36 12 2 3/4 24 - 1 1/2 32
30" 25 5/8 26 43 12 3 28 - 1 3/4 39 1/4
36" 28 1/8 31 1/8 50 15 3 3/8 32 - 2 46
42" 32 1/8 35 1/8 57 15 3 11/16 36 - 2 52 3/4
48" 36 1/4 39 5/8 65 15 4 40 - 2 60 3/4
*See page 4 for MDT manual actuation dimensions.
6" - 48" HP350 Flanged Ends, Buried Service Actuator
Valve
Size
A B C D E F G
6" 7 1/4 8 3/8 12 1/2 6 1 7/16 12 - 3/4 10 5/8
8" 8 1/2 9 5/8 15 8 1 5/8 12 - 7/8 13
10" 9 3/4 11 17 1/2 8 1 7/8 16 - 1 15 1/4
12" 11 1/2 12 5/8 20 1/2 8 2 16 - 1 1/8 17 3/4
14" 12 3/4 13 7/8 23 12 2 1/8 20 - 1 1/8 20 1/4
16" 14 15 1/8 25 1/2 12 2 1/4 20- 1 1/4 22 1/2
18" 15 1/4 16 3/8 28 12 2 3/8 24 - 1 1/4 24 3/4
20" 17 17 5/8 30 1/2 12 2 1/2 24 - 1/14 27
24" 19 3/4 20 1/4 36 12 2 3/4 24 - 1 1/2 32
30" 25 5/8 26 43 12 3 28 - 1 3/4 39 1/4
36" 28 1/8 31 1/8 50 15 3 3/8 32 - 2 46
42" 32 1/8 35 1/8 57 15 3 11/16 36 - 2 52 3/4
48" 36 1/4 39 5/8 65 15 4 40 - 2 60 3/4
*See page 4 for MDT manual actuation dimensions.

6" - 24" HP350 Mechanical Joint Ends, Manual Actuator
Valve
Size
A B C D E F G
6" 7 1/4 8 3/8 11 1/16 10 1 1/16 6 - 3/4 9 /12
8" 8 1/2 9 5/8 13 5/16 10 1 1/8 6 - 3/4 11 3/4
10" 9 3/4 11 15 5/8 10 1 3/16 8 - 3/4 14
12" 11 1/2 12 5/8 17 7/8 10 1 1/4 8 - 3/4 16 1/4
14" 12 3/4 13 7/8 20 1/4 12 1/2 1 5/16 10 - 3/4 18 3/4
16" 14 15 1/8 22 1/2 12 1/2 1 3/8 12 - 3/4 21
18" 15 1/4 16 3/8 24 3/4 13 1/4 1 7/16 12 - 3/4 23 1/4
20" 17 17 5/8 27 13 1/4 1 1/2 14 - 3/4 25 1/2
24 19 3/4 20 1/4 31 /1/2 13 1/4 1 5/8 16 - 3/4 30
*See below for MDT manual actuation dimensions.
MDT Manual Actuator Dimensional Data
MDT
Size
J L M N P Q R S T V W
# Turns
to Close
MDT-2S 4 11/16 2 2 1/8 2 4 1/2 4 1/4 8 1/4 7 7/8 7 7/8 8 9 1/8 32
MDT-3S 5 5/8 2 7/16 3 1/4 3 5/32 5 5/8 5 3/8 10 3/8 10 1/2 10 1/8 12 9 1/8 30
MDT-4S 6 3/8 2 27/32 3 3/8 4 7 5/16 6 3/4 11 5/16 11 1/2 11 12 9 1/8 40
MDT-5 7 9/16 3 15/32 4 1/2 5 1/2 8 3/4 10 17 17 3/16 17 3/16 18 16 7/16 44
Notes:
1) All dimensions shown in inches
2) Furnished in standard position.
Contact factory for other mounting
positions
PRATT
OPEN
Q
S
T
R
J
L
P
PRATT
OPEN
N
V=
DIA.
W=
DIA.
Standard
Position
M
CLOSED
HANDWHEEL
CHAINWHEEL
HP350-0110

3”-20” 2FII &
Groundhog®
Bonded Seat
Butterfly Valve
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Job Name: ____________________________
Contractor: ___________________________
Date: ________________________________
Document #:3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
SAFETY MESSAGES
All safety messages in the instructions are flagged with an exclamation symbol and the word “Warning”.
These messages indicate procedures that must be followed exactly to avoid equipment damage, physical
injury, or death. Safety labels on the product indicate hazards that can cause equipment damage, physical
injury, or death.
Personnel involved in the installation or maintenance of valves should be constantly alert to
potential emission of pipeline material and take appropriate safety precautions. Always wear
suitable protection when dealing with hazardous pipeline materials.
PARTS
WARNING
Order parts from your local Henry Pratt sales representative or directly from Henry Pratt Company. When
ordering parts, please include the serial number located on the valve tag.
WARRANTY ISSUE
Seller warrants that, at its option, it will repair, replace, or refund the unit purchase price of any products
which are non-conforming due to Seller’s material or workmanship during the warranty period. The warranty
period shall be twelve (12) months for parts and eighteen (18) months for all other goods after date of
shipment. This shall be Buyer’s sole remedy. In order to maintain this product warranty, Buyer must give
written notice to Seller’s Field Service Supervisor prior to any work being performed.
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE FOREGOING, SELLER EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Seller does not warrant water operated metallic cylinders against damage caused by corrosion, electrolysis
or mineral deposits. In no event shall warranty include valve removal or reinstallation.
WARNING
Read all applicable directions and instructions prior to any maintenance, troubleshooting or
installation
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
2

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
Table of Contents
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
INSTALLATION 5
OPERATION 8
MAINTENANCE 9
TROUBLESHOOTING 10
CONTACTING PRATT 11
PRODUCT DRAWINGS 12
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
3

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Round butterfly valve discs rotate 1/4 turns to provide tight shutoff in air or water pipelines. The valves can be
used to regulate flow rate by positioning the disc between 15 and 90 degrees open.
Manually Operated Valve
Manually operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple handwheel, chainwheel
or nut input turns into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by physical stops in
the actuator housing.
WARNING
Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel or nut against the stops will not provide tighter shutoff of the valve
and may damage the actuator. Only actuator adjustments will affect valve shutoff.
Motor Operated Valves
Motor operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple motor input turns into
1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by limit switches in the motor housing and physical
stops in the actuator housing. Valve shutoff is affected by limit switch and physical stop settings.
WARNING
Improperly set limit switches and/or physical stops may damage the motor and/or actuator.
Cylinder Operated Valves
Hydraulically operated butterfly valves are powered with a gear box and double acting cylinder. The linear
stroke of the cylinder is converted to 1/4 turn operation by the gear box. Auxiliary controls are provided to direct
hydraulic power to the cylinder and to control the operating speed of the cylinder.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
4

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
Valves are a significant component of any piping system. Failure due to faulty installation, improper operation
or maintenance in such systems could result in damage, down time and costly repairs. In buried underground
installations, problems or malfunctions can result in extensive, costly unearthing operations to correct the problem.
Many problems with valves can be traced to improper installation, operation, or maintenance procedures.
UNLOADING
Inspect valves on receipt for damage in shipment and conformance with quantity and description in the shipping
notice and order. Carefully unload all valves to the ground without dropping using fork trucks or slings under
skids. Do not lift valves with slings or chain around operating shaft, actuator, or through waterway. Instead,
lift valves with eye bolts or rods through flange holes.
STORAGE
Whenever practical, store valves indoors. If not, protect valves and actuators from weather and accumulation
of water, dirt, rocks and debris. When valves fitted with power actuators and controls are stored, energize
electric actuator or otherwise protect electrical control equipment to prevent corrosion of electrical contacts due
to condensation resulting from temperature variation. Do not expose rubber seats to sunlight or ozone for any
extended period. Valves should be stored with the valve disc or closure member slightly open.
INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Make sure flange faces and joint sealing surfaces, body seats and disc seats are clean. Check bolting attaching
actuator to valve for loosening in transit and handling. If loose, tighten firmly. Open and close valve to make
sure it operates properly and that stops or limit switches are correctly set so that the valve seats fully. Check
that valve rotation direction is correct and close valve before installing.
INSTALLATION
The following items must be performed during installation to ensure proper function.
• Carefully place valves into position avoiding contact or impact with other equipment, vault walls or trench
walls.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
5

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
• Valves are to be installed in accordance with the General Arrangement Drawings furnished for the order.
• Foreign material in a valve can damage the rubber seat when valves are operated. Be sure valve interiors
and adjacent piping are clear of foreign material prior to mating valve to pipe joint.
• Prepare pipe ends and install valves in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s instructions for the joint
used. Do not deflect pipe/valve joint. Do not use valve and jack to pull pipe into alignment.
• In plant piping, install so as to minimize bending of valve connection with pipe loading.
• In case of wafer type butterfly valves, concentrically center the valve disc between the mating flanges.
• Make sure valve disc, when opened, will not contact pipe port. This is especially necessary on pipe with linings
and when wafer valves are used. Check manufacturer for minimum pipe I.D. required for clearance.
WARNING
It is recommended that valves be installed into piping system in accordance with AWWA M-11 in order
to prevent any undue piping stress, deflection or bending that may affect the performance of the valve.
WARNING
Valve disc without actuator may open or close at any time and cause injury to persons or damage to
valve and other property. The shaft/disc clamping device when furnished is intended for temporary use
during shipping, handling and valve installation only. Do not subject valve to flow conditions before
actuator is mounted and tested for performance and clamping device is removed.
Buried valves installed with valve boxes must be so installed that the valve box does not transmit shock or
stress to the valve actuator as a result of shifting soil or traffic load.
When valves are installed in vaults, the vault design must provide space for purposes of repair. The valve
opening nut should be accessible from the top opening of the vault with a tee wrench.
MECHANICAL JOINT INSTALLATION
The successful operation of the mechanical joint requires that the plain end be centrally located in the bell
and that adequate anchorage be provided where abrupt changes in direction and dead ends occur. The rubber
gasket will seal more effectively if the surfaces with which it comes in contact are thoroughly cleaned (for
example, with a wire brush) just prior to assembly in order to remove all loose rust or foreign material.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
6

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
Lubrication and additional cleaning should be performed by brushing both the gasket and the plain end with
soapy water or pipe lubricant just prior to slipping the gasket into the plain end and assembling the joint.
TESTING
When rubber seated valves are used to isolate sections of line for test, it is important to realize that these
valves are designed or factory adjusted to hold rated pressure only. Test pressure may cause leakage past the
rubber seat or damage to the valve.
In order to prevent time lost in searching for leaks, it is recommended that excavations for buried valves not be
back-filled until after hydrostatic pressure tests have been made.
Seat leakage can occur due to foreign material in the line. If this occurs, open valve 5 – 10 degrees to get high
velocity flushing action. Close and repeat several times to clear seats for tight shutoff.
Seat leakage can occur due to rotational shift in position of the disc with relation to the body seat. Readjust
closing stop in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
RECORDS
Upon completion of installation, valve location, size, make, type, date of installation, number of turns to open,
direction of opening and any other information deemed pertinent should be entered on the owner’s permanent
records.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
7

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
OPERATION
Do not permit use and operation of any valve at pressure above the rated pressure of the valve.
Do not exceed 300 ft-lb input torque on actuators with wrench nuts, 200 lb. rim pull input torque for handwheels
or chainwheels. If portable auxiliary actuators are used, size the actuator or use a torque limiting device to
prevent application of torque exceeding 300 ft-lbs. If an oversize actuator with no means of limiting torque
is used, stop the actuator before valve is fully opened or closed against stops and complete the operation
manually. Be sure to check actuator directional switch against direction indicated on wrench nut, handwheel or
records before applying opening and closing torque.
If a valve is stuck in some intermediate position between open and closed, check first for jamming in the
actuator. If nothing is found, the interference is inside the valve. In this case, do not attempt to force the disc
open or closed since excessive torque in this position can severely damage internal parts. Contact the Pratt
Service Department.
MANUAL ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The manually operated butterfly valves are operated by rotating the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut. The
actuator is equipped with gearing to convert the many turns into 1/4 turn operation. Inside actuator stops that
limit the travel of the valve are pre-set at the factory. Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut will not cause
the valve to shut off any tighter and may cause damage to the gearing.
CYLINDER ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The cylinder operated butterfly valves are operated automatically by directing hydraulic pressure to either side
of the power cylinder. Solenoid valves are used to direct the fluid to the cylinder ports based on electrical
power signals. In cylinder actuators, the travel stops are in the cylinder so that full hydraulic pressure can be
held on the cylinder at either end of travel.
MOTOR ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The motor actuator is designed to open and close the valve through its one quarter turn of rotation. It contains
gearing so that hundreds of turns of the motor or handwheel will slowly move the valve from open to close
position or vice versa. Electrical controls are included in the motor actuator for local electrical control.
The output motion of the actuator is limited to about 100 degrees of output rotation by mechanical stops in
the gearing. These are factory set and should not need adjustment. The actual positioning of the valve disc
will be done by limit switches in the motor actuator. The switches are also set at the factory but adjustment
is sometimes required if the motor unit is installed on a separate mounting base or floorstand. Detailed
procedures are given in the motor manual if adjustment is needed for the mechanical stops or the limit
switches. The wiring and power requirements are given on wiring diagrams included in this instruction manual.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
8

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of rubber-seated valves by owner is generally limited to actuators and shaft seals. In some
instances, valve design permits field adjustment or replacement of rubber seats when leakage occurs. Unless
the owner has skilled personnel and proper equipment, any major rework will require removal of the valve from
the line. Depending on condition, valve may require return to the manufacturer.
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
1.
Cycle valve to verify operation and no interference in line.
2. Close valve and check for leakage. If leakage is detected, check actuator stops to verify that disc
is fully closed. If leakage persists, remove valve to inspect seat. A damaged seat requires valve to be
returned to the factory for repair.
3.
4.
Check flange connections for leakage. Tighten bolts accordingly.
Check top trunnion area for shaft leakage. If leakage is detected, replace valve packing.
NOTE: 10” and larger valves have top and bottom packing.
WARNING
Removal of actuator from valve shaft will cause disc to rotate, striking persons or objects in the disc
path, causing injury to persons and damage to valve. Block or lock disc before removing actuator.
Typical maintenance would be shaft packing replacement and actuator adjustment. Seal leakage, broken parts
and difficult operation should be discussed with Pratt’s Service Department before valve repairs are attempted.
Pratt Service Engineers are available to perform or supervise valve repairs in the field.
Stop line flow and isolate from line pressure prior to performing any corrective maintenance.
After completing repair, cycle valve through one complete operating cycle and after line pressure has been
restored, inspect for leakage.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
9

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Problem Causes Remedies
•Packing Leak
Leakage between valve and
actuator
•First, cycle the valve several
times. This should adjust the
packing. If this fails, clean packing
bore and replace packing.
Bottom trunnion leaks •Packing or gasket leak •Replace bottom shaft packing,
o-ring or gasket.
Valve leaks when closed
•Disc not fully closed or past fully
closed
•Adjust actuator closed position
stop.
•Disc edge wear or damage
•Clean and/or repair disc edge.
•Rubber seat wear or damage •Replace valve seat (Bonded
seat vavles 20” or below must be
returned to factory for repair).
Chainwheel jams •Poorly fitting chain •Replace with correct chain.
Valve hard to operate
•Foreign material in valve
•Remove obstructions
Automatic valve does not actuate
•Corroded actuator parts
•Loose actuator
•No power source
•Improper Signal
•Burned out or impaired
component
•Clean and grease actuator
•Apply Loctite or Omnifit locking
compound and tighten bolts.
•Check incoming power source
and replace fuses or rest pressure.
•Check actuating signal sequence.
•Check and repair or replace
solenoids, motors and relay
devices.
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
10

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
HOW TO CONTACT PRATT
HOW TO ORDER PARTS:
To order parts, contact our Parts Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Parts Manager
Call - (630) 844-4144
Fax - (630) 844-4191
Please include valve serial number and description of part requested.
HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE:
To obtain further information or secure field service, contact our Field Service Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Field Service Manager
Call - (630) 844-4163
Fax - (630) 844-4160
Please include the following with your inquiry for service:
Henry Pratt Order Number:
Henry Pratt Item Number:
Valve Serial Number:
Type of Service Requested
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
11

3”-20” 2FII & Groundhog® Bonded Seat Butterfly Valve
Document #: 3202FIIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
12

Triton XR-70,Triton XL &
Groundhog® Butterfly
Valves
(24” & Larger)
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Job Name: ____________________________
Contractor: ___________________________
Date: ________________________________
Document #: 24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
SAFETY MESSAGES
All safety messages in the instructions are flagged with an exclamation symbol and the word “Warning”.
These messages indicate procedures that must be followed exactly to avoid equipment damage, physical
injury, or death. Safety labels on the product indicate hazards that can cause equipment damage, physical
injury, or death.
Personnel involved in the installation or maintenance of valves should be constantly alert to potential
emission of pipeline material and take appropriate safety precautions. Always wear suitable protection when
dealing with hazardous pipeline materials.
PARTS
WARNING
Order parts from your local Henry Pratt sales representative or directly from Henry Pratt Company. When
ordering parts, please include the serial number located on the valve tag.
WARRANTY ISSUE
Seller warrants that, at its option, it will repair, replace, or refund the unit purchase price of any products
which are non-conforming due to Seller’s material or workmanship during the warranty period. The warranty
period shall be twelve (12) months for parts and eighteen (18) months for all other goods after date of
shipment. This shall be Buyer’s sole remedy. In order to maintain this product warranty, Buyer must give
written notice to Seller’s Field Service Supervisor prior to any work being performed.
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE FOREGOING, SELLER EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Seller does not warrant water operated metallic cylinders against damage caused by corrosion, electrolysis
or mineral deposits. In no event shall warranty include valve removal or reinstallation.
WARNING
Read all applicable directions and instructions prior to any maintenance, troubleshooting or
installation
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
2

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
Table of Contents
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
INSTALLATION 5
OPERATION 8
MAINTENANCE 10
TROUBLESHOOTING 11
CONTACTING PRATT 12
PRODUCT DRAWINGS 13
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
3

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
Functional Description
Round butterfly valve discs rotate 1/4 turns to provide tight shutoff in air or water pipelines. The valves can be
used to regulate flow rate by positioning the disc between 15 and 90 degrees open.
Manually Operated Valve
Manually operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple handwheel,
chainwheel or nut input turns into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by physical
stops in the actuator housing.
WARNING
Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel or nut against the stops will not provide tighter shutoff of the valve
and may damage the actuator. Only actuator adjustments will affect valve shutoff.
Motor Operated Valve
Motor operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple motor input turns
into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by limit switches in the motor housing and
physical stops in the actuator housing. Valve shutoff is affected by limit switch and physical stop settings.
WARNING
Improperly set limit switches and/or physical stops may damage the motor and/or actuator.
Cylinder Operate Valve
Hydraulically operated butterfly valves are powered with a gear box and double acting cylinder. The linear
stroke of the cylinder is converted to 1/4 turn operation by the gear box. Auxiliary controls are provided to direct
hydraulic power to the cylinder and to control the operating speed of the cylinder.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
4

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
Valves are a significant component of any piping system. Failure due to faulty installation, improper operation
or maintenance in such systems could result in damage, down time and costly repairs. In buried underground
installations, problems or malfunctions can result in extensive, costly unearthing operations to correct the
problem. Many problems with valves can be traced to improper installation, operation, or maintenance
procedures.
UNLOADING
Inspect valves on receipt for damage in shipment and conformance with quantity and description in the
shipping notice and order. Carefully unload all valves to the ground without dropping using fork trucks or slings
under skids. Do not lift valves with slings or chain around operating shaft, actuator, or through waterway.
Instead, lift valves with eye bolts or rods through flange holes.
STORAGE
Whenever practical, store valves indoors. If not, protect valves and actuators from weather and accumulation
of water, dirt, rocks and debris. When valves fitted with power actuators and controls are stored, energize
electric actuator or otherwise protect electrical control equipment to prevent corrosion of electrical contacts due
to condensation resulting from temperature variation. Do not expose rubber seats to sunlight or ozone for any
extended period. Valves should be stored with the valve disc or closure member slightly open.
INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Make sure flange faces and joint sealing surfaces, body seats and disc seats are clean. Check bolting
attaching actuator to valve for loosening in transit and handling. If loose, tighten firmly. Open and close valve
to make sure it operates properly and that stops or limit switches are correctly set so that the valve seats fully.
Check that valve rotation direction is correct and close valve before installing.
INSTALLATION
The following items must be performed during installation to ensure proper function.
• Carefully place valves into position avoiding contact or impact with other equipment, vault walls or
trench walls.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
5

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
• Valves are to be installed in accordance with the General Arrangement Drawings furnished for the order.
• Foreign material in a valve can damage the rubber seat when valves are operated. Be sure valve interiors
and adjacent piping are clear of foreign material prior to mating valve to pipe joint.
• Prepare pipe ends and install valves in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s instructions for the joint
used. Do not deflect pipe/valve joint. Do not use valve and jack to pull pipe into alignment.
• In plant piping, install so as to minimize bending of valve connection with pipe loading.
• Make sure valve disc, when opened, will not contact pipe port. This is especially necessary on pipe with linings.
Check manufacturer for minimum pipe I.D. required for clearance.
WARNING
It is recommended that valves be installed into piping system in accordance with AWWA M-11 in order
to prevent any undue piping stress, deflection or bending that may affect the performance of the valve.
WARNING
Valve disc without actuator may open or close at any time and cause injury to persons or damage to
valve and other property. The shaft/disc clamping device when furnished is intended for temporary use
during shipping, handling and valve installation only. Do not subject valve to flow conditions before
actuator is mounted and tested for performance and clamping device is removed.
Buried valves installed with valve boxes must be so installed that the valve box does not transmit shock or
stress to the valve actuator as a result of shifting soil or traffic load.
When valves are installed in vaults, the vault design must provide space for purposes of repair. The valve
operating nut should be accessible from the top opening of the vault with a tee wrench.
MECHANICAL JOINT INSTALLATION
The successful operation of the mechanical joint requires that the plain end be centrally located in the bell
and that adequate anchorage be provided where abrupt changes in direction and dead ends occur. The rubber
gasket will seal more effectively if the surfaces with which it comes in contact are thoroughly cleaned (for
example, with a wire brush) just prior to assembly in order to remove all loose rust or foreign material.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
6

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
Lubrication and additional cleaning should be performed by brushing both the gasket and the plain end with
soapy water or pipe lubricant just prior to slipping the gasket into the plain end and assembling the joint.
TESTING
When rubber seated valves are used to isolate sections of line for test, it is important to realize that these
valves are designed or factory adjusted to hold rated pressure only. Test pressure may cause leakage past the
rubber seat or damage to the valve.
In order to prevent time lost in searching for leaks, it is recommended that excavations for buried valves not be
back-filled until after hydrostatic pressure tests have been made.
Seat leakage can occur due to foreign material in the line. If this occurs, open valve 5 – 10 degrees to get high
velocity flushing action. Close and repeat several times to clear seats for tight shutoff.
Seat leakage can occur due to rotational shift in position of the disc with relation to the body seat. Readjust
closing stop in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
RECORDS
Upon completion of installation, valve location, size, make, type, date of installation, number of turns to open,
direction of opening and any other information deemed pertinent should be entered on the owner’s permanent
records.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
7

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
OPERATION
Do not permit use and operation of any valve at pressure above the rated pressure of the valve.
Do not exceed 300 ft-lb input torque on actuators with wrench nuts, 200 lb. rim pull input torque for handwheels
or chainwheels. If portable auxiliary actuators are used, size the actuator or use a torque limiting device to
prevent application of torque exceeding 300 ft-lbs. If an oversize actuator with no means of limiting torque
is used, stop the actuator before valve is fully opened or closed against stops and complete the operation
manually. Be sure to check actuator directional switch against direction indicated on wrench nut, handwheel or
records before applying opening and closing torque.
If a valve is stuck in some intermediate position between open and closed, check first for jamming in the
actuator. If nothing is found, the interference is inside the valve. In this case, do not attempt to force the disc
open or closed since excessive torque in this position can severely damage internal parts. Contact the Pratt
Service Department.
MANUAL ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The manually operated butterfly valves are operated by rotating the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut. The
actuator is equipped with gearing to convert the many turns into 1/4 turn operation. Inside actuator stops that
limit the travel of the valve are pre-set at the factory. Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut will not cause
the valve to shut off any tighter and may cause damage to the gearing.
CYLINDER ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The cylinder operated butterfly valves are operated automatically by directing hydraulic pressure to either side
of the power cylinder. Solenoid valves are used to direct the fluid to the cylinder ports based on electrical
power signals. In cylinder actuators, the travel stops are in the cylinder so that full hydraulic pressure can be
held on the cylinder at either end of travel.
MOTOR ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The motor actuator is designed to open and close the valve through its one quarter turn of rotation. It contains
gearing so that hundreds of turns of the motor or handwheel will slowly move the valve from open to close
position or vice versa. Electrical controls are included in the motor actuator for local electrical control.
The output motion of the actuator is limited to about 100 degrees of output rotation by mechanical stops in
the gearing. These are factory set and should not need adjustment. The actual positioning of the valve disc
will be done by limit switches in the motor actuator. The switches are also set at the factory but adjustment
is sometimes required if the motor unit is installed on a separate mounting base or floorstand. Detailed
procedures are given in the motor manual if adjustment is needed for the mechanical stops or the limit
switches. The wiring and power requirements are given on wiring diagrams included in this instruction manual.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
8

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
WARNING
Fluids exposed to freezing temperatures may cause valve to fail resulting in injury to persons or damage
to valves and other property. Do not use in applications that are exposed to freezing temperatures
unless sufficient flow is maintained through the valve to prevent freezing, or other protection is provided.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
All persons who will install, operate or adjust this equipment must read the instructions and drawings
carefully. Injury and property damage may occur from improper use. It is understood that this
equipment will be installed by individuals with knowledge and skills in electrical equipment. The
manufacturer cannot be responsible for the misuse of this information or equipment, nor can it assume
any resultant liability.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
9

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of valves by owner is generally limited to actuators and shaft seals. In some instances, valve design
permits field adjustment seats when leakage occurs. Unless the owner has skilled personnel and proper
equipment, any major rework will require removal of the valve from the line. Depending on condition, valve may
require return to the manufacturer.
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
1.
Cycle valve to verify operation and no interference in line.
2. Close valve and check for leakage. If leakage is detected, check actuator stops to verify that disc is
fully closed. If leakage persists, remove valve to inspect seat. Contact Pratt’s Field Service Deparment
for information regarding adjustment or replacement of seat.
3.
4.
Check flange connections for leakage. Tighten bolts accordingly.
Check top trunnion area for shaft leakage. If leakage is detected, replace valve packing.
5. If Access to the line is possible, then removal of scale that may interfere with disc travel is suggested.
The seat should be inspected for wear and the taper pin nuts should be tight.
NOTE: LUBRICATION IS NOT REQUIRED.
WARNING
Removal of actuator from valve shaft will cause disc to rotate, striking persons or objects in the disc
path, causing injury to persons and damage to valve. Block or lock disc before removing actuator.
Typical maintenance would be shaft packing replacement and actuator adjustment. Seal leakage, broken parts
and difficult operation should be discussed with Pratt’s Service Department before valve repairs are attempted.
Pratt Service Engineers are available to perform or supervise valve repairs in the field.
Stop line flow and isolate from line pressure prior to performing any corrective maintenance.
After completing repair, cycle valve through one complete operating cycle and after line pressure has been
restored, inspect for leakage.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
10

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Problem Causes Remedies
•Packing Leak
Leakage between valve and
actuator
•First, cycle the valve several
times. This should adjust the
packing. If this fails, clean packing
bore and replace packing.
Bottom trunnion leaks •Packing or gasket leak •Replace bottom shaft packing,
o-ring or gasket.
Valve leaks when closed
•Disc not fully closed or past fully
closed
•Adjust actuator closed position
stop.
•Disc edge wear or damage
•Rubber seat wear or damage
•Clean and/or repair disc edge.
•Adjust or replace valve seat*
Chainwheel jams •Poorly fitting chain •Replace with correct chain.
Valve hard to operate
•Foreign material in valve
•Remove obstructions
Automatic valve does not actuate
•Corroded actuator parts
•Loose actuator
•No power source
•Improper Signal
•Burned out or impaired
component
•Clean and grease actuator
•Apply Loctite or Omnifit locking
compound and tighten bolts.
•Check incoming power source
and replace fuses or reset
pressure.
•Check actuating signal sequence.
•Check and repair or replace
solenoids, motors and relay
devices.
* Seat replacement should not be performed by untrained/unqualified personnel. In the event that seat
replacement is needed, please contact Henry Pratt Field Service.
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
11

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
HOW TO CONTACT PRATT
HOW TO ORDER PARTS:
To order parts, contact our Parts Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Parts Manager
Call - (630) 844-4144
Fax - (630) 844-4191
Please include valve serial number and description of part requested.
HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE:
To obtain further information or secure field service, contact our Field Service Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Field Service Manager
Call - (630) 844-4163
Fax - (630) 844-4160
Please include the following with your inquiry for service:
Henry Pratt Order Number:
Henry Pratt Item Number:
Valve Serial Number:
Type of Service Requested
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
12

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
24” Triton Series Valve
Cross Section and Parts List
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
13

Triton XR-70,Triton XL & Groundhog®
Butterfly Valves (24” & Larger)
30” & Larger Triton Series Valve
Cross Section and Parts List
24TRIGD Revision Date: 7/13/10
14

24”-48” HP250II
Butterfly Valve
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Job Name: ____________________________
Contractor: ___________________________
Date: ________________________________
Document #: 2448HP250OOOM Revision Date: 1/10/11

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
SAFETY MESSAGES
All safety messages in the instructions are flagged with an exclamation symbol and the word “Warning”.
These messages indicate procedures that must be followed exactly to avoid equipment damage, physical
injury, or death. Safety labels on the product indicate hazards that can cause equipment damage, physical
injury, or death.
Personnel involved in the installation or maintenance of valves should be constantly alert to potential
emission of pipeline material and take appropriate safety precautions. Always wear suitable protection when
dealing with hazardous pipeline materials.
PARTS
WARNING
Order parts from your local Henry Pratt sales representative or directly from Henry Pratt Company. When
ordering parts, please include the serial number located on the valve tag.
WARRANTY ISSUE
Seller warrants that, at its option, it will repair, replace, or refund the unit purchase price of any products
which are non-conforming due to Seller’s material or workmanship during the warranty period. The warranty
period shall be twelve (12) months for parts and eighteen (18) months for all other goods after date of
shipment. This shall be Buyer’s sole remedy. In order to maintain this product warranty, Buyer must give
written notice to Seller’s Field Service Supervisor prior to any work being performed.
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE FOREGOING, SELLER EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Seller does not warrant water operated metallic cylinders against damage caused by corrosion, electrolysis
or mineral deposits. In no event shall warranty include valve removal or reinstallation.
WARNING
Read all applicable directions and instructions prior to any maintenance, troubleshooting or
installation
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
2

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
Table of Contents
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
INSTALLATION 5
OPERATION 8
MAINTENANCE 10
TROUBLESHOOTING 11
CONTACTING PRATT 12
PRODUCT DRAWINGS 13
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
3

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
Functional Description
Round butterfly valve discs rotate 1/4 turns to provide tight shutoff in air or water pipelines. The valves can be
used to regulate flow rate by positioning the disc between 15 and 90 degrees open.
Manually Operated Valve
Manually operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple handwheel,
chainwheel or nut input turns into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by physical
stops in the actuator housing.
WARNING
Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel or nut against the stops will not provide tighter shutoff of the valve
and may damage the actuator. Only actuator adjustments will affect valve shutoff.
Motor Operated Valve
Motor operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple motor input turns
into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by limit switches in the motor housing and
physical stops in the actuator housing. Valve shutoff is affected by limit switch and physical stop settings.
WARNING
Improperly set limit switches and/or physical stops may damage the motor and/or actuator.
Cylinder Operate Valve
Hydraulically operated butterfly valves are powered with a gear box and double acting cylinder. The linear
stroke of the cylinder is converted to 1/4 turn operation by the gear box. Auxiliary controls are provided to direct
hydraulic power to the cylinder and to control the operating speed of the cylinder.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
4

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
Valves are a significant component of any piping system. Failure due to faulty installation, improper operation
or maintenance in such systems could result in damage, down time and costly repairs. In buried underground
installations, problems or malfunctions can result in extensive, costly unearthing operations to correct the
problem. Many problems with valves can be traced to improper installation, operation, or maintenance
procedures.
UNLOADING
Inspect valves on receipt for damage in shipment and conformance with quantity and description in the
shipping notice and order. Carefully unload all valves to the ground without dropping using fork trucks or slings
under skids. Do not lift valves with slings or chain around operating shaft, actuator, or through waterway.
Instead, lift valves with eye bolts or rods through flange holes.
STORAGE
Whenever practical, store valves indoors. If not, protect valves and actuators from weather and accumulation
of water, dirt, rocks and debris. When valves fitted with power actuators and controls are stored, energize
electric actuator or otherwise protect electrical control equipment to prevent corrosion of electrical contacts due
to condensation resulting from temperature variation. Do not expose rubber seats to sunlight or ozone for any
extended period. Valves should be stored with the valve disc or closure member slightly open.
INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Make sure flange faces and joint sealing surfaces, body seats and disc seats are clean. Check bolting
attaching actuator to valve for loosening in transit and handling. If loose, tighten firmly. Open and close valve
to make sure it operates properly and that stops or limit switches are correctly set so that the valve seats fully.
Check that valve rotation direction is correct and close valve before installing.
INSTALLATION
The following items must be performed during installation to ensure proper function.
• Carefully place valves into position avoiding contact or impact with other equipment, vault walls or trench
walls.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
5

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
• Valves are to be installed in accordance with the General Arrangement Drawings furnished for the order.
• Foreign material in a valve can damage the rubber seat when valves are operated. Be sure valve interiors
and adjacent piping are clear of foreign material prior to mating valve to pipe joint.
• Prepare pipe ends and install valves in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s instructions for the joint
used. Do not deflect pipe/valve joint. Do not use valve and jack to pull pipe into alignment.
• In plant piping, install so as to minimize bending of valve connection with pipe loading.
• Make sure valve disc, when opened, will not contact pipe port. This is especially necessary on pipe with linings.
Check manufacturer for minimum pipe I.D. required for clearance.
WARNING
It is recommended that valves be installed into piping system in accordance with AWWA M-11 in order
to prevent any undue piping stress, deflection or bending that may affect the performance of the valve.
WARNING
Valve disc without actuator may open or close at any time and cause injury to persons or damage to
valve and other property. The shaft/disc clamping device when furnished is intended for temporary use
during shipping, handling and valve installation only. Do not subject valve to flow conditions before
actuator is mounted and tested for performance and clamping device is removed.
Buried valves installed with valve boxes must be so installed that the valve box does not transmit shock or
stress to the valve actuator as a result of shifting soil or traffic load.
When valves are installed in vaults, the vault design must provide space for purposes of repair. The valve
operating nut should be accessible from the top opening of the vault with a tee wrench.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
6

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
TESTING
When rubber seated valves are used to isolate sections of line for test, it is important to realize that these
valves are designed or factory adjusted to hold rated pressure only. Test pressure may cause leakage past the
rubber seat or damage to the valve.
In order to prevent time lost in searching for leaks, it is recommended that excavations for buried valves not be
back-filled until after hydrostatic pressure tests have been made.
Seat leakage can occur due to foreign material in the line. If this occurs, open valve 5 – 10 degrees to get high
velocity flushing action. Close and repeat several times to clear seats for tight shutoff.
Seat leakage can occur due to rotational shift in position of the disc with relation to the body seat. Readjust
closing stop in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
RECORDS
Upon completion of installation, valve location, size, make, type, date of installation, number of turns to open,
direction of opening and any other information deemed pertinent should be entered on the owner’s permanent
records.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
7

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
OPERATION
Do not permit use and operation of any valve at pressure above the rated pressure of the valve.
Do not exceed 300 ft-lb input torque on actuators with wrench nuts, 200 lb. rim pull input torque for handwheels
or chainwheels. If portable auxiliary actuators are used, size the actuator or use a torque limiting device to
prevent application of torque exceeding 300 ft-lbs. If an oversize actuator with no means of limiting torque
is used, stop the actuator before valve is fully opened or closed against stops and complete the operation
manually. Be sure to check actuator directional switch against direction indicated on wrench nut, handwheel or
records before applying opening and closing torque.
If a valve is stuck in some intermediate position between open and closed, check first for jamming in the
actuator. If nothing is found, the interference is inside the valve. In this case, do not attempt to force the disc
open or closed since excessive torque in this position can severely damage internal parts. Contact the Pratt
Service Department.
MANUAL ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The manually operated butterfly valves are operated by rotating the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut. The
actuator is equipped with gearing to convert the many turns into 1/4 turn operation. Inside actuator stops that
limit the travel of the valve are pre-set at the factory. Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut will not cause
the valve to shut off any tighter and may cause damage to the gearing.
CYLINDER ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The cylinder operated butterfly valves are operated automatically by directing hydraulic pressure to either side
of the power cylinder. Solenoid valves are used to direct the fluid to the cylinder ports based on electrical
power signals. In cylinder actuators, the travel stops are in the cylinder so that full hydraulic pressure can be
held on the cylinder at either end of travel.
MOTOR ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The motor actuator is designed to open and close the valve through its one quarter turn of rotation. It contains
gearing so that hundreds of turns of the motor or handwheel will slowly move the valve from open to close
position or vice versa. Electrical controls are included in the motor actuator for local electrical control.
The output motion of the actuator is limited to about 100 degrees of output rotation by mechanical stops in
the gearing. These are factory set and should not need adjustment. The actual positioning of the valve disc
will be done by limit switches in the motor actuator. The switches are also set at the factory but adjustment
is sometimes required if the motor unit is installed on a separate mounting base or floorstand. Detailed
procedures are given in the motor manual if adjustment is needed for the mechanical stops or the limit
switches. The wiring and power requirements are given on wiring diagrams included in this instruction manual.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
8

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
WARNING
Fluids exposed to freezing temperatures may cause valve to fail resulting in injury to persons or damage
to valves and other property. Do not use in applications that are exposed to freezing temperatures
unless sufficient flow is maintained through the valve to prevent freezing, or other protection is provided.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
All persons who will install, operate or adjust this equipment must read the instructions and drawings
carefully. Injury and property damage may occur from improper use. It is understood that this
equipment will be installed by individuals with knowledge and skills in electrical equipment. The
manufacturer cannot be responsible for the misuse of this information or equipment, nor can it assume
any resultant liability.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
9

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of valves by owner is generally limited to actuators and shaft seals. In some instances, valve design
permits field adjustment seats when leakage occurs. Unless the owner has skilled personnel and proper
equipment, any major rework will require removal of the valve from the line. Depending on condition, valve may
require return to the manufacturer.
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
1.
Cycle valve to verify operation and no interference in line.
2. Close valve and check for leakage. If leakage is detected, check actuator stops to verify that disc is
fully closed. If leakage persists, remove valve to inspect seat. Contact Pratt’s Field Service Deparment
for information regarding adjustment or replacement of seat.
3.
4.
Check flange connections for leakage. Tighten bolts accordingly.
Check top trunnion area for shaft leakage. If leakage is detected, replace valve packing.
5. If Access to the line is possible, then removal of scale that may interfere with disc travel is suggested.
The seat should be inspected for wear and the taper pin nuts should be tight.
NOTE: LUBRICATION IS NOT REQUIRED.
WARNING
Removal of actuator from valve shaft will cause disc to rotate, striking persons or objects in the disc
path, causing injury to persons and damage to valve. Block or lock disc before removing actuator.
Typical maintenance would be shaft packing replacement and actuator adjustment. Seal leakage, broken parts
and difficult operation should be discussed with Pratt’s Service Department before valve repairs are attempted.
Pratt Service Engineers are available to perform or supervise valve repairs in the field.
Stop line flow and isolate from line pressure prior to performing any corrective maintenance.
After completing repair, cycle valve through one complete operating cycle and after line pressure has been
restored, inspect for leakage.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
10

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Problem Causes Remedies
•Packing Leak
Leakage between valve and
actuator
•First, cycle the valve several
times. This should adjust the
packing. If this fails, clean packing
bore and replace packing.
Bottom trunnion leaks •Packing or gasket leak •Replace bottom shaft packing,
o-ring or gasket.
Valve leaks when closed
•Disc not fully closed or past fully
closed
•Adjust actuator closed position
stop.
•Disc edge wear or damage
•Rubber seat wear or damage
•Clean and/or repair disc edge.
•Adjust or replace valve seat*
Chainwheel jams •Poorly fitting chain •Replace with correct chain.
Valve hard to operate
•Foreign material in valve
•Remove obstructions
Automatic valve does not actuate
•Corroded actuator parts
•Loose actuator
•No power source
•Improper Signal
•Burned out or impaired
component
•Clean and grease actuator
•Apply Loctite or Omnifit locking
compound and tighten bolts.
•Check incoming power source
and replace fuses or reset
pressure.
•Check actuating signal sequence.
•Check and repair or replace
solenoids, motors and relay
devices.
* Seat replacement should not be performed by untrained/unqualified personnel. In the event that seat
replacement is needed, please contact Henry Pratt Field Service.
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
11

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
HOW TO CONTACT PRATT
HOW TO ORDER PARTS:
To order parts, contact our Parts Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Parts Manager
Call - (630) 844-4000
Fax - (630) 844-4191
Please include valve serial number and description of part requested.
HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE:
To obtain further information or secure field service, contact our Field Service Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Field Service Manager
Call - (630) 844-4163
Fax - (630) 844-4160
Please include the following with your inquiry for service:
Henry Pratt Order Number:
Henry Pratt Item Number:
Valve Serial Number:
Type of Service Requested
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
12

24”-48” HP250II Butterfly Valve
Cross Section and Parts List
Document #: 2448HP250IIOM Revision Date: 1/10/11
13

HP350 Butterfly Valve
6”-24” (MJ x MJ)
6”-48” (FLG x FLG)
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Job Name: ____________________________
Contractor: ___________________________
Date: ________________________________
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11

HP350 Butterfly Valve
SAFETY MESSAGES
All safety messages in the instructions are flagged with an exclamation symbol and the word “Warning”.
These messages indicate procedures that must be followed exactly to avoid equipment damage, physical
injury, or death. Safety labels on the product indicate hazards that can cause equipment damage, physical
injury, or death.
Personnel involved in the installation or maintenance of valves should be constantly alert to potential
emission of pipeline material and take appropriate safety precautions. Always wear suitable protection when
dealing with hazardous pipeline materials.
PARTS
WARNING
Order parts from your local Henry Pratt sales representative or directly from Henry Pratt Company. When
ordering parts, please include the serial number located on the valve tag.
WARRANTY ISSUE
Seller warrants that, at its option, it will repair, replace, or refund the unit purchase price of any products
which are non-conforming due to Seller’s material or workmanship during the warranty period. The warranty
period shall be twelve (12) months for parts and eighteen (18) months for all other goods after date of
shipment. This shall be Buyer’s sole remedy. In order to maintain this product warranty, Buyer must give
written notice to Seller’s Field Service Supervisor prior to any work being performed.
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE FOREGOING, SELLER EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Seller does not warrant water operated metallic cylinders against damage caused by corrosion, electrolysis
or mineral deposits. In no event shall warranty include valve removal or reinstallation.
WARNING
Read all applicable directions and instructions prior to any maintenance, troubleshooting or
installation
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
2

HP350 Butterfly Valve
Table of Contents
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
INSTALLATION 5
OPERATION 8
MAINTENANCE 10
TROUBLESHOOTING 11
CONTACTING PRATT 12
PRODUCT DRAWINGS 13
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
3

HP350 Butterfly Valve
Functional Description
Round butterfly valve discs rotate 1/4 turns to provide tight shutoff in air or water pipelines. The valves can be
used to regulate flow rate by positioning the disc between 15 and 90 degrees open.
Manually Operated Valve
Manually operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple handwheel,
chainwheel or nut input turns into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by physical
stops in the actuator housing.
WARNING
Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel or nut against the stops will not provide tighter shutoff of the valve
and may damage the actuator. Only actuator adjustments will affect valve shutoff.
Motor Operated Valve
Motor operated butterfly valves are powered with gear actuators, which convert multiple motor input turns
into 1/4 turn valve operation. The travel of the valve disc is limited by limit switches in the motor housing and
physical stops in the actuator housing. Valve shutoff is affected by limit switch and physical stop settings.
WARNING
Improperly set limit switches and/or physical stops may damage the motor and/or actuator.
Cylinder Operate Valve
Hydraulically operated butterfly valves are powered with a gear box and double acting cylinder. The linear
stroke of the cylinder is converted to 1/4 turn operation by the gear box. Auxiliary controls are provided to direct
hydraulic power to the cylinder and to control the operating speed of the cylinder.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
4

HP350 Butterfly Valve
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
Valves are a significant component of any piping system. Failure due to faulty installation, improper operation
or maintenance in such systems could result in damage, down time and costly repairs. In buried underground
installations, problems or malfunctions can result in extensive, costly unearthing operations to correct the
problem. Many problems with valves can be traced to improper installation, operation, or maintenance
procedures.
UNLOADING
Inspect valves on receipt for damage in shipment and conformance with quantity and description in the
shipping notice and order. Carefully unload all valves to the ground without dropping using fork trucks or slings
under skids. Do not lift valves with slings or chain around operating shaft, actuator, or through waterway.
Instead, lift valves with eye bolts or rods through flange holes.
STORAGE
Whenever practical, store valves indoors. If not, protect valves and actuators from weather and accumulation
of water, dirt, rocks and debris. When valves fitted with power actuators and controls are stored, energize
electric actuator or otherwise protect electrical control equipment to prevent corrosion of electrical contacts due
to condensation resulting from temperature variation. Do not expose rubber seats to sunlight or ozone for any
extended period. Valves should be stored with the valve disc or closure member slightly open.
INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
Make sure flange faces and joint sealing surfaces, body seats and disc seats are clean. Check bolting
attaching actuator to valve for loosening in transit and handling. If loose, tighten firmly. Open and close valve
to make sure it operates properly and that stops or limit switches are correctly set so that the valve seats fully.
Check that valve rotation direction is correct and close valve before installing.
INSTALLATION
The following items must be performed during installation to ensure proper function.
• Carefully place valves into position avoiding contact or impact with other equipment, vault walls or trench
walls.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
5

HP350 Butterfly Valve
• Valves are to be installed in accordance with the General Arrangement Drawings furnished for the order.
• Foreign material in a valve can damage the rubber seat when valves are operated. Be sure valve interiors
and adjacent piping are clear of foreign material prior to mating valve to pipe joint.
• Prepare pipe ends and install valves in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s instructions for the joint
used. Do not deflect pipe/valve joint. Do not use valve and jack to pull pipe into alignment.
• In plant piping, install so as to minimize bending of valve connection with pipe loading.
• Make sure valve disc, when opened, will not contact pipe port. This is especially necessary on pipe with linings.
Check manufacturer for minimum pipe I.D. required for clearance.
WARNING
It is recommended that valves be installed into piping system in accordance with AWWA M-11 in order
to prevent any undue piping stress, deflection or bending that may affect the performance of the valve.
WARNING
Valve disc without actuator may open or close at any time and cause injury to persons or damage to
valve and other property. The shaft/disc clamping device when furnished is intended for temporary use
during shipping, handling and valve installation only. Do not subject valve to flow conditions before
actuator is mounted and tested for performance and clamping device is removed.
Buried valves installed with valve boxes must be so installed that the valve box does not transmit shock or
stress to the valve actuator as a result of shifting soil or traffic load.
When valves are installed in vaults, the vault design must provide space for purposes of repair. The valve
operating nut should be accessible from the top opening of the vault with a tee wrench.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
6

HP350 Butterfly Valve
TESTING
When rubber seated valves are used to isolate sections of line for test, it is important to realize that these
valves are designed or factory adjusted to hold rated pressure only. Test pressure may cause leakage past the
rubber seat or damage to the valve.
In order to prevent time lost in searching for leaks, it is recommended that excavations for buried valves not be
back-filled until after hydrostatic pressure tests have been made.
Seat leakage can occur due to foreign material in the line. If this occurs, open valve 5 – 10 degrees to get high
velocity flushing action. Close and repeat several times to clear seats for tight shutoff.
Seat leakage can occur due to rotational shift in position of the disc with relation to the body seat. Readjust
closing stop in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
RECORDS
Upon completion of installation, valve location, size, make, type, date of installation, number of turns to open,
direction of opening and any other information deemed pertinent should be entered on the owner’s permanent
records.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
7

HP350 Butterfly Valve
OPERATION
Do not permit use and operation of any valve at pressure above the rated pressure of the valve.
Do not exceed 300 ft-lb input torque on actuators with wrench nuts, 200 lb. rim pull input torque for handwheels
or chainwheels. If portable auxiliary actuators are used, size the actuator or use a torque limiting device to
prevent application of torque exceeding 300 ft-lbs. If an oversize actuator with no means of limiting torque
is used, stop the actuator before valve is fully opened or closed against stops and complete the operation
manually. Be sure to check actuator directional switch against direction indicated on wrench nut, handwheel or
records before applying opening and closing torque.
If a valve is stuck in some intermediate position between open and closed, check first for jamming in the
actuator. If nothing is found, the interference is inside the valve. In this case, do not attempt to force the disc
open or closed since excessive torque in this position can severely damage internal parts. Contact the Pratt
Service Department.
MANUAL ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The manually operated butterfly valves are operated by rotating the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut. The
actuator is equipped with gearing to convert the many turns into 1/4 turn operation. Inside actuator stops that
limit the travel of the valve are pre-set at the factory. Forcing the handwheel, chainwheel, or nut will not cause
the valve to shut off any tighter and may cause damage to the gearing.
CYLINDER ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The cylinder operated butterfly valves are operated automatically by directing hydraulic pressure to either side
of the power cylinder. Solenoid valves are used to direct the fluid to the cylinder ports based on electrical
power signals. In cylinder actuators, the travel stops are in the cylinder so that full hydraulic pressure can be
held on the cylinder at either end of travel.
MOTOR ACTUATOR FUNCTION AND USE:
The motor actuator is designed to open and close the valve through its one quarter turn of rotation. It contains
gearing so that hundreds of turns of the motor or handwheel will slowly move the valve from open to close
position or vice versa. Electrical controls are included in the motor actuator for local electrical control.
The output motion of the actuator is limited to about 100 degrees of output rotation by mechanical stops in
the gearing. These are factory set and should not need adjustment. The actual positioning of the valve disc
will be done by limit switches in the motor actuator. The switches are also set at the factory but adjustment
is sometimes required if the motor unit is installed on a separate mounting base or floorstand. Detailed
procedures are given in the motor manual if adjustment is needed for the mechanical stops or the limit
switches. The wiring and power requirements are given on wiring diagrams included in this instruction manual.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
8

HP350 Butterfly Valve
WARNING
Fluids exposed to freezing temperatures may cause valve to fail resulting in injury to persons or damage
to valves and other property. Do not use in applications that are exposed to freezing temperatures
unless sufficient flow is maintained through the valve to prevent freezing, or other protection is provided.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
All persons who will install, operate or adjust this equipment must read the instructions and drawings
carefully. Injury and property damage may occur from improper use. It is understood that this
equipment will be installed by individuals with knowledge and skills in electrical equipment. The
manufacturer cannot be responsible for the misuse of this information or equipment, nor can it assume
any resultant liability.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
9

HP350 Butterfly Valve
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of valves by owner is generally limited to actuators and shaft seals. In some instances, valve design
permits field adjustment seats when leakage occurs. Unless the owner has skilled personnel and proper
equipment, any major rework will require removal of the valve from the line. Depending on condition, valve may
require return to the manufacturer.
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
1.
Cycle valve to verify operation and no interference in line.
2. Close valve and check for leakage. If leakage is detected, check actuator stops to verify that disc is
fully closed. If leakage persists, remove valve to inspect seat. Contact Pratt’s Field Service Deparment
for information regarding adjustment or replacement of seat.
3.
4.
Check flange connections for leakage. Tighten bolts accordingly.
Check top trunnion area for shaft leakage. If leakage is detected, replace valve packing.
5. If Access to the line is possible, then removal of scale that may interfere with disc travel is suggested.
The seat should be inspected for wear and the taper pin nuts should be tight.
NOTE: LUBRICATION IS NOT REQUIRED.
WARNING
Removal of actuator from valve shaft will cause disc to rotate, striking persons or objects in the disc
path, causing injury to persons and damage to valve. Block or lock disc before removing actuator.
Typical maintenance would be shaft packing replacement and actuator adjustment. Seal leakage, broken parts
and difficult operation should be discussed with Pratt’s Service Department before valve repairs are attempted.
Pratt Service Engineers are available to perform or supervise valve repairs in the field.
Stop line flow and isolate from line pressure prior to performing any corrective maintenance.
After completing repair, cycle valve through one complete operating cycle and after line pressure has been
restored, inspect for leakage.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
10

HP350 Butterfly Valve
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Problem Causes Remedies
•Packing Leak
Leakage between valve and
actuator
•First, cycle the valve several
times. This should adjust the
packing. If this fails, clean packing
bore and replace packing.
Bottom trunnion leaks •Packing or gasket leak •Replace bottom shaft packing,
o-ring or gasket.
Valve leaks when closed
•Disc not fully closed or past fully
closed
•Adjust actuator closed position
stop.
•Disc edge wear or damage
•Rubber seat wear or damage
•Clean and/or repair disc edge.
•Adjust or replace valve seat*
Chainwheel jams •Poorly fitting chain •Replace with correct chain.
Valve hard to operate
•Foreign material in valve
•Remove obstructions
Automatic valve does not actuate
•Corroded actuator parts
•Loose actuator
•No power source
•Improper Signal
•Burned out or impaired
component
•Clean and grease actuator
•Apply Loctite or Omnifit locking
compound and tighten bolts.
•Check incoming power source
and replace fuses or reset
pressure.
•Check actuating signal sequence.
•Check and repair or replace
solenoids, motors and relay
devices.
* Seat replacement should not be performed by untrained/unqualified personnel. In the event that seat
replacement is needed, please contact Henry Pratt Field Service.
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
11

HP350 Butterfly Valve
HOW TO CONTACT PRATT
HOW TO ORDER PARTS:
To order parts, contact our Parts Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Parts Manager
Call - (630) 844-4000
Fax - (630) 844-4191
Please include valve serial number and description of part requested.
HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE:
To obtain further information or secure field service, contact our Field Service Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Field Service Manager
Call - (630) 844-4163
Fax - (630) 844-4160
Please include the following with your inquiry for service:
Henry Pratt Order Number:
Henry Pratt Item Number:
Valve Serial Number:
Type of Service Requested
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
12

HP350 Butterfly Valve
Cross Section and Parts List
Document #: HP350OM Revision Date: 1/10/11
13

Henry Pratt
Diviner Position
Indicator
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Job Name: ____________________________
Contractor: ___________________________
Date: ________________________________
Document #:DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11

Diviner Position Indicator
SAFETY MESSAGES
All safety messages in the instructions are flagged with an exclamation symbol and the word “Warning”.
These messages indicate procedures that must be followed exactly to avoid equipment damage, physical
injury, or death. Safety labels on the product indicate hazards that can cause equipment damage, physical
injury, or death.
Personnel involved in the installation or maintenance of valves should be constantly alert to
potential emission of pipeline material and take appropriate safety precautions. Always wear
suitable protection when dealing with hazardous pipeline materials.
PARTS
WARNING
Order parts from your local Henry Pratt sales representative or directly from Henry Pratt Company. When
ordering parts, please include the serial number located on the valve tag.
WARRANTY ISSUE
Seller warrants that, at its option, it will repair, replace, or refund the unit purchase price of any products
which are non-conforming due to Seller’s material or workmanship during the warranty period. The warranty
period shall be twelve (12) months for parts and eighteen (18) months for all other goods after date of
shipment. This shall be Buyer’s sole remedy. In order to maintain this product warranty, Buyer must give
written notice to Seller’s Field Service Supervisor prior to any work being performed.
IN CONSIDERATION OF THE FOREGOING, SELLER EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Seller does not warrant water operated metallic cylinders against damage caused by corrosion, electrolysis
or mineral deposits. In no event shall warranty include valve removal or reinstallation.
WARNING
Read all applicable directions and instructions prior to any maintenance, troubleshooting or
installation
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
2

Diviner Position Indicator
Table of Contents
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4
INSTALLATION / OPERATION 5
MAINTENANCE 7
CONTACTING PRATT 8
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
3

Diviner Position Indicator
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Pratt Diviner is a valve position indicator used for buried valves to enable you to identify valve position,
identification, and operating directions at a glance. It is installed in a standard 5-1/4” buried valve box just below
the removable valve box cover. The Pratt Diviner is adjustable for use with valves requiring 1-150 or 150-
250 turns. The working parts are non-metallic material, that are virtually indestructible and maintenance free in
buried valve service.
The Diviner position indicator is shipped for field assembly complete with cast iron adapter (1) and caps
screws, guide bushing (2), position indicator (3), flexible washer (4), and a two-inch square AWWA nut (5) with
set screw. The adapter fits a standard 5-1/4 inch valve box (6) or 5 inch cast iron soil pipe bell utilizing a cast
cover with skirt depth of 1” or less (7). Extension stems (8) are supplied in 5-foot or 10-foot lengths (see Figure
1).
Figure 1 - Pratt Diviner
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
4

Diviner Position Indicator
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
The following procedure should be followed for ease of installation (See Figure 2).
1.
Establish desired finished elevation and adjust the existing valve box (5) to 3” below this elevation.
2. Assemble extension stem by inserting extension shaft (3A) to the drive collar (3B) and securing by
means of set screws (3C).
3. Assemble extension stem assembly to operator by placing the drive collar (3B) over the AWWA nut on
the operator, taking care that the drive collar is properly seated.
4. Measure 1-3/4” up from the top of the adjusted valve box (5) and mark extension shaft (3A) at this
point. Cut off excess shaft. De-burr.
5. Place indicator adapter (2A) inside the valve box (5) and tighten hex head cap screws (2C) so that the
adapter will not rotate in the valve box.
6. Slip guide bushing (2B) over extension shaft and seat in indicator adapter (2A). A light coat of grease
may be applied to the mating surfaces of these two parts.
7.
Adjust the Diviner indicator for the intended valve as follows:
a. The transparent top cover of the Diviner must be clean and free of any oil or dirt. Clean with Methyl
Alcohol only. Do not use grease solvents of any kind or the transparency may be destroyed. Allow to dry
before proceeding.
b. Position the base plate (the decal having the numbers from 0 to 102/255) on the Diviner face. While
holding the decal at the top half, raise the bottom half and remove the paper backing and anchor decal to
Diviner. Then remove the backing from the top half. Do not remove all the backing at one time or it will be
difficult to position the decal properly. Remove any trapped air bubbles.
c. Use the table below for Pratt valves with Pratt MDT Actuators.
PRATT VALVE SIZE ACTUATOR NO. OF TURNS
3 THRU 12 MDT-2S 32
14 THRU 16 MDT-3S 30
16 THRU 24 MDT-4S 40
24 THRU 36 MDT-5 44
36 THRU 48 MDT-5S 136
42 THRU 72 MDT-6S 215
d. Position the top plate (the decal with the “Diviner” logo) so that the window is lined up with the
appropriate number of turns. Repeat the procedure described for the base plate.
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
5

Diviner Position Indicator
INSTALLATION / OPERATION (Cont.)
e. If using an actuator other than an MDT, turn the nut on the actuator until the valve is fully closed.
Next, open the valve and count the number of turns required to bring the valve to the full open position.
Close the valve and again count the number of turns required to fully close the valve. The number of
turns to close the valve should equial the number of turns to open the valve. Record the number of turns
required to open and close the valve.
WARNING
CAUTION: Be sure the plates are properly positioned before removing the backing paper. The
adhesive is strong, making it extremely difficult to reposition after once being glued down.
8. Determine whether the valve is in the open or closed position and set the position indicator (Diviner) (1)
accordingly.
9. Slip position indicator over the extension shaft and lower into correct position in the indicator taking care
that the flat portions of the indicator flange match up with the flat keys in the indicator adapter.
10. Slip the felt washer (2F) over the end of the extension shaft and on to the indicator hub.
Figure 2 - Diviner
Position Indicator
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
6

Diviner Position Indicator
INSTALLATION / OPERATION (Cont.)
11. Assemble 2” square nut (2D) to extension shaft and press down firmly while tightening set screws (2E).
12. Replace existing valve box cover (4).
13. To disassemble reverse the above procedure.
MAINTENANCE
The “Diviner” position indicator is a sealed, water-tight unit and is not intended for field maintenance. No attempt
should be made to disassemble. Additional decals are available if the Diviner is transferred to another
valve installation.
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
7

Diviner Position Indicator
HOW TO CONTACT PRATT
HOW TO ORDER PARTS:
To order parts, contact our Parts Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Parts Manager
Call - (630) 844-4000
Fax - (630) 844-4191
Please include valve serial number and description of part requested.
HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE:
To obtain further information or secure field service, contact our Field Service Department:
Write: -
Henry Pratt Company
401 South Highland Avenue
Aurora, IL 60506-5563
Attn: Field Service Manager
Call - (630) 844-4163
Fax - (630) 844-4160
Please include the following with your inquiry for service:
Henry Pratt Order Number:
Henry Pratt Item Number:
Valve Serial Number:
Type of Service Requested
Document #: DIVPOSNOM Revision Date: 2/9/11
8

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EXTENDED STORAGE
GEN4-0600
STORAGE PROCEDURE
(6 Months or Longer)
Your Pratt Rubber Seated Valve has been designed to provide many years of trouble-free
service. A reasonable amount of care should be exercised in storing the valve to assure
trouble-free service. Following are precautions that should be followed regarding
storage.
Outdoor Storage:
1. All exposed rubber components shall be brush coated with Chemglaze Z-307 from
Lord Chemical, or with Dow Corning No. 111 Silicone Grease for potable water
applications, to a thickness of 1-2 mils.
2. If valves will be stored in a high humidity or corrosive environment, where bare
iron or steel flanges may rust, then flanges should be coated with a rust preventive
suitable for outdoor exposure such as Rust-Veto by E.F. Houghton. Clean surfaces
and apply one uniform coat with a dry rag or brush.
3. Valve flanges should be covered with full circle panels of ¼” exterior grade
plywood or tempered hardboard. These covers shall be fastened to the valve
flanges.
4. Valve and operator assembly should be covered with black plastic sheeting having a
minimum thickness of 4 mils.
5. Electric equipment must be stored off the ground above possible water or snow
level, in a position similar to the intended mounting position, and be covered with
plastic sheeting having a minimum thickness of 4 mils.
6. If the average mean temperatures fall below 60° F and/or the relative humidity
exceeds 50%, all electrical control components and motor control compartments
with internal heaters must have the heaters wired and operating. The wire entrance
points must be sealed against moisture. Desiccant must be placed in those units that
do not have internal heaters.
7. All conduit openings shall be sealed with metal threaded pipe plugs to keep
equipment free from moisture and to protect threads of conduit openings. All other
openings normally sealed by the mating mounting surfaces must be covered and
sealed.
Indoor Storage:
Indoor storage will require Steps 1, 6, and 7 listed under outdoor storage.

PAINT SYSTEM SUMMARY Page 1 of 5
SYSTEM PART NO. A069636A A069636B A069636C A069636D A069636E
PART NO. 2308405 2308406 2308407
ALTERNATE SYSTEM NO NO NO NO NO
MULTIPLE COLOR
SYSTEM
MANUFACTURER
MANUFACTURER’S
DESIGNATION
NO NO NO NO NO
PPG PROTECTIVE &
MARINE COATINGS
AMERCOAT
370
PPG PROTECTIVE &
MARINE COATINGS
AMERCOAT
370
PPG PROTECTIVE
& MARINE
COATINGS
AMERCOAT
370
PPG PROTECTIVE
& MARINE
COATINGS
AMERCOAT
370
PPG PROTECTIVE &
MARINE COATINGS
AMERCOAT
370
USE CATEGORY ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
SUBMERSIBLE 4 YES YES YES YES YES
MIN. TOTAL DRY MIL
THICKNESS
MAXIMUM TOTAL DRY
MIL THICKNESS
SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1
SEE NOTES
1 AND 2
SEE NOTE 1
24 24 24 24 24
NSF/UL
RECOAT TIME
1 HOUR @ 70° F 1 HOUR @ 70° F 1 HOUR @ 70° F 1 HOUR @ 70° F 1 HOUR @ 70° F
NSF/UL
CURING TIME
7 DAYS @ 70° F 7 DAYS @ 70° F 7 DAYS @ 70° F 7 DAYS @ 70° F 7 DAYS @ 70° F
SURFACE PREPARATION SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP5
COLOR
(IF SPECIFIED)
OXIDE RED WHITE PEARL GRAY WHITE OXIDE RED
CLASS I INSPECTION NO NO NO NO NO
MAT’L CATEGORY PE PE PE PE PE
MIN. TOTAL DRY MIL
THICKNESS
8 8 8 8 8
THEORETICAL
COVERAGE
SQ FT / GAL / MIL
OTHER
AWWA C-550
NSF 61
USDA
NFPA CLASS 1
TEMP: 200F
1011 1011 1011 1011 1011
VOC 2.50-3.0 VOC 2.50-3.0
LBS/GAL
LBS/GAL
ANSI/NSF STD 61
VOS 63% +/- 3%
TEMPERATURE
RESIDENCE 250F
DRY CONTINUOUS
ANSI/NSF STD 61
VOS 63% +/- 3%
TEMPERATURE
RESIDENCE 250F
DRY CONTINUOUS
VOC 2.50-3.0
LBS/GAL
ANSI/NSF STD 61
VOS 63% +/- 3%
TEMPERATURE
RESIDENCE 250F
DRY CONTINUOUS
VOC 2.50-3.0
LBS/GAL
ANSI/NSF STD 61
VOS 63% +/- 3%
TEMPERATURE
RESIDENCE 250F
DRY CONTINUOUS
VOC 2.50-3.0
LBS/GAL
ANSI/NSF STD 61
VOS 63% +/- 3%
TEMPERATURE
RESIDENCE 250F
DRY CONTINUOUS
NSF – YES NSF – YES NSF – NO NSF – YES NSF - YES
NOTES:
1) MINIMUM THICKNESS SHALL BE PER THE SHOP ORDER JDE SCREEN AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING WHICH MUST
INDICATE THE SAME MINIMUM NUMBER OF MILS.
2) FOR MULTIPLE COLOR SYSTEMS, FIRST COLOR LISTED SHALL BE APPLIED FIRST TO A THICKNESS OF 1/2 THE TOTAL
REQUIRED MIL THICKNESS, FOLLOWED BY THE SECOND COLOR MAKING UP THE SECOND 1/2 OF REQUIRED MIL
THICKNESS.
3) AWWA C-550 APPROVED.
4) NSF-61 APPROVED VALVES ARE NOT TO BE USED SUBMERGED IN POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS.
5) MAY BE THINNED WITH THINNER #65 UP TO 12% BY VOLUME.
UL/FM
6) FOR NSF61 APPLICATIONS, ONLY 4” AND LARGE VALVES ARE ALLOWED.
HENRY PRATT COMPANY
PPG
AMERCOAT 370
(FACTORY ACCELERATED)
3 4/9/08 SD SS 6
2 7/1/05 SD SS 5
1 10/29/03 SJR SS 4
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3/23/11
Dry Mil
Thickness to 8
3/11/10
Per ECO
1502150
Tim
Fallon
DRAWN SD CHKD BY SS REV DATE BY APP REV DATE BY APP
SCALE DATE 4/9/08 APPROVED LAST MODIFIED
RCB
RCB
JHW
A-69636
PART NO.

Page 2 of 5
UL/FM
HENRY PRATT COMPANY
PPG
AMERCOAT 370
(FACTORY ACCELERATED)
3 4/9/08 SD SS 6
2 7/1/05 SD SS 5
1 10/29/03 SJR SS 4
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3/23/11
Dry Mil
Thickness to 8
3/11/10
Per ECO
1502150
Tim
Fallon
DRAWN SD CHKD BY SS REV DATE BY APP REV DATE BY APP
SCALE DATE 4/9/08 APPROVED LAST MODIFIED
RCB
RCB
JHW
A-69636
PART NO.

Page 3 of 5
UL/FM
HENRY PRATT COMPANY
PPG
AMERCOAT 370
(FACTORY ACCELERATED)
3 4/9/08 SD SS 6
2 7/1/05 SD SS 5
1 10/29/03 SJR SS 4
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3/23/11
Dry Mil
Thickness to 8
3/11/10
Per ECO
1502150
Tim
Fallon
DRAWN SD CHKD BY SS REV DATE BY APP REV DATE BY APP
SCALE DATE 4/9/08 APPROVED LAST MODIFIED
RCB
RCB
JHW
A-69636
PART NO.

Page 4 of 5
UL/FM
HENRY PRATT COMPANY
PPG
AMERCOAT 370
(FACTORY ACCELERATED)
3 4/9/08 SD SS 6
2 7/1/05 SD SS 5
1 10/29/03 SJR SS 4
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3/23/11
Dry Mil
Thickness to 8
3/11/10
Per ECO
1502150
Tim
Fallon
DRAWN SD CHKD BY SS REV DATE BY APP REV DATE BY APP
SCALE DATE 4/9/08 APPROVED LAST MODIFIED
RCB
RCB
JHW
A-69636
PART NO.

Page 5 of 5
UL/FM
HENRY PRATT COMPANY
PPG
AMERCOAT 370
(FACTORY ACCELERATED)
3 4/9/08 SD SS 6
2 7/1/05 SD SS 5
1 10/29/03 SJR SS 4
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3/23/11
Dry Mil
Thickness to 8
3/11/10
Per ECO
1502150
Tim
Fallon
DRAWN SD CHKD BY SS REV DATE BY APP REV DATE BY APP
SCALE DATE 4/9/08 APPROVED LAST MODIFIED
RCB
RCB
JHW
A-69636
PART NO.

A Tradition of Excellence
With the development of the first rubber seated
butterfly valve more than 70 years ago, the Henry
Pratt Company became a trusted name in the flow
control industry, setting the standard for product
quality and customer service. Today Pratt provides
the following range of superior products to the water,
wastewater and power generation industries.
BUTTERFLY VALVES: from 3" to 162"
RECTANGULAR VALVES: 1' x 1' to 14' x 16'
BALL VALVES —
RUBBER SEATED: from 4" to 60"
METAL SEATED: from 6" to 48"
PLUG VALVES: from 1/2" to 36", 3 ways
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
VALVE CONTROLS
ENERGY DISSIPATING VALVES
AND FIXED ENERGY DISSIPATERS
CONE VALVES
CHECK VALVES
A Commitment to Meeting
The Customers’ Needs
Henry Pratt valves represent a long-term commitment
to both the customer and to a tradition of product
excellence. This commitment is evident in the number
of innovations we have brought to the industries we
serve. In fact, the Henry Pratt Company was the first
to introduce many of the flow control products in use
today, including the first rubber seated butterfly valve,
one of the first nuclear N-Stamp valves, and the
bonded seat butterfly valve.
Innovative Products
For Unique Applications
Though many of the standard valves we produce are
used in water filtration and distribution applica tions,
Pratt has built a reputation on the ability to develop
specialized products that help customers to meet
their individual operational challenges.
Creative Engineering
for Fluid Systems
Pratt’s ability to provide practical solutions to
complex issues is demonstrated by the following
case histories.
Earthquake Proof Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured hydraulically
actuated valves for a water storage application so
that the valves would automatically operate in the
event of earthquakes. This lead to the development
of a valve that will withstand forces of up to 6g’s.
Custom Actuation/
Isolation Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured valves that would
isolate a working chamber in the event of a nuclear
emergency during the decommissioning of armed
nuclear warheads. The valves were able to close in
a millisecond using specially designed Pratt electropneumatic
actuators.
Valves Designed for
Harsh Environments
Pratt designed and manufactured a 144" diameter
butterfly valve for the emergency cooling system at
a jet engine test facility. The valve was designed to
supply water to help dissipate the tremen dous heat
generated by the engines during testing.
Through experience, commitment and creative engineering, Pratt is uniquely
suited to provide superior products for our customers’ special needs.
For more information, contact our corporate headquarters in Aurora, Illinois.

A Tradition of Excellence
With the development of the first rubber seated
butterfly valve more than 70 years ago, the Henry
Pratt Company became a trusted name in the flow
control industry, setting the standard for product
quality and customer service. Today Pratt provides
the following range of superior products to the water,
wastewater and power generation industries.
BUTTERFLY VALVES: from 3" to 162"
RECTANGULAR VALVES: 1' x 1' to 14' x 16'
BALL VALVES —
RUBBER SEATED: from 4" to 60"
METAL SEATED: from 6" to 48"
PLUG VALVES: from 1/2" to 36", 3 ways
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
VALVE CONTROLS
ENERGY DISSIPATING VALVES
AND FIXED ENERGY DISSIPATERS
CONE VALVES
CHECK VALVES
A Commitment to Meeting
The Customers’ Needs
Henry Pratt valves represent a long-term commitment
to both the customer and to a tradition of product
excellence. This commitment is evident in the number
of innovations we have brought to the industries we
serve. In fact, the Henry Pratt Company was the first
to introduce many of the flow control products in use
today, including the first rubber seated butterfly valve,
one of the first nuclear N-Stamp valves, and the
bonded seat butterfly valve.
Innovative Products
For Unique Applications
Though many of the standard valves we produce are
used in water filtration and distribution applica tions,
Pratt has built a reputation on the ability to develop
specialized products that help customers to meet
their individual operational challenges.
Creative Engineering
for Fluid Systems
Pratt’s ability to provide practical solutions to
complex issues is demonstrated by the following
case histories.
Earthquake Proof Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured hydraulically
actuated valves for a water storage application so
that the valves would automatically operate in the
event of earthquakes. This lead to the development
of a valve that will withstand forces of up to 6g’s.
Custom Actuation/
Isolation Valves
Pratt designed and manufactured valves that would
isolate a working chamber in the event of a nuclear
emergency during the decommissioning of armed
nuclear warheads. The valves were able to close in
a millisecond using specially designed Pratt electropneumatic
actuators.
Valves Designed for
Harsh Environments
Pratt designed and manufactured a 144" diameter
butterfly valve for the emergency cooling system at
a jet engine test facility. The valve was designed to
supply water to help dissipate the tremen dous heat
generated by the engines during testing.
Through experience, commitment and creative engineering, Pratt is uniquely
suited to provide superior products for our customers’ special needs.
For more information, contact our corporate headquarters in Aurora, Illinois.

Scope of Line: VALVE ACTUATORS

MANUAL ACTUATORS
Spur Gear
End Cover
J
L
PRATT
Chainwheel
Handwheel
OPEN
PRATT
OPEN
2" St’d.
AWWA Nut
W=
DIA.
V=
DIA.
N
PRATT
OPEN
P
CLOSED
M
S
T
R
Q

MANUAL ACTUATORS
Open 90˚
80
Open 90˚
80
DISC POSITION (in degrees)
70
60
50
40
30
20
DISC POSITION (in degrees)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
10
Closed 0˚
0% 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%
ACTUATOR STROKE (in percent of total travel)
MDT-2S
Open 90˚
80
Closed 0˚
0% 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%
ACTUATOR STROKE (in percent of total travel)
MDT-3S
Open 90˚
80
DISC POSITION (in degrees)
70
60
50
40
30
20
DISC POSITION (in degrees)
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
10
Closed 0˚
0% 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%
ACTUATOR STROKE (in percent of total travel)
MDT-4S AND MDT-5
Closed 0˚
0% 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%
ACTUATOR STROKE (in percent of total travel)
MDT-5S, MDT-6S
K
PRATT
O P E N

MANUAL ACTUATORS

BURIED SERVICE ACTUATOR

FEATURES & BENEFITS
OF THE TRAVELING NUT ACTUATOR
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR STYLES

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

ACTUATOR EXTENSIONS
REMOVABLE
COVER
3/8"
OPEN
FLOORSTAND
MOTOR OPERATOR
ON FLOORSTAND
2" ST’D
AWWA NUT
36 1 ⁄2"
1
⁄2"
4 1 ⁄2" DIA.
36"
17 7 ⁄8"
UNIVERSAL
JOINT
14 1 ⁄2"
UNIVERSAL JOINT
1-1/4" SQ.
SHAFT
FURNISHED
IN 10'-0"
LENGTHS.
TO BE CUT &
ASSEMBLED
BY CUSTOMER
IN FIELD.
EXTENSION
BONNET
1"
10˚ MAX.
OFFSET
CLOSED
TORQUE TUBE
FLOORSTAND
32 1 ⁄8"
10˚ MAX OFFSET
UNIVERSAL JOINT
EXTERNAL
PACKING BONNET
10": VALVES TO 60"
11": VALVES 66" & UP
Support bracket
when required
2" Adjustment
7"
Torque tube and
extensions bonnet
lengths to be
determined by
customer
1
⁄2"

PRATT
Henry Pratt Company
TITLE: OPERATOR MOUNTING POSITION STANDARD
REVISION:
11
DATE:
8/31/11
REVISED BY:
Steve Smick
APPROVAL:
Ed Schutz
EPS # 23
Appendix B
Page 2 of 10

AUMA Data Sheet
AUMA Comm No.: A000120170-DS002
AUMA Actuators, Inc. USA
www.auma-usa.com
02-07-2012 13:51:22 Phone: (724) 743-2862 Fax: (724) 743-4711
Customer: HENRY PRATT COMPANY AURORA Project: WARD COUNTY, ODESSA TX
P.O. No: 794925 OP 1513188 HP Valve/Gate Size & Type: 30" BFV
Customer Item: 5,8,10,18
Part No: ZHP1513188005
Qty: 9 AUMA Lines: 6, 7, 8, 9
Gearbox:
AUMA BEVEL GEARBOX GK14.6-2.8B
IP67 (6FT FOR 30 MIN)
KN CORROSION PROTECTION -STD
2" NUT 30MM BORE WITHOUT HANDWHEEL
AUMA STANDARD SILVER-GRAY COROTHANE
VALVE MOUNTING FLANGE FA14
-40F TO +175F STANDARD
HOUSING MATERIAL CAST IRON-STD
SA MOUNTING FLANGE FA14
30MM INPUT SHAFT STAINLESS STEEL-STD
B-DRIVE NUT SEPERATE
Direction to close: CW
Output Drive Type:
MACHINED 'B' NUT - GK14.6
Gearbox:
AUMA WORM GEARBOX GS160.3/GZ160.3-4 - RR
KN CORROSION PROTECTION -STD
VALVE MOUNT FLANGE FA25-EP/- (GS160)-STD
POINTER COVER IP67 STD
MOUNTING FLANGE FA14 95MM GZ30-4:1
HOUSING MATERIAL CAST IRON-STD
WITH GZ REDUCTION GEAR STD
AUMA STANDARD SILVER-GRAY COROTHANE
-40F TO +175F - STANDARD
WORM WHEEL DUCTILE IRON
Direction to close: CW
Output Drive Type:
MACHINED COUPLING - GS160.3
Drawings:
ACTUATOR DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
SD 112799 REV-000
OUTPUT DRIVE/MOUNTING FLANGE DRAWING
SK 099241 REV-001
Operation Manuals:
Worm Gearbox GS50.3 - GS250.3
ba_gs3_50_250_us.pdf
Bevel Gearbox GK 10.1 - 40.2
ba_gk2_en.pdf
Certified By: Pecora, Veronica Certified Date: 01/24/12 Revision: 0

AUMA Data Sheet
AUMA Comm No.: A000120170-DS004
AUMA Actuators, Inc. USA
www.auma-usa.com
02-07-2012 13:51:28 Phone: (724) 743-2862 Fax: (724) 743-4711
Customer: HENRY PRATT COMPANY AURORA Project: WARD COUNTY, ODESSA TX
P.O. No: 794925 OP 1513188 HP Valve/Gate Size & Type: 48" BFV
Customer Item: 6
Part No: ZHP1513188006
Qty: 2 AUMA Lines: 14, 15, 16, 17
Gearbox:
AUMA BEVEL GEARBOX GK14.2-2.8B
IP67 (6FT FOR 30 MIN)
KN CORROSION PROTECTION -STD
2" NUT 30MM BORE WITHOUT HANDWHEEL
B-DRIVE NUT SEPERATE
VALVE MOUNTING FLANGE FA14
HOUSING MATERIAL CAST IRON-STD
AUMA STANDARD SILVER-GRAY COROTHANE
-40F TO +175F STANDARD
SA MOUNTING FLANGE FA10
20MM INPUT SHAFT STAINLESS STEEL-STD
Direction to close: CW
Output Drive Type:
MACHINED 'B' NUT - GK14.2
Gearbox:
AUMA WORM GEARBOX GS200.3/GZ200.3-8 - RR
KN CORROSION PROTECTION -STD
VALVE MOUNT FLANGE FA30-EP/- (GS200)-STD
-40F TO +175F - STANDARD
WORM WHEEL DUCTILE IRON
POINTER COVER IP67 STD
HOUSING MATERIAL CAST IRON-STD
AUMA STANDARD SILVER-GRAY COROTHANE
WITH GZ REDUCTION GEAR STD
MOUNTING FLANGE FA10 70MM GZ25-8
Direction to close: CW
Output Drive Type:
MACHINED COUPLING - GS200.3
Drawings:
ACTUATOR DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
SD 112800 REV-000
OUTPUT DRIVE/MOUNTING FLANGE DRAWING
SK 099241 REV-001
Operation Manuals:
Worm Gearbox GS50.3 - GS250.3
ba_gs3_50_250_us.pdf
Bevel Gearbox GK 10.1 - 40.2
ba_gk2_en.pdf
Certified By: Pecora, Veronica Certified Date: 01/24/12 Revision: 0

AUMA Data Sheet
AUMA Comm No.: A000120170-DS003
AUMA Actuators, Inc. USA
www.auma-usa.com
02-07-2012 13:51:26 Phone: (724) 743-2862 Fax: (724) 743-4711
Customer: HENRY PRATT COMPANY AURORA Project: WARD COUNTY, ODESSA TX
P.O. No: 794925 OP 1513188 HP Valve/Gate Size & Type: 36" BFV
Customer Item: 9
Part No: ZHP1513188009
Qty: 1 AUMA Lines: 10, 11, 12, 13
Gearbox:
AUMA BEVEL GEARBOX GK14.6-2.8B
IP67 (6FT FOR 30 MIN)
KN CORROSION PROTECTION -STD
2" NUT 30MM BORE WITHOUT HANDWHEEL
HOUSING MATERIAL CAST IRON-STD
AUMA STANDARD SILVER-GRAY COROTHANE
-40F TO +175F STANDARD
SA MOUNTING FLANGE FA14
30MM INPUT SHAFT STAINLESS STEEL-STD
B-DRIVE NUT SEPERATE
VALVE MOUNTING FLANGE FA14
Direction to close: CW
Output Drive Type:
MACHINED 'B' NUT - GK14.6
Gearbox:
AUMA WORM GEARBOX GS160.3/GZ160.3-4 - RR
KN CORROSION PROTECTION -STD
VALVE MOUNT FLANGE FA25-EP/- (GS160)-STD
-40F TO +175F - STANDARD
MOUNTING FLANGE FA14 95MM GZ30-4:1
HOUSING MATERIAL CAST IRON-STD
WITH GZ REDUCTION GEAR STD
AUMA STANDARD SILVER-GRAY COROTHANE
WORM WHEEL DUCTILE IRON
POINTER COVER IP67 STD
Direction to close: CW
Output Drive Type:
MACHINED COUPLING - GS160.3
Drawings:
ACTUATOR DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
SD 112799 REV-000
OUTPUT DRIVE/MOUNTING FLANGE DRAWING
SK 099241 REV-001
Operation Manuals:
Worm Gearbox GS50.3 - GS250.3
ba_gs3_50_250_us.pdf
Bevel Gearbox GK 10.1 - 40.2
ba_gk2_en.pdf
Certified By: Pecora, Veronica Certified Date: 01/24/12 Revision: 0

GS50.3
GS63.3
GS80.3
GS100.3
GS125.3
GS160.3
GS200.3
GS250.3
GS315
GS400
GS500
Notes:
1. All dimensions are in inches.
2. Unless specified tolerance per ISO 2768-m.
3. FA Flange per MSS STANDARD SP-101 unless otherwise noted.
4. FA40 Thread size 1 1/2-6 not per MSS STANDARD SP-101.
5. F Flange per ISO 5211.
STANDARD MOUNTING FLANGE DIMENSIONS
GS50.3 - GS500
SK099241
1

PRATT
Henry Pratt Company
TITLE: OPERATOR MOUNTING POSITION STANDARD
REVISION:
11
DATE:
8/31/11
REVISED BY:
Steve Smick
APPROVAL:
Ed Schutz
EPS # 23
Appendix B
Page 4 of 10

Dimensions
Valve postion indicator for worm gearboxes
WSG 90.1
M20x1,5
M25x1,5
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous data sheets become invalid with the issue of this data sheet.
Issue 1.03
Y003.285/002en

R
Weggebereinheit WSG für Schneckengetriebe
Valve position indicator WSG for worm gearboxes
Anschlusspläne APG
Terminal plans APG
AP 300
mit Heizung (Option) AP 301
with heater (option) AP 301
ZU / CLOSED Com.
Endlage ZU
End position CLOSED
Endlage AUF
End position OPEN
AUF / OPEN Com.
24 V DC max. 80 mA
Versorgung / Supply
0V
Heizung
Heater
AUMA-Lieferumfang
AUMA - supply
E3
E4
AP 310
mit Heizung (Option) AP 311
with heater (option) AP 311
ZU / CLOSED Com.
Endlage ZU
End position CLOSED
Endlage AUF
End position OPEN
AUF / OPEN Com.
24 V DC max. 80 mA
Versorgung / Supply
0V
Heizung
Heater
AUMA-Lieferumfang
AUMA - supply
E3
E4
A 1 Hall-Sensoren für Endlagen Hall sensors for end positions
A 2 Relais-Platine Relay board
K 1 Relais Endlage ZU Relay end position CLOSED Schaltvermögen /
Breaking capacity:
K 2 Relais Endlage AUF Relay end position OPEN
max. 250 V AC / 3 A / cos ϕ = 1
min. 12 V / 10 mA
R 1 Heizung Heater
R 28 Potentiometer Potentiometer
Durch die Weiterentwicklung bedingte Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten. Mit Erscheinen dieses Datenblattes verlieren frühere Ausgaben ihre Gültigkeit.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous data sheets become invalid with the issue of this data sheet.
Ausgabe
Issue 1.03
Seite 1 von 2
Page 1 of 2
Y001.209/001/de-en

Technical data valve position indicator
for gearboxes with swing angle < 180°
WSG 90.1
Features and functions
Version
Clockwise closing, counterclockwise closing
Swing angle Standard: 90° adjustable within a range of ± 8 °;
Set in the factory to 90°, unless ordered otherwise.
Options: 34° – 50° 1) , 50° – 66°, 66° – 82°, 98° – 130°, 130° – 180°; infinitely adjustable
Power supply
24 V DC +/– 15 % smoothed, max. 80 mA
Output signals
Contactless end position switches (Hall sensors) for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
Standard: 2 potential-free signal relays with one common,
for signalling end position OPEN, end position CLOSED
max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 12 V, 10 mA
Option: RWG with max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 5 V, 10 mA
Position feedback, analogue Potentiometer: Conductive layer potentiometer 5 kΩ/0,5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
(options)
Wire wound potentiometer 5 kΩ/1.5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
Position transmitter: Electronic position transmitter RWG
0/4 – 20 mA in 3- or 4-wire version
4 – 20 mA in 2-wire version
Technical data RWG
3- or 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current I a 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Power
U v 24 V DC 14 V DC + (I x R B ),
supply
max. 30 V
Max.
I 24 mA bei 20 mA
20 mA
current input Output current
Max. load R B 600 Ω (Uv - 14 V)/20 mA
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication
Option: Adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 – 20 W
110 – 250 V DC/DC or 24 – 48 V DC/AC
Electrical connection Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector with crimp type connection
Threads for cable glands Standard: 1 x M 20 x 1.5, 1 x M 25 x 1.5
Options: Pg-threads, NPT-threads, G-threads
Terminal plan
APG AP301 (basic version)
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 529 1) Options: IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
Definition IP 68: Duration of submersion in water max. 72 hours. Up to 10
operations during submersion.
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants with
a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with high
humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 25 °C to + 70 °C (in combination with position transmitter RWG)
Mounting to gearbox Standard: AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF with AUMA adapter
Delivery for mounting to foreign gearbox without adapter or retrofit-kit
Option: Subsequent mounting to AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF
including AUMA retrofit-kit
1) Swing angle resolution limited at potentiometer
2) For version in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Issue 1.07
Page 1 of 2
Y000.363/002/en

Technical data valve position indicator
for gearboxes with swing angle < 180°
WSG 90.1
Features and functions
Version
Clockwise closing, counterclockwise closing
Swing angle Standard: 90° adjustable within a range of ± 8 °;
Set in the factory to 90°, unless ordered otherwise.
Options: 34° – 50° 1) , 50° – 66°, 66° – 82°, 98° – 130°, 130° – 180°; infinitely adjustable
Power supply
24 V DC +/– 15 % smoothed, max. 80 mA
Output signals
Contactless end position switches (Hall sensors) for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
Standard: 2 potential-free signal relays with one common,
for signalling end position OPEN, end position CLOSED
max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 12 V, 10 mA
Option: RWG with max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 5 V, 10 mA
Position feedback, analogue Potentiometer: Conductive layer potentiometer 5 kΩ/0,5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
(options)
Wire wound potentiometer 5 kΩ/1.5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
Position transmitter: Electronic position transmitter RWG
0/4 – 20 mA in 3- or 4-wire version
4 – 20 mA in 2-wire version
Technical data RWG
3- or 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current I a 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Power
U v 24 V DC 14 V DC + (I x R B ),
supply
max. 30 V
Max.
I 24 mA bei 20 mA
20 mA
current input Output current
Max. load R B 600 Ω (Uv - 14 V)/20 mA
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication
Option: Adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 – 20 W
110 – 250 V DC/DC or 24 – 48 V DC/AC
Electrical connection Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector with crimp type connection
Threads for cable glands Standard: 1 x M 20 x 1.5, 1 x M 25 x 1.5
Options: Pg-threads, NPT-threads, G-threads
Terminal plan
APG AP301 (basic version)
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 529 1) Options: IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
Definition IP 68: Duration of submersion in water max. 72 hours. Up to 10
operations during submersion.
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants with
a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with high
humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 25 °C to + 70 °C (in combination with position transmitter RWG)
Mounting to gearbox Standard: AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF with AUMA adapter
Delivery for mounting to foreign gearbox without adapter or retrofit-kit
Option: Subsequent mounting to AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF
including AUMA retrofit-kit
1) Swing angle resolution limited at potentiometer
2) For version in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Issue 1.07
Page 1 of 2
Y000.363/002/en

Technical data valve position indicator
for gearboxes with swing angle < 180°
WSG 90.1
Features and functions
Version
Clockwise closing, counterclockwise closing
Swing angle Standard: 90° adjustable within a range of ± 8 °;
Set in the factory to 90°, unless ordered otherwise.
Options: 34° – 50° 1) , 50° – 66°, 66° – 82°, 98° – 130°, 130° – 180°; infinitely adjustable
Power supply
24 V DC +/– 15 % smoothed, max. 80 mA
Output signals
Contactless end position switches (Hall sensors) for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
Standard: 2 potential-free signal relays with one common,
for signalling end position OPEN, end position CLOSED
max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 12 V, 10 mA
Option: RWG with max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 5 V, 10 mA
Position feedback, analogue Potentiometer: Conductive layer potentiometer 5 kΩ/0,5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
(options)
Wire wound potentiometer 5 kΩ/1.5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
Position transmitter: Electronic position transmitter RWG
0/4 – 20 mA in 3- or 4-wire version
4 – 20 mA in 2-wire version
Technical data RWG
3- or 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current I a 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Power
U v 24 V DC 14 V DC + (I x R B ),
supply
max. 30 V
Max.
I 24 mA bei 20 mA
20 mA
current input Output current
Max. load R B 600 Ω (Uv - 14 V)/20 mA
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication
Option: Adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 – 20 W
110 – 250 V DC/DC or 24 – 48 V DC/AC
Electrical connection Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector with crimp type connection
Threads for cable glands Standard: 1 x M 20 x 1.5, 1 x M 25 x 1.5
Options: Pg-threads, NPT-threads, G-threads
Terminal plan
APG AP301 (basic version)
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 529 1) Options: IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
Definition IP 68: Duration of submersion in water max. 72 hours. Up to 10
operations during submersion.
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants with
a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with high
humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 25 °C to + 70 °C (in combination with position transmitter RWG)
Mounting to gearbox Standard: AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF with AUMA adapter
Delivery for mounting to foreign gearbox without adapter or retrofit-kit
Option: Subsequent mounting to AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF
including AUMA retrofit-kit
1) Swing angle resolution limited at potentiometer
2) For version in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Issue 1.07
Page 1 of 2
Y000.363/002/en

Technical data valve position indicator
for gearboxes with swing angle < 180°
WSG 90.1
Features and functions
Version
Clockwise closing, counterclockwise closing
Swing angle Standard: 90° adjustable within a range of ± 8 °;
Set in the factory to 90°, unless ordered otherwise.
Options: 34° – 50° 1) , 50° – 66°, 66° – 82°, 98° – 130°, 130° – 180°; infinitely adjustable
Power supply
24 V DC +/– 15 % smoothed, max. 80 mA
Output signals
Contactless end position switches (Hall sensors) for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
Standard: 2 potential-free signal relays with one common,
for signalling end position OPEN, end position CLOSED
max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 12 V, 10 mA
Option: RWG with max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 5 V, 10 mA
Position feedback, analogue Potentiometer: Conductive layer potentiometer 5 kΩ/0,5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
(options)
Wire wound potentiometer 5 kΩ/1.5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
Position transmitter: Electronic position transmitter RWG
0/4 – 20 mA in 3- or 4-wire version
4 – 20 mA in 2-wire version
Technical data RWG
3- or 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current I a 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Power
U v 24 V DC 14 V DC + (I x R B ),
supply
max. 30 V
Max.
I 24 mA bei 20 mA
20 mA
current input Output current
Max. load R B 600 Ω (Uv - 14 V)/20 mA
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication
Option: Adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 – 20 W
110 – 250 V DC/DC or 24 – 48 V DC/AC
Electrical connection Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector with crimp type connection
Threads for cable glands Standard: 1 x M 20 x 1.5, 1 x M 25 x 1.5
Options: Pg-threads, NPT-threads, G-threads
Terminal plan
APG AP301 (basic version)
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 529 1) Options: IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
Definition IP 68: Duration of submersion in water max. 72 hours. Up to 10
operations during submersion.
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants with
a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with high
humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 25 °C to + 70 °C (in combination with position transmitter RWG)
Mounting to gearbox Standard: AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF with AUMA adapter
Delivery for mounting to foreign gearbox without adapter or retrofit-kit
Option: Subsequent mounting to AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF
including AUMA retrofit-kit
1) Swing angle resolution limited at potentiometer
2) For version in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Issue 1.07
Page 1 of 2
Y000.363/002/en

Technical data valve position indicator
for gearboxes with swing angle < 180°
WSG 90.1
Features and functions
Version
Clockwise closing, counterclockwise closing
Swing angle Standard: 90° adjustable within a range of ± 8 °;
Set in the factory to 90°, unless ordered otherwise.
Options: 34° – 50° 1) , 50° – 66°, 66° – 82°, 98° – 130°, 130° – 180°; infinitely adjustable
Power supply
24 V DC +/– 15 % smoothed, max. 80 mA
Output signals
Contactless end position switches (Hall sensors) for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
Standard: 2 potential-free signal relays with one common,
for signalling end position OPEN, end position CLOSED
max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 12 V, 10 mA
Option: RWG with max. 250 V AC, 3 A (resistive load), min. 5 V, 10 mA
Position feedback, analogue Potentiometer: Conductive layer potentiometer 5 kΩ/0,5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
(options)
Wire wound potentiometer 5 kΩ/1.5 W/Linearity ± 0.5 %
Position transmitter: Electronic position transmitter RWG
0/4 – 20 mA in 3- or 4-wire version
4 – 20 mA in 2-wire version
Technical data RWG
3- or 4-wire system 2-wire system
Output current I a 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA
Power
U v 24 V DC 14 V DC + (I x R B ),
supply
max. 30 V
Max.
I 24 mA bei 20 mA
20 mA
current input Output current
Max. load R B 600 Ω (Uv - 14 V)/20 mA
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication
Option: Adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 – 20 W
110 – 250 V DC/DC or 24 – 48 V DC/AC
Electrical connection Standard: AUMA plug/socket connector with crimp type connection
Threads for cable glands Standard: 1 x M 20 x 1.5, 1 x M 25 x 1.5
Options: Pg-threads, NPT-threads, G-threads
Terminal plan
APG AP301 (basic version)
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 529 1) Options: IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
Definition IP 68: Duration of submersion in water max. 72 hours. Up to 10
operations during submersion.
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants with
a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with high
humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 25 °C to + 70 °C (in combination with position transmitter RWG)
Mounting to gearbox Standard: AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF with AUMA adapter
Delivery for mounting to foreign gearbox without adapter or retrofit-kit
Option: Subsequent mounting to AUMA part-turn gearboxes GS/lever gearboxes GF
including AUMA retrofit-kit
1) Swing angle resolution limited at potentiometer
2) For version in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Issue 1.07
Page 1 of 2
Y000.363/002/en

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

WSG 90.1
Technical data valve position indicator
for gearboxes with swing angle < 180°
Adapter
Other information
EU Directives
Type Bolts Fastening torque T A [Nm]
Strength class
A2-70/A4-70 A2-80/A4-80
Adapter M 4 2
GS/GF 50.3 M 5 5
GS/GF 63.3 – 125.3 M 6 8 10
GS/GF 160.3 M 8 18 24
GS/GF 200.3 M 10 36 48
GS/GF 250.3 M 12 61 82
GS 315 – 500 M 12 61 82
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (89/336/EEC)
Low Voltage Directive: (73/23/EEC)
Machinery Directive: (98/37/EC)
Reference documents Product description Part-turn gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3/GS 315 – GS 500
Product description Lever gearboxes GF 50.3 – GF 250.3
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Page 2 of 2
Issue 1.07
Y000.363/002/en

Anschlusspläne APG
Terminal plans APG
Weggebereinheit für Schneckengetriebe WSG
Valve position indicator for worm gearboxes WSG
AP 320
mit Heizung (Option) AP 321
with heater (option) AP 321
ZU / CLOSED Com.
Endlage ZU
End position CLOSED
Endlage AUF
End position OPEN
AUF / OPEN Com.
24 V DC max. 80 mA
Versorgung / Supply
0V
max. Bürde 600 Ohm
max. Load 600 Ohm
0/4-20 mA
Heizung
Heater
AUMA-Lieferumfang
AUMA - supply
E3
E4
Legende / Legend
A 1 Hall-Sensoren für Endlagen Hall sensors for end positions
A 2 Relais-Platine Relay board
B 2 Elektronischer Stellungsgeber; Electronic position transmitter; 4-wire system
4-Leiter-System
K 1 Relais Endlage ZU Relay end position CLOSED Schaltvermögen /
Breaking capacity:
K 2 Relais Endlage AUF Relay end position OPEN
max. 250 V AC / 3 A / cos ϕ = 1
min. 12 V / 10 mA
R 1 Heizung Heater
R 28 Potentiometer Potentiometer
Steckverbinder mit Crimpanschluß für flexible Aderleitungen, 40 polig; 0,75 - 1,0 mm 2 , auf Wunsch 0,5 mm 2 oder
1,5 mm 2 möglich
Plug socket connector with crimping connection for flexible cables, 40 poles; 0,75 - 1,0 mm 2 , on request 0,5 mm 2 or
1,5 mm 2 possible
Polbild
Marking of terminals
Durch die Weiterentwicklung bedingte Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten. Mit Erscheinen dieses Datenblattes verlieren frühere Ausgaben ihre Gültigkeit.
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous data sheets become invalid with the issue of this data sheet.
Ausgabe
Issue 1.03
Seite 2 von 2
Page 2 of 2
Y001.209/001/de-en

Multi-turn gearboxes
Bevel gearboxes
GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
Scope of these instructions:
These instructions apply to multi-turn gearboxes of type range:
GK 10.2 – GK 40.2.
Table of contents
1. Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Range of application 3
1.2 Maintenance 3
1.3 Warnings and notes 3
2. Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. Transport, storage and packaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 Transport 6
3.2 Storage 6
3.3 Packaging 6
4. Fitting the handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5. Mounting multi-turn actuators SA/SAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6. Mounting to valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7. Operation of valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
8. Enclosure protection IP 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9.1 General references 13
9.2 Change of grease 14
10. Disposal and recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
11. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
12. Spare parts list bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 25.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
13. Spare parts list bevel gearboxes GK 30.2 – GK 40.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
14. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Page
2

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2 are used for the operation of
valves (e.g. gate valves and globe valves).
They are designed for manual operation as well as motor operation in
conjunction with electric actuators.
For other applications, please consult AUMA. The manufacturer is not liable
for any possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated
applications. Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the
designated use.
Explosion-proof products are specially marked. The service conditions
mentioned in these operation instructions and in the technical data sheet
have to be respected during use. Other service conditions require explicit
and written confirmation by the manufacturer.
1.2 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 13) must be observed, otherwise
a safe operation of the bevel gearbox is no longer guaranteed.
1.3 Warnings and notes Failure to observe the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damage. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings
and notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting and installation, as well as
careful commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe
operation.
The following references draw special attention to safety-relevant procedures
in these operation instructions. Each is marked by the appropriate
pictograph.
This pictograph means: Note!
“Note” marks activities or procedures which have major influence on the
correct operation. Non-observance of these notes may lead to consequential
damage.
This pictograph means: Warning!
“Warning” marks activities or procedures which, if not carried out correctly
can affect the safety of persons or material.
3

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
2. Technical data
Features and functions
Type of duty
Short-time duty S2 - 15 min (open-close duty)
Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % (modulating duty)
with the following maximum input speeds:
GK 10.2 – GK 16.2 ≤ 45 rpm for 50 Hz
GK 25.2 – GK 30.2 ≤ 11 rpm for 50 Hz
Direction of rotation Standard: Clockwise rotation at input shaft results in clockwise rotation at output shaft
Option: GK 10.2 – GK 25.2
Reversal of rotational direction using a reversing gearbox GW 14.1
GK 30.2 – GK 40.2
Alternatively, counterclockwise rotation of direction possible
Stages One stage: GK 10.2 – GK 25.2
Double stage: GK 30.2 – GK 40.2
Input shaft GK 10.2 – GK 25.2:
For standard reduction ratios, the input shaft is made of stainless steel.
Standard: Cylindrical with parallel key according to DIN 6885.1
Option 1) : Square: -tapered (DIN 3233)
-cylindrical
Output torques
Type Output torque Reduction ratio Input torque 2) Factor 3)
Nominal
torque
max. Nm
Modulating
torque
max. Nm
GK 10.2 120 60
GK 14.2 250 120
GK 14.6 500 200
GK 16.2 1 000 400
GK 25.2 2 000 800
GK 30.2 4 000 1 600
GK 35.2 8 000 –
GK 40.2 16 000 –
Nominal
torque
Nm
Modulating
torque
Nm
1 : 1 135 66 0.9
2 : 1 67 33 1.8
2 : 1 139 66 1.8
2.8 : 1 100 48 2.5
2.8 : 1 198 80 2.5
4 : 1 139 55 3.6
4 : 1 278 111 3.6
5.6 : 1 198 80 5.0
5.6 : 1 397 160 5.0
8 : 1 278 111 7.2
8 : 1 556 222 7.2
11 : 1 404 162 9.9
11 : 1 808 – 9.9
16 : 1 556 – 14.4
16 : 1 1,111 – 14.4
22 : 1 808 – 19.8
Operation
Motor operation
With electric multi-turn actuator, directly
Flanges for mounting the multi-turn actuator, refer to separate technical data sheets.
Manual operation Standard: Via handwheel, directly
Type GK 10.2 GK 14.2 GK 14.6 GK 16.2 GK 25.2 GK 30.2 GK 35.2 GK 40.2
Handwheel
mm
315/
200
315/
250
Option: Remote lever arrangement (not included within the AUMA product range)
Valve attachment
Output drive types A, B1, B2, B3, B4 according to EN ISO 5210
A, B, D, E according to DIN 3210
C according to DIN 3338
Special output drive types: AF, AK, AG, IB1, IB3, IB4
400/
315
500/
400
630/
500
800 800 800
1) For size, please contact AUMA
2) At max. output torque
3) Conversion factor for output torque to input torque
4

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according
to EN 60 529
Standard: IP 67
Options: IP 68 (also refer to page 12)
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units,
in water or power plants with a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with
high humidity and high pollutant concentration
Finish coating Standard: Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: Grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 40 °C to + 60 °C (low temperature), version L
– 60 °C to + 60 °C (extreme low temperature), version EL
– 0 °C to + 120 °C (high temperature), version H
Lifetime Open-close duty: Operation (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN) with 30 turns per stroke
GK 10.2:
20,000 operations
GK 14.2 – 16.2: 15,000 operations
GK 25.2 – 30.2: 10,000 operations
GK 35.2 – 40.2: 5,000 operations
Modulating duty 4) :
GK 10.2:
5.0 million modulating steps
GK 14.2 – 16.2: 3.5 million modulating steps
GK 25.2 – 30.2: 2.5 million modulating steps
Accessories
Limit switching
Limit switching WSH for manually operated valves. For the signalisation of intermediate and
end positions (refer to separate data sheet).
Reversing gearboxes
Reversing gearbox GW for reversing the rotation direction for manual and motor operation
Special features for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Explosion protection
II2G c IIC T4 in compliance with ATEX 94/9/EC
Type of duty 5)
During open-close duty:
Short-time duty S2 - 15 min. at 50 % of maximum nominal output torque up to GK 14.6
and at 35 % of maximum nominal output torque from GK 16.2
During modulating duty:
Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % at maximum modulating torque
Ambient temperature Standard: – 20 °C to + 40 °C
Options: – 40 °C to + 40 °C (low temperature)
– 20 °C to + 60 °C
– 40 °C to + 60 °C (low temperature)
– 60 °C to + 60 °C (extreme low temperature)
Combinations with actuators SAExC at ambient temperatures > 40 °C with special sizing.
Further information
Reference documents Product description Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Dimension sheet GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Technical data GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Technical data SA/ SAR
Technical data GW
Technical data WSH
4) The lifetime for modulating duty depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the modulating accuracy. To reach
the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operation time, the number of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process
5) The type of duty must not be exceeded.
5

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
3. Transport, storage and packaging
3.1 Transport .
Transport to place of installation in sturdy packing.
If mounted together with actuator:
Attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting by hoist only to the gearbox
and not to the actuator.
3.2 Storage Store in well-ventilated, dry room.
Protect against floor dampness by storage on a shelf or on a
wooden pallet.
.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bare surfaces.
In case gearboxes are to be stored for a long period (more than 6 months),
the following points must be observed additionally:
Prior to storage: Protect bare surfaces, in particular the output drive parts
and mounting surface, with long-term corrosion protection agent.
. Check for corrosion approximately every 6 months. If first signs of corrosion
show, apply new corrosion protection.
3.3 Packaging Our products are protected by special packaging for the transport ex works.
The packaging consists of environmentally friendly materials which can
easily be separated and recycled.
For the disposal of the packaging material, we recommend recycling and
collection centres.
We use the following packaging materials:
Wooden material boards (OSB)/cardboard/paper/PE film
4. Fitting the handwheel For gearboxes designed for manual operation, the handwheel is supplied
separately. Fitting is done on site according to figure 1.
Figure 1: Handwheel
Circlip
Spacer
(partly required)
Spacer
(partly required)
Circlip
Ball handle
(option)
Gearbox input shaft
Handwheel
6

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
5. Mounting multi-turn actuators SA/SAR
When bevel gearboxes and multi-turn actuators are supplied together, the
mounting can be done in the factory up to gearbox size GK 16.2, if desired.
For sizes GK 25.2 and larger, the mounting of gearboxes is performed as
follows.
In case flange for actuator is not attached to gearbox:
Thoroughly degrease the mounting faces of the gearbox and flange for
actuator.
.
Fit flange for actuator and fasten with bolts and lock washers.
Fasten bolts crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2.
Figure 2: Mounting multi-turn actuators onto bevel gearboxes
Bearing flange
Flange for actuator
GK 10.2 –
GK 25.2
GK 30.2 – GK 40.2
Flange for actuator
Bearing flange
Mounting the multi-turn actuator:
Thoroughly degrease the faces of the bearing flange at actuator and of
the input flange at bevel gearbox..
Place the multi-turn actuator on bevel gearbox.
The multi-turn actuator can be positioned on the valve at every 90°.
Ensure that the spigot mates uniformly in the recess and that the
mounting faces are in complete contact.
Fasten actuator with bolts and lock washers (see table 1) at the flange of
the bevel gearbox.
. Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Do not attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting the
actuator by hoist to the handwheel. If multi-turn actuator is
mounted on gearbox, attach ropes or hooks for the purpose
of lifting by hoist to gearbox and not to multi-turn actuator.
7

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
Table 1: Bolts for mounting AUMA multi-turn actuators on bevel gearboxes
Gearbox SA(R) 07.5-F10/ G0 SA(R) 10.1-F10/ G0 SA(R) 14.1-F14/ G½
Bolt Lock washer Pcs. Bolt Lock washer Pcs. Bolt Lock washer Pcs.
GK 10.2 M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GK 14.2 M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GK 14.6 M 10 x 25 B 10 4 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GK 16.2 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GK 25.2 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
Gearbox SA(R) 14.5-F14/ G½ SA(R) 16.1-F16/ G3 SA(R) 25.1-F25/ G4
Bolt Lock washer Pcs. Bolt Lock washer Pcs. Bolt Lock washer Pcs.
GK 16.2 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GK 25.2 M 16 x 40 B 16 4
GK 30.2 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 20 x 50 B 20 4
GK 35.2 M 16 x 40 B 16 4 M 20 x 50 B 20 4
GK 40.2 M 20 x 50 B 20 4 M 16 x 50 B 16 8
8

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
6. Mounting to valve The gearboxes can be operated in any mounting position.
. Prior to mounting, the gearbox must be checked for damage.
Damaged parts must be replaced by original spare
parts.
. After mounting to valve, touch up any possible damage to
paint finish.
. Check if mounting flange fits the gearbox.
Spigot at flanges should be loose fit!
The output drive types B1, B2, B3, or B4 (figure 3) are delivered with bore
and keyway (usually according to ISO 5210).
Figure 3
Output drive type B1/B2
Plug sleeve
Output drive type B3/B4
Bore with keyway
For output drive type A (figure 4), the internal thread of the stem nut must
match the thread of the valve stem. If not ordered explicitly with thread, the
stem nut is unbored or with pilot bore when delivered. For finish machining
of stem nut, refer to next page.
Check whether bore and keyway match the input shaft of valve.
Thoroughly degrease mounting faces of gearbox and valve.
.
Apply a small quantity of grease to input shaft of valve.
Place gearbox on valve and fasten. Fasten bolts (quality min. 8.8, refer to
table 2) evenly crosswise.
Table 2: Fastening torques for bolts
Fastening torque T A [Nm]
Strength class
Thread
8.8 A2-70/A4-70 A2-80/A4-80
M 8 25 18 24
M 10 50 36 48
M 12 87 61 82
M 16 214 150 200
M 20 431 294 392
M 30 1 489 564 –
M 36 2 594 – –
9

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
Finish machining of stem nut (output drive type A):
Figure 4
80.3
80.01/80.02
Output drive type A
Plug sleeve
80.2
The output drive flange does not have to be removed from the gearbox.
Remove spigot ring (80.2, figure 4) from mounting flange.
Take off stem nut (80.3) together with thrust bearing (80.01) and thrust
bearing races (80.02).
Remove thrust bearing and thrust bearing races from stem nut.
Drill and bore stem nut and cut thread.
When fixing in the chuck, make sure stem nut runs true!
Clean the machined stem nut.
Apply Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease to thrust bearing and races,
then place them on stem nut.
Re-insert stem nut with thrust bearings into the mounting flange. Ensure
that dogs are placed correctly in the slots of the hollow shaft.
.
Screw in spigot ring until it is firm against the shoulder.
Press Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease on mineral oil base into the
grease nipple with a grease gun (for quantities, please refer to table):
Table 3: Grease quantities bearings output drive type A
Output
drive
A 07.2 A 10.2 A 14.2 A 16.2 A 25.2 A 30.2 A 35.2 A 40.2
Qty 1) 1.5 g 2 g 3 g 5 g 10 g 14 g 20 g 25 g
1) For grease with density ρ = 0.9 kg/dm³
Protection tube for rising valve stem
Seal thread of protection tube with hemp, Teflon tape, or thread sealing
material.
Screw protection tube (1) into thread (figure 5) and tighten it firmly.
.
Push down the sealing (2) to the housing.
Check whether cap (3) is available and without damage.
Figure 5: Protection tube for rising valve stem
3
1
2
10

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
7. Operation of valves
The max. output torque (refer to technical data, page 4 or name plate) refers
to the peak values and should not be applied over the whole travel.
Clockwise rotation at input shaft results in clockwise rotation at output drive
For motor operation:
.
Observe operation instructions pertaining to multi-turn actuator.
The setting of the torque switching within the multi-turn actuator may not
exceed the max. permissible input torque for both directions (refer to technical
data, page 4, or name plate).
. Set the torque switching within the multi-turn actuator to the following
value to prevent any damage to the valve:
T Torque switch =
T Valve
Factor
Factor = Conversion factor from output torque to input torque.
Refer to values in technical data, page 4.
11

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
8. Enclosure protection IP 68
Definition
Inspection
According to EN 60 529, the conditions for meeting the requirements of
enclosure protection IP 68 are to be agreed between manufacturer and
user.
AUMA gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68 fulfil the following requirements
in compliance with AUMA definitions:
. Head of water max. 6 m.
If submersed in other media, additional measures for corrosion protection
may be necessary; please consult AUMA. Submersion in aggressive media,
e.g. acids or alkaline solutions, is not permitted.
AUMA gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68 undergo a routine testing for
tightness in the factory.
After submersion
.
Check gearbox.
In case of ingress of water, dry actuator correctly and check for proper
function.
Notes
The enclosure protection IP 68 refers to the interior of the gearbox.
If the gearboxes are likely to be repeatedly submersed, a higher corrosion
protection KS or KX is required.
We strongly recommend to select the higher corrosion protection KS or
KX for gearboes for buried service.
Use suitable sealing material between valve flange and gearbox.
Stem protection tubes and telescopic protection tubes should not be used
during submersion, instead use a screw plug made of aluminium.
. When using output drive types A and AF (stem nut), it cannot be
prevented that during submersion water enters the bore of the hollow shaft
along the thread of the valve stem. This leads to corrosion. The water also
enters the thrust bearings of output drive type A, causing corrosion and
damage of the bearings. The output drive types A and AF should therefore
not be used for gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68.
For submersion in water, AUMA recommends to use grease suitable for
use in drinking water.
. For continuous submersion, the seals should be changed at shorter intervals.
12

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
9. Maintenance
9.1 General references After commissioning, check gearbox for damage to paint finish.
Do a thorough touch-up to prevent corrosion.
Original paint in small quantities can be suppled by AUMA.
AUMA gearboxes require only very little maintenance.
To ensure that the gearbox is always ready to operate, we recommend –
provided that on an average not more than 10 operations are performed per
year – the following measures:
. Approximately six months after commissioning and then every year check
bolts between multi-turn actuator, gearbox, and valve for tightness. If
required, tighten applying the torques given in table 2, (page 9).
Perform a test run as well as a visual inspection for grease leakage every
six months.
Carry out a detailed functional test for each gearbox every 5 years.
Record the results for future reference.
For gearboxes permanently exposed to ambient temperatures above
40 °C, maintenance must be performed at shorter intervals.
. For gearboxes with output drive type A: At intervals of approx. six months
from commissioning, press in Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease on
mineral oil base at the grease nipple with grease gun (for quantity, refer to
table 3, page 10).
Seals:
The seals must be changed when changing the grease.
Seal kits may be obtained from AUMA.
Grease:
A grease and seal change is recommended after the following operation
times:
.
if operated seldom, after 10 – 12 years
if operated frequently, after 6 – 8 years
Only original AUMA grease must be used.
.
For the grease type, refer to name plate.
Lubricants should not be mixed.
Table 4: Grease quantities for bevel gearboxes
GK 10.2 14.2 14.6 16.2 25.2 30.2 35.2 40.2
Qty dm³ 0.33 0.66 0.66 1.1 4.1 14.1 20.0 22.2
Weight1) kg 0.3 0.6 0.6 1.0 3.7 12. 18.2 20.2
1) for ρ = approx. 0.9 kg / dm 3
The removed lubricant and the cleaning agent used must be
disposed of according to the relevant regulations.
For safe operation of explosion-proof products, the gear
housing has to be lubricated in compliance with the
manuacturer specifications. In the event of lubricant loss,
repair measures habe to be initiated without delay.
13

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
9.2 Change of grease .
For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator: Remove multi-turn actuator.
Remove gearbox from valve:
During this time, the valve/ pipeline must not be under pressure!
. Mark position of the gearbox on the valve, loosen connecting bolts to the
valve and remove the gearbox.
Remove old grease:
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities see page 13, table 4.
The numbers used in the following text refer to the spare parts list(s) of
these operation instructions.
Remove bolts at bearing flange (002.1).
.
Remove bearing flange with hollow shaft (002.2) from housing.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
and clean gear housing. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning
agent may be used.
Replace seals S1(008, 009, 012, 016 or 007, 008, 010, 013) by new ones.
Clean mounting faces at housing and bearing flange and apply a small
quantity of grease.
. Mount bearing flange (002.1) with hollow shaft (002.2) into housing, whilst
paying attention to the O-ring S1(008 or 009) at bearing flange and O-ring
S1(012 or 013) in the housing.
Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them evenly crosswise to the
appropriate torque according to table 2, page 9.
Fill with new grease f:
Remove screw plug (539.0) at housing.
.
Fill with new grease.
Clean mounting faces at housing and insert screw plug (539.0) with new
sealing S1(014) and fasten them to the appropriate torque according to
table 2, page 9.
After maintenance:
Fasten gearbox to valve again.
.
If applicable, mount multi-turn actuator.
For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator, check the setting of the limit
switching according to the operation instructions for multi-turn actuators; if
required, re-set.
.
Perform test run to ensure proper function.
Check the gearbox for damage to paint finish. Do a thorough touch-up to
prevent corrosion. Original paint in small quantities can be supplied by
AUMA.
14

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
10. Disposal and recycling
AUMA gearboxes have an extremely long lifetime. However, they have to be
replaced at one point in time.
Our gearboxes have a modular design and may therefore easily be disassembled,
separated and sorted according to materials, i.e.:
. various metals
.
plastics
greases and oils
The following generally applies:
Collect greases and oils during disassembly. As a rule, these substances
are hazardous to water and must not be released into the environment.
Arrange for controlled waste disposal of the disassembled material or for
separate recycling according to materials.
. Observe the national regulations for waste disposal.
11. Service AUMA offers extensive services such as maintenance and inspection for
gearboxes. Addresses can be found on page 22 et seqq. and on the Internet
(www.auma.com).
15

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
12. Spare parts list bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 25.2
514.1
514.2
514.1
A
514.0
D
516.0
002.0
B3 / B4 / E
515.0
002.1
002.2
002.3
S1(008)
S1(009)
B1 / C
160.2
160.1
160.3
001.0
S1(012)
S1(016)
S1(009)
539.0
S1(014)
003.1
513.1
511.0
539.0
003.0
S1(007)
512.0
16

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original
AUMA spare parts may be used. Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No.
Designation
001.0 Housing Sub-assembly
002.0 Output drive Sub-assembly
002.1 Bearing flange Sub-assembly
002.2 Hollow shaft
002.3 Ball bearing
003.0 Input shaft Sub-assembly
003.1 Input drive shaft Sub-assembly
160.1 Stem protection tube (without cap)
160.2 Cap for spindle protection tube
160.3 V-seal
511.0 Screw plug Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
513.1 Grub screw
514.0 Output drive A (stem nut without thread) Sub-assembly
514.1 Needle roller thrust bearing Sub-assembly
514.2 Stem nut (without thread)
515.0 Output drive B3/ B4/ E Sub-assembly
516.0 Output drive D Sub-assembly
539.0 Screw plug Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
17

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
13. Spare parts list bevel gearboxes GK 30.2 – GK 40.2
514.1
514.2
514.1
A
514.0
D
516.0
002.0
B3 / B4 / E
515.0
002.1
002.2
002.3
S1(007)
S1(008)
B1 / C
160.2
160.1
160.3
001.0
S1(013)
S1(010)
511.0
S1(025)
513.1
539.0
005.1
001.1
001.2
S1(009)
005.0
S1(006)
018.0
512.0
18

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original
AUMA spare parts may be used. Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No.
Designation
001.0 Housing Sub-assembly
001.1 Ring nut
001.2 Grub screw
002.0 Output drive Sub-assembly
002.1 Bearing flange Sub-assembly
002.2 Hollow shaft
002.3 Ball bearing
005.0 Input shaft Sub-assembly
005.1 Input drive shaft Sub-assembly
018.0 Intermediate stage Sub-assembly
160.1 Stem protection tube (without cap)
160.2 Cap for spindle protection tube
160.3 V-seal
511.0 Screw plug Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
513.1 Grub screw
514.0 Output drive A (stem nut without thread) Sub-assembly
514.1
Needle roller thrust bearing, as from GK 35.2 as individual part, axial cylinder
roller bearing
Sub-assembly
514.2 Stem nut (without thread)
515.0 Output drive B3/ B4/ E Sub-assembly
516.0 Output drive D Sub-assembly
539.0 Screw plug Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
19

Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Operation instructions
14. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation
20

Operation instructions Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Index
B
Bolts for mounting multi-turn
actuator 8
C
Corrosion protection 6
D
Declaration of Conformity 22
Declaration of Incorporation 22
Direction of rotation 4
Disposal and recycling 15
E
Enclosure protection IP 68 12
F
Finish machining of stem nut 10
Fitting the handwheel 6
H
Handwheel 6
L
Lubricant 14
M
Maintenance 3,13
Motor operation 11
Mounting multi-turn actuators 7
Mounting to valve 9
O
Output drive types 4,9
Output torques 4
P
Packaging 6
Protection tube 10
S
Safety instructions 3
Service 15
Spare parts lists
GK 10.2 – GK 25.2 18
GK 30.2 – GK 40.2 20
Storage 6
T
Technical data 4
Transport 6
Type of duty 4
21

AUMA – wordwide
Europe
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
Factory Müllheim
DE-79373 Müllheim
Tel +49 7631 809 - 0
Tax +49 7631 809 - 1250
riester@auma.com
www.auma.com
Factory Ostfildern-Nellingen
DE-73747 Ostfildern
Tel +49 711 34803 - 0
Tax +49 711 34803 - 3034
riester@wof.auma.com
Service Centre Cologne
DE-50858 Köln
Tel +49 2234 2037 - 9000
Tax +49 2234 2037 - 9099
Service@sck.auma.com
Service Centre Magdeburg
DE-39167 Niederndodeleben
Tel +49 39204 759 - 0
Tax +49 39204 759 - 9429
Service@scm.auma.com
Service Centre Bavaria
DE-85386 Eching
Tel +49 81 65 9017- 0
Tax +49 81 65 9017- 2018
Riester@scb.auma.com
AUMA Armaturenantriebe GmbH
AT-2512 Tribuswinkel
Tel +43 2252 82540
Tax +43 2252 8254050
office@auma.at
www.auma.at
AUMA (Schweiz) AG
CH-8965 Berikon
Tel +41 566 400945
Tax +41 566 400948
RettichP.ch@auma.com
AUMA Servopohony spol. s.r.o.
CZ-10200 Praha 10
Tel +420 272 700056
Tax +420 272 704125
auma-s@auma.cz
www.auma.cz
OY AUMATOR AB
FI-02270 Espoo
Tel +35 895 84022
Tax +35 895 8402300
auma@aumator.fi
AUMA France S.A.R.L.
FR-95157 Taverny Cédex
Tel +33 1 39327272
Tax +33 1 39321755
stephanie.vatin@auma.fr
www.auma.fr
AUMA ACTUATORS Ltd.
GB- Clevedon North Somerset BS21 6QH
Tel +44 1275 871141
Tax +44 1275 875492
mail@auma.co.uk
www.auma.co.uk
AUMA ITALIANA S.r.l. a socio unico
IT-20023 Cerro Maggiore (MI)
Tel +39 0331 51351
Tax +39 0331 517606
info@auma.it
www.auma.it
AUMA BENELUX B.V.
NL-2314 XT Leiden
Tel +31 71 581 40 40
Tax +31 71 581 40 49
office@benelux.auma.com
www.auma.nl
AUMA Polska Sp. z o.o.
PL-41-310 Dabrowa Górnicza
Tel +48 32 26156 68
Tax +48 32 26148 23
R.Ludzien@auma.com.pl
www.auma.com.pl
OOO Priwody AUMA
RU-141400 Moscow region for mail:
124365 Moscow a/ya 11
Tel +7 495 221 64 28
Tax +7 495 221 64 38
aumarussia@auma.ru
www.auma.ru
ERICHS ARMATUR AB
SE-20039 Malmö
Tel +46 40 311550
Tax +46 40 945515
info@erichsarmatur.se
www.erichsarmatur.se
GRØNBECH & SØNNER A/S
DK-2450 København SV
Tel +45 33 26 63 00
Tax +45 33 26 63 21
GS@g-s.dk
www.g-s.dk
IBEROPLAN S.A.
ES-28027 Madrid
Tel +34 91 3717130
Tax +34 91 7427126
iberoplan@iberoplan.com
D. G. Bellos & Co. O.E.
GR-13671 Acharnai Athens
Tel +30 210 2409485
Tax +30 210 2409486
info@dgbellos.gr
SIGURD SØRUM A. S.
NO-1301 Sandvika
Tel +47 67572600
Tax +47 67572610
post@sigurd-sorum.no
INDUSTRA
PT-2710-297 Sintra
Tel +351 2 1910 95 00
Tax +351 2 1910 95 99
jpalhares@tyco-valves.com
MEGA Endüstri Kontrol Sistemieri Tic. Ltd.
Sti.
TR-06810 Ankara
Tel +90 312 242 18 88 pbx
Tax +90 312 242 18 00
megaendustri@megaendustri.com.tr
CTS Control Limited Liability Company
UA-02099 Kiyiv
Tel +38 044 566-9971, -8427
Tax +38 044 566-9384
v_polyakov@cts.com.ua
Africa
AUMA South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
ZA-1560 Springs
Tel +27 11 3632880
Tax +27 11 8185248
aumasa@mweb.co.za
A.T.E.C.
EG- Cairo
Tel +20 2 3599680 - 3590861
Tax +20 2 3586621
atec@intouch.com
America
AUMA ACTUATORS INC.
US-PA 15317 Canonsburg
Tel +1 724-743-AUMA (2862)
Tax +1 724-743-4711
mailbox@auma-usa.com
www.auma-usa.com
AUMA Chile Respresentative Office
CL- Buin
Tel +56 2 821 4108
Tax +56 2 281 9252
aumachile@adsl.tie.cl
LOOP S. A.
AR-C1140ABP Buenos Aires
Tel +54 11 4307 2141
Tax +54 11 4307 8612
contacto@loopsa.com.ar
Asvotec Termoindustrial Ltda.
BR-13190-000 Monte Mor/ SP.
Tel +55 19 3879 8735
Tax +55 19 3879 8738
atuador.auma@asvotec.com.br
TROY-ONTOR Inc.
CA-L4N 5E9 Barrie Ontario
Tel +1 705 721-8246
Tax +1 705 721-5851
troy-ontor@troy-ontor.ca
MAN Ferrostaal de Colombia Ltda.
CO- Bogotá D.C.
Tel +57 1 401 1300
Tax +57 1 416 5489
dorian.hernandez@manferrostaal.com
www.manferrostaal.com
PROCONTIC Procesos y Control Automático
EC- Quito
Tel +593 2 292 0431
Tax +593 2 292 2343
info@procontic.com.ec
IESS DE MEXICO S. A. de C. V.
MX-C.P. 02900 Mexico D.F.
Tel +52 55 55 561 701
Tax +52 55 53 563 337
informes@iess.com.mx
Corsusa S.A.C.
PE- Miralflores - Lima
Tel +511444-1200 / 0044 / 2321
Tax +511444-3664
corsusa@corsusa.com
www.corsusa.com
PASSCO Inc.
PR-00936-4153 San Juan
Tel +18 09 78 77 20 87 85
Tax +18 09 78 77 31 72 77
Passco@prtc.net
Suplibarca
VE- Maracaibo Estado, Zulia
Tel +58 261 7 555 667
Tax +58 261 7 532 259
suplibarca@intercable.net.ve
Asia
AUMA Actuators (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.
CN-300457 Tianjin
Tel +86 22 6625 1310
Tax +86 22 6625 1320
mailbox@auma-china.com
www.auma-china.com
AUMA (INDIA) PRIVATE LIMITED
IN-560 058 Bangalore
Tel +91 80 2839 4655
Tax +91 80 2839 2809
info@auma.co.in
www.auma.co.in
AUMA JAPAN Co., Ltd.
JP-210-0848 Kawasaki-ku, Kawasaki-shi
Kanagawa
Tel +81 44 329 1061
Tax +81 44 366 2472
mailbox@auma.co.jp
22

AUMA ACTUATORS (Singapore) Pte Ltd.
SG-569551 Singapore
Tel +65 6 4818750
Tax +65 6 4818269
sales@auma.com.sg
www.auma.com.sg
Al Ayman Industrial. Eqpts
AE- Dubai
Tel +971 4 3682720
Tax +971 4 3682721
auma@emirates.net.ae
PERFECT CONTROLS Ltd.
HK- Tsuen Wan, Kowloon
Tel +852 2493 7726
Tax +852 2416 3763
joeip@perfectcontrols.com.hk
DW Controls Co., Ltd.
KR-153-803 Seoul Korea
Tel +82 2 2113 1100
Tax +82 2 2113 1088/1089
sichoi@actuatorbank.com
www.actuatorbank.com
AL-ARFAJ Eng. Company W. L. L.
KW-22004 Salmiyah
Tel +965 4817448
Tax +965 4817442
arfaj@qualitynet.net
Petrogulf W.L.L
QA- Doha
Tel +974 4350 151
Tax +974 4350 140
pgulf@qatar.net.qa
Sunny Valves and Intertrade Corp. Ltd.
TH-10120 Yannawa Bangkok
Tel +66 2 2400656
Tax +66 2 2401095
sunnyvalves@inet.co.th
www.sunnyvalves.co.th/
Top Advance Enterprises Ltd.
TW- Jhonghe City Taipei Hsien (235)
Tel +886 2 2225 1718
Tax +886 2 8228 1975
support@auma-taiwan.com.tw
www.auma-taiwan.com.tw
Australia
BARRON GJM Pty. Ltd.
AU-NSW 1570 Artarmon
Tel +61 294361088
Tax +61 294393413
info@barron.com.au
www.barron.com.au
2006-12-08
23

AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
P.O.Box 1362
D-79373 Müllheim
Tel +49 7631 809 - 0
Fax+49 7631 809 - 1250
riester@auma.com
www.auma.com
Certificate Registration No.
12 100/104 4269
For detailed information on AUMA products refer to the Internet: www.auma.com
Y000.328/003/en/1.07

Part-turn gearboxes
Worm gearboxes
GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
for flange types FA
Operation instructions

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
Scope of these instructions:
These operation instructions are valid for worm gearboxes of the type range
GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 with primary reduction gearings VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3. and GS
160.3 – GS 250.3 with primary reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3.
Table of contents
Page
1. Safety instructions 3
1.1 Range of application 3
1.2 Maintenance 3
1.3 Warnings and notes 3
2. Technical data 4
3. Transport, storage and packaging 7
3.1 Transport 7
3.2 Storage 7
3.3 Packaging 7
4. Fitting the handwheel 7
5. Mounting positions of the different versions 8
6. Mounting multi-turn actuators SA/SAR 9
7. Mounting to valve 11
8. Setting the end stops for manual operation 12
8.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves 12
8.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves 13
9. Setting the end stops with mounted multi-turn electric actuator 13
9.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves 13
9.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves 14
10. Changing the swing angle 16
10.1 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 (option) 16
10.2 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 17
11. Enclosure protection IP 68 18
12. Maintenance 19
12.1 General notes 19
12.2 Grease change for worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and primary reduction gearing
VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3 20
12.2.1 Worm gearboxes 20
12.2.2 Primary reduction gearing 20
12.3 Grease change for worm gearboxes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 and primary reduction gearing
GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 21
12.3.1 Worm gearboxes 21
12.3.2 Single-stage reductions gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1 and 8:1) 21
12.3.3 Double-stage primary reduction gearing GZ 200.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratio 16:1) 22
12.4 After maintenance 22
13. Disposal and recycling 23
14. Service 23
15. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and reduction gearing
VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3 24
16. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 26
17. Spare parts list reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1, 8:1 and 16:1) 28
Index 31
Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives 32
2

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3 are used for the operation of valves
(e.g. butterfly valves and ball valves).
They are designed for manual operation as well as motor operation in conjunction
with electric actuators.
For other applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for any
possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated applications.
Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the gearboxes’
designated use.
1.2 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 19) must be observed, otherwise a
safe operation of the worm gearbox is no longer guaranteed.
1.3 Warnings and notes Non-observance of the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damage. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and
notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting and installation, as well as careful
commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe operation.
The following references draw special attention to safety-relevant procedures in
these operation instructions. Each is marked by the appropriate pictograph.
This pictograph means: Note!
“Note” marks activities or procedures which have major influence on the correct
operation. Non-observance of these notes may lead to consequential damage.
This pictograph means: Warning!
“Warning” marks activities or procedures which, if not carried out correctly, can
affect the safety of persons or material.
3

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
2. Technical data
Features and functions
Version
Housing material
Self-locking
Output torques
End stops
Strength of end stop
Standard: clockwise rotation RR, counterclockwise rotation LL, option: RL or LR
Standard: cast iron (GJL-250), Option: spheroidal cast iron (GJS-400-15)
The gearboxes are self-locking when at stand-still under normal service conditions; strong
vibrations may cancel the self-locking effect. While in motion, safe breaking is not guaranteed. If
this is required, a separate brake must be used.
Type
Output torques
100 % 140 % 175 % 1) 200 % 1) Modulating torque 2)
max. ft lbs. max. ft lbs. max. ft lbs. max. ft lbs. max. ft lbs.
GS 50.3 184 258 – 369 92
GS 63.3 369 516 – 738 184
GS 80.3 738 1,033 – 1,475 369
GS 100.3 1,475 2,065 – 2,950 738
GS 125.3 2,950 4,130 – 5,900 1,475
GS 160.3 5,900 8,298 10,326 – 2,950
GS 200.3 11,801 16,595 20,652 – 5,900
GS 250.3 23,602 32,822 41,303 – 16,000
Positive for both end positions by traveling nut, sensitive adjustment
Guaranteed strength of end stop (in ft lbs.) for input side operation
Type GS 50.3 GS 63.3 GS 80.3 GS 100.3 GS 125.3
Reduction gearing – – – VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
ft lbs. 185 330 330 370 185 370 185
Swing angle
GS 50.3 – GS 125.3
Swing angle
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Standard: Fixed swing angle up to max. 100°; set in the factory to 92° unless ordered otherwise.
Options: Adjustable in steps of:
10°– 35°, 35° – 60°, 60° – 80°, 80° – 100°, 100° – 125°, 125° – 150°,
150° – 170°, 170° – 190°
For version with worm wheel made of bronze: swing angle > 190°,
Multi-turn version without end stops, version GSD 3)
Standard: Adjustable 80° – 100°; set in the factory to 92° unless ordered otherwise.
Options: Adjustable in steps of: 20° – 40°, 40° – 60°, 60° – 80°,
For version with worm wheel made of bronze: swing angle > 100°,
‘ Multi-turn version without end stops, version GSD 3)
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Pointer cover for continuous position indication
Options: Sealed pointer cover for horizontal outdoor installation 4)
Protection cover for buried service instead of pointer cover
Input shaft Cylindrical with parallel key according to DIN 6885.1
Operation
Motor operation
Type of duty
Manual operation 5)
Type GS 160.3 GS 200.3 GS 250.3
Reduction gearing GZ 160.3 GZ 200.3 GZ 250.3
Reduction ratio 4:1 8:1 4:1 8:1 16:1 4:1 8:1 16:1
ft lbs. 370 330 370 370
With electric multi-turn actuator, directly or through primary reduction gearing VZ/GZ
Flanges for mounting of actuator, refer also to separate technical data sheets.
According to actuator
Via handwheel, directly or through primary reduction gearing VZ/GZ
Available handwheel diameters, selection according to the max. output torque:
Type GS 50.3 GS 63.3 GS 80.3 GS 100.3 GS 125.3
Reduction gearing – – – – VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 – VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
Handwheel Ø
mm
160
200
250
250
315
25.4 mm correspond to 1 inch
1) With worm wheel made of spheroidal cast iron
2) Requires worm wheel made of bronze
3) Special sizing is required
4) For gas applications with sealed pointer cover, an air vent in the pointer cover or venting grooves in the valve mounting flange must be provided
5) Handwheel sizes shown reflect general industrial selection criteria. For information on gearbox/handwheel selection in accordance with AWWA Standard C504, please
refer to separate selection list/chart.
315
400
400
500
Type GS 160.3 GS 200.3 GS 250.3
Reduction gearing – GZ 160.3 – GZ 200.3 – GZ 250.3
Handwheel Ø
mm
630
800
400 315 – 500
630
400 315 – 800 500
630
400
315
400
315
400
250
315
500
630
800
400
500
400
500
315
400
4

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Primary reduction gearing
Primary reduction gearing Planetary gear with various reduction ratios for reducing the input torques
Valve attachment
Valve attachment Dimensions according to SP 101
Standard: GS 50.3 – GS 125.3:
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3:
without spigot
without spigot
Options: GS 50.3 – GS 125.3:
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3:
with spigot
with spigot
Splined coupling for connection
to the valve shaft
Standard: without bore or pilot bore from GS 160.3
Worm gearbox can be repositioned 4 x 90° on coupling
Options: Machined with bore and keyway, square bore or bore with two-flats
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 68-3, dust and water tight up to max. 3 m head of water
to EN 60 529 6) Options 7) : IP 68-6, dust and water tight up to max. 6 m head of water
IP 68-10, dust and water tight up to max. 10 m head of water
IP 68-20, dust and water tight up to max. 20 m head of water
Corrosion protection Standard: KN Suitable for installation in industrial units, in water or power plants
with a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS Suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX Suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere
with high humidity and high pollutant concentration
Paint Standard: GS 50.3 – GS 125.3:
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3:
Two-component iron-mica combination
Two-component iron-mica combination
Color Standard: Grey (DB 702, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colors on request
Ambient temperature Standard: – 20 °F to + 175 °F/ – 25 °C to + 80 °C
Options: – 40 °F to + 140 °F/ – 40 °C to + 60 °C (low temperature), version L
– 75 °F to + 140 °F/ – 60 °C to + 60 °C (extreme low temperature), version EL
+ 32 °F to + 250 °F/ – 0 °C to + 120 °C (high temperature), version H
Lifetime
Open-close duty: The lifetime is based on a load profile typical for part-turn valves
Type
Operating cycles (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN)
for swivel movements of 90° (max. 100°)
and a maximum output torque of
100 % 140 % 175 % 8) 200 % 9)
GS 50.3 15,000 5,000 – 1,000
GS 63.3 15,000 5,000 – 1,000
GS 80.3 15,000 5,000 – 1,000
GS 100.3 15,000 5,000 – 1,000
GS 125.3 15,000 5,000 – 1,000
GS 160.3 15,000 5,000 1,000 –
GS 200.3 15,000 5,000 1,000 –
GS 250.3 10,000 3000 750 –
Modulating duty: min. 2.5 million operations 8)
6) Refer to section enclosure protection IP 68
7) Not available for GS 50.3
8) With worm wheel made of spheroidal cast iron
9) The lifetime for modulating duty depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the modulating accuracy. To reach the
longest possible maintenance and fault-free operation time, the number of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process
5

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
Accessories
Valve position indicators
Limit switching
Valve position indicator WSG for the signalization of intermediate and end positions for precise
and low-backlash feedback for swing angles ranging from 82° – 98°
(refer to separate data sheet)
Valve position indicator WGD for signalization of intermediate and end positions for swing
angles > 180° (refer to separate data sheet)
Limit switching WSH for manually operated valves. For the signalization of intermediate and
end positions (refer to separate data sheet)
Further information
Reference documents Product description Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3 /GS 315 – GS 500
Dimension sheets GS 50.3 – GS 125.3, GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Technical data GS 50.3 – GS 125.3, GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Technical data SA, SAR, WSG, WGD, WSH
Lever gearboxes
See separate documents
6

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
3. Transport, storage and packaging
. If mounted together with actuator:
Attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting by hoist only to the gearbox and
not to the actuator.
. If eyebolts are supplied with the gearbox, they should be used to lift the gearbox
only and not the valve
3.1 Transport . Transport to place of installation in sturdy packing.
3.2 Storage Store in well-ventilated, dry room.
Protect against floor dampness by storage on a shelf or on a
wooden pallet.
.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bare surfaces.
In case worm gearboxes are to be stored for a long period
(more than 6 months), the following points must be observed additionally:
Prior to storage: Protect bare surfaces, in particular the output drive parts and
mounting surface, with long-term corrosion protection agent.
. Check for corrosion approximately every 6 months. If first signs of corrosion
show, apply new corrosion protection.
3.3 Packaging Our products are protected by special packaging for the transport ex works. The
packaging consists of environmentally friendly materials which can easily be
separated and recycled.
For the disposal of the packaging material, we recommend recycling and collection
centers.
4. Fitting the handwheel For worm gearboxes designed for manual operation the handwheel may be
supplied separately. Fitting is done on site according to figure A.
Figure A: Handwheel
Circlip
Spacer
(may be required)
Spacer
(may be required)
Circlip
Ball handle
(option)
Worm shaft
gearbox
Handwheel
7

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
5. Mounting positions of the different versions
RR LL RL LR
Description of the 4 versions (viewed at the pointer cover):
Code Direction of rotation at input shaft Position of worm shaft Direction of rotation at output drive
RR clockwise Right side clockwise
LL clockwise Left side counterclockwise
RL clockwise Right side counterclockwise
LR clockwise Left side clockwise
Mounting positions of AUMA multi-turn actuator with AUMA worm gearbox (please indicate when ordering)
GS versions RR / RL
RR
RR
RR
RR
RL
RL
RL
RL
A
B
C
D
GS versions LL / LR
LL
LL
LL
LL
LR
LR
LR
LR
A
B
Mounting positions can easily be changed at a later date.
C
D
Limitation: For SA/SAR 14.1/14.5 with GS 125.3, mounting position “C” in version RR/RL and “A” in version LL/LR is
only possible for a handwheel diameter up to 12.4 ”.
Up to size GS 125.3, the actuator-gearbox combination is delivered in the ordered mounting position. For packing
reasons, actuator and gearbox is delivered separately from size GS 160.3.
8

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
6. Mounting multi-turn actuators SA/SAR
When gearboxes and multi-turn actuators are supplied together, the mounting has
been done in the factory up to gearbox size GS 125.3. For sizes GS 160.3 and
larger, the mounting of gearboxes is performed as follows.
In case flange for actuator is not attached to gearbox or
reduction gearing:
Thoroughly degrease the mounting faces of the gearbox or reduction gearing as
well as the flange for actuator.
For GS 100.3 – GS 250.3:
Insert pin in the corresponding groove of the bearing cover.
.
Fit flange for actuator and fasten with bolts and lock washers.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Figure B: Mounting multi-turn actuator to worm gearbox
Flange for actuator
Bearing flange
Flange for actuator
Primary
reduction
gearing
Bearing flange
Mounting the multi-turn actuator:
Thoroughly degrease the faces of the flange for actuator at the gearbox or
reduction gearing as well as the actuator’s bearing flange.
. Place the multi-turn actuator on the worm gearbox or reduction gearing. The
multi-turn actuator can be mounted on the valve at every 90°
(see page 8, mounting positions).
Ensure that the spigot mates uniformly in the recess and that the mounting faces
are in complete contact.
Fasten actuator with bolts and lock washers (see table 1) at the flange of the
worm gearbox.
. Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Do not attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting the actuator
by hoist to the handwheel. If multi-turn actuator is mounted on
gearbox, attach ropes or hooks for the purpose of lifting by hoist
to gearbox and not to multi-turn actuator.
9

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
Table 1:
Bolts for mounting AUMA actuators to worm gearboxes/ primary reduction gearing
(strength class min. 8.8)
Worm gearbox/
primary
reduction gearing
SA(R) 07.1-FA10
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
Qty.
GS 50.3 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
SA(R) 07.5-FA10
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
Qty.
GS 63.3 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
GS 80.3 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
GS 100.3
GS 100.3/VZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
GS 125.3
GS 125.3/VZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
GS 160.3
GS 160.3/GZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
GS 200.3
GS 200.3/GZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
Worm gearbox/
primary
reduction gearing
SA(R) 10.1-FA10 SA(R) 14.1-FA14 SA(R) 14.5-FA14 SA(R) 16.1-FA16
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
Qty.
GS 63.3 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
GS 80.3 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
GS 100.3 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
GS 100.3/VZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4
Qty.
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
GS 125.3 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
GS 125.3/VZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
Qty.
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
GS 160.3 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
3 4 -10x2 3/4 4
GS 160.3/GZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
GS 200.3
3 4 -10x2 3/4 4
GS 200.3/GZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
GS 250.3
GS 250.3/GZ 3/8-16x1 3/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4 5/8-11x1 1 2 5/8 4
3 4 -10x2 3/4 4
Qty.
Worm gearbox/
primary
reduction gearing
GS 160.3
GS 160.3/GZ
SA(R) 25.1-FA25
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
Qty.
GS 200.3 5/8-11x2 5/8 8
GS 200.3/GZ
SA(R) 30.1-FA30
Bolt
(UNC)
Lock
washer
GS 250.3 5/8-11x2 5/8 8
3 4 -10x2 3/4 8
GS 250.3/GZ
Qty.
10

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
7. Mounting to valve AUMA worm gearboxes GS and primary reduction gearings VZ/GZ can be
operated in any mounting position.
. For butterfly valves, the recommended mounting position is end position
CLOSED
(Prior to mounting, bring the gearbox to the mechanical end stop CLOSED by
turning the handwheel clockwise).
. For ball valves, the recommended mounting position is end position OPEN
(Prior to mounting, bring the gearbox to the mechanical end stop OPEN by
turning the handwheel counterclockwise).
Alternatively, the limit stop housing can be turned up to the end position of the
respective valve.
Thoroughly degrease mounting faces of gearbox and valve.
Place coupling sleeve onto valve shaft and secure (refer to figure C, detail A or B),
ensure that dimensions X, Y, and Z are observed (refer to table 2).
Apply non-acidic grease at splines of coupling.
Mount gearbox on valve. Ensure that the spigot (if provided) mates uniformly in the
recess and that the mounting faces are in complete contact.
.
Fasten gearbox with bolts (quality min. 8.8) and lock washers.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Figure C
Coupling
A
B
Grub screw
Z
X
Y
Valve
Table 2: Standard dry fastening torques for bolts
Gearbox Dimensions Bolts Strength class
Grade 5
Flange type
X
max
Y max Z max Qty. x threads
(UNC)
Fastening torque T A
[Ft lbs.]
GS 50.3-FA10 14 5 61 4 x 3 8 - 16 33
GS 63.3-FA10 7 18 73 4 x 3 8 - 16 33
GS 63.3-FA12 10 13 76 4 x 1 2 - 13 78
GS 80.3-FA14 23 5 88 4 x 5 8 - 11 155
GS 100.3-FA14 22 13 123 4 x 5 8 - 11 155
GS 100.3-FA16 22 8 123 4 x 3 4 - 10 257
GS 125.3-FA16 17 35 126 4 x 3 4 - 10 257
GS 125.3-FA25 17 27 126 8 x 5 8 - 11 155
GS 160.3-FA25 15 11 130 8 x 5 8 - 11 155
GS 160.3-FA30 30 0 140 8 x 3 4 - 10 255
GS 200.3-FA30 19 19 160 8 x 3 4 - 10 255
GS 200.3-FA35 44 0 190 8 x 1 - 8 590
GS 250.3-FA35 8 8 220 8 x 1 - 8 590
GS 250.3-FA40 13 0 230 8 x 1 1 4 - 7 1,200
Note:
Experience showed that it is very difficult to fasten bolts or nuts of 1-8 UNC or
larger with the defined torques. The worm gearbox may be moved radially against
the valve flange by accident.
To improve adhesion between valve and gearbox, we recommend to apply
Loctite 243 (or similar products) on mounting faces.
11

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
8. Setting the end stops for manual operation
If worm gearboxes GS are supplied on a valve the end stops are
already set by the valve manufacturer.
8.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves
Setting end position CLOSED. Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (figures D, E).
Turn valve manually to end position CLOSED.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it clockwise up to the
stop.
If the holes of limit stop housing (10) do not align with the threads of the housing
(1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace it in the required position.
.
Fasten bolts (03) with lock washers (04).
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 3.
Table 3
Gearbox
End stops fastened
with
bolts (03)
Material
Protective cap
fastened with
bolts (054)
Material
Fastening torque
T A [Nm]
GS 50.3 M 8 A2-80 24
GS 63.3 M 8 A2-80 24
GS 80.3 M 8 A2-80 24
GS 100.3 M 12 A2-80 82
GS 125.3 M 12 A2-80 82
GS 160.3 M 10 A2-80 M 6 A2-80 48
GS 200.3 M 12 A2-80 M 6 A2-80 82
GS 250.3 M 16 A2-80 M 6 A2-80 200
Conversion factor: 1 Nm corresponds to 0.74 ft lbs.
Figure D: End stop up to GS 125.3
Figure E: End stop from GS 160.3
03/04
03/04
10 1
10 1
. If the position of the pointer cover does not correspond to the symbol CLOSED,
slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer cover to the
CLOSED symbol and fasten the screws again.
Setting end position OPEN
The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set in the
factory.
If the swing angle does not match, refer to section 10.
12

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
8.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves
In case end stops require adjustment, set end position OPEN first.
If the exact end position of the valve cannot be seen through a
position marking at the valve shaft, the setting may have to be
done with the valve removed.
Setting end position OPEN
Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (10) (figures D, E).
Turn valve manually to end position OPEN.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it counterclockwise up to
the stop.
If the holes of limit stop housing (10) do not align with the threads of the housing
(1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace it in the required position.
.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 3.
If the position of the pointer cover does not correspond to the symbol OPEN,
slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer cover to the
OPEN symbol and fasten the screws again.
Setting end position The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set in the
CLOSED
factory.
If the swing angle does not match, refer to section 10.
9. Setting the end stops with mounted multi-turn electric actuator
. If worm gearboxes GS and multi-turn actuators are supplied on a
valve, the end stops as well as limit and torque switching should
already have been set by the valve manufacturer.
. If the limit and torque switching have not yet been set, they have
to be set according to the operation instructions SA/SAR and the
specifications of the valve manufacturer.
. The valve manufacturer states whether the valve should be limit
or torque seated.
9.1 Worm gearboxes on butterfly valves
. Determine the overrun of the multi-turn actuator for both directions, i. e. how much
does the valve move after the motor has been switched off?
Setting end position CLOSED. Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (figures D, E).
Change actuator to manual drive and move the valve manually to end position
CLOSED.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it clockwise up to the
stop.
. Turn limit stop housing (10) back counterclockwise by ½ turn. This ensures that
the mechanical end stop is not reached in electric operation and thus the valve
can close tightly, provided that torque seating has been specified.
. If the fixing holes of limit stop housing (10) do not align with the threads of the
housing (1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace it in required
position.
Fasten bolts (03) with lock washers (04).
.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 3.
If the position of the pointer cover does not correspond to the symbol CLOSED,
slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer cover to the
CLOSED symbol and fasten the screws again.
13

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
Limit seating in end position CLOSED
Turn back the valve from the end position by an amount equal to the overrun.
.
Set limit switching according to the operation instructions SA/SAR.
Check torque switching for end position CLOSED according to the operation
instructions SA/SAR, and, if necessary, set to the required value.
Setting end position OPEN
Torque seating in end position CLOSED
Turn handwheel counterclockwise by approx. 4 – 6 turns.
Set limit switching for the end position CLOSED according to the operation
instructions SA/SAR (for actuator indication).
. Check torque switching for end position CLOSED or set to the required value.
The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set in the
factory.
. Move gearbox to the end stop in position OPEN.
The last part of the travel has to be made manually.
. To turn the valve back manually from the end position by an amount equal to the
overrun, proceed as follows:
For actuators mounted directly:
by approx. 4 to 6 turns at the handwheel.
With mounted primary reduction gearing VZ/GZ:
by approx. 10 to 15 turns at the handwheel, according to the reduction ratio of
the primary reduction gearing.
. Set limit switching in actuator for the end position OPEN according to the
operation instructions SA/SAR.
If the swing angle does not match, refer to section 10.
Figure F: End stop up to GS 125.3
Figure G: End stop from GS 160.3
03/04
03/04
10 1
10 1
9.2 Worm gearboxes on ball valves
In case end stops require adjustment, set end position OPEN first.
If the exact end position of the valve cannot be seen through a
position marking at the valve shaft, the setting may have to be
done with the valve removed.
. Determine overrun of the actuator for both directions, i. e. how much does the valve
move after the motor has been switched off?
14

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Setting end position OPEN
Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (10) (figures F, G).
Change to manual drive and move the valve manually to end position OPEN.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it counterclockwise up to
the stop.
Turn limit stop housing (10) back by ½ turn clockwise. This ensures that the
mechanical end stop is not reached in electric operation.
. If the holes of limit stop housing (10) do not correspond to the threads of the
housing (1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace it in the required
position.
Fasten bolts (03) with lock washers (04).
.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 3.
If the position of the pointer cover does not align with the symbol OPEN, slightly
loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer cover to the OPEN
symbol and fasten the screws again.
. Turn back the valve from the end position by an amount equal to the overrun.
Switching off in end position
OPEN
Setting end position
CLOSED
. Set limit switching according to the operation instructions SA/SAR.
The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set in the
factory.
. Move gearbox to the end stop in position CLOSED.
The last part of the travel has to be made manually.
. To turn the valve back manually from the end position by an amount equal to the
overrun, proceed as follows:
For actuators mounted directly:
by approx. 4 to 6 turns at the handwheel.
With mounted primary reduction gearing VZ/GZ:
by approx. 10 to 15 turns at the handwheel, according to the reduction ratio of
the primary reduction gearing.
. Set limit switching in actuator for the end position CLOSED according to the
operation instructions SA/SAR.
If the swing angle does not match, refer to section 10.
15

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
10. Changing the swing
angle
The adjustment is made in end position OPEN.
Optional for size GS 50.3 – GS 125.3
Standard for size GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Accuracy:
GS 50.3 – GS 125.3: 0.6°
GS 160.3 – GS 250.3: 0.11° to 0.14°
10.1 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 (option)
.
Unscrew protective cap (16) at limit stop housing (10) (figure H).
Remove roll pin (020) with appropriate tool (available from AUMA).
Increasing the swing angle
. Turn end stop nut (15) back counterclockwise.
When turning back the end stop nut (015), make sure the roll pin
(020) can still be tapped in within the oblong hole.
.
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
Reducing the swing angle
.
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
The end stop nut (15) must entirely cover the roll pin (020).
Figure H: End stop up to GS 125.3
Figure J: End stop from GS 160.3
082/083
058
03/04
16 020 15 08 10 7
. Tap in roll pin (020) with tool. If slot in end stop nut (15) does not align with the
hole in the worm shaft, turn end stop nut (15) slightly counterclockwise until it is
in alignment, then tap in roll pin.
16
34 15
054
055
056
10 7
Check O-ring (08) and replace, if damaged.
.
Replace protective cap (16).
If gearbox is mounted to a multi-turn actuator, set limit switching again for the
end position OPEN according to the operation instructions SA/SAR. Allow for
overrun.
16

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
10.2 Changing the swing angle for sizes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
Remove all bolts (054) and pull off protective cap (16)
(figure J).
. Remove screw (082) with washer (058) and setting ring (34).
Increasing the swing angle
Turn end stop nut (15) back counterclockwise.
.
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
Reducing the swing angle
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
Place setting ring (34), secure with washer (058) and screw (082).
Check O-ring (056) and replace, if damaged.
Place protective cap (16), fasten bolts (054) with lock washers (055).
.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 3.
If gearbox is mounted to a multi-turn actuator, set limit switching again for the
end position OPEN according to the operation instructions SA/SAR. Allow for
overrun.
17

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
11. Enclosure protection IP 68
Definition
According to EN 60 529, the conditions for meeting the requirements of enclosure
protection IP 68 (requirements exceed those of IP 67) are to be agreed between
manufacturer and user. AUMA worm gearboxes and primary reduction gearings in
enclosure protection IP 68 meet the following requirements according to AUMA:
. IP 68-3, submersible in water up to 3 m head of water
IP 68-6, submersible in water up to 6 m head of water
.
IP 68-10, submersible in water up to 10 m head of water
IP 68-20, submersible in water up to 20 m head of water
For size GS 50.3, only enclosure protection IP 68-3 is available.
If submersed in other media, additional measures for corrosion protection may be
necessary; please consult AUMA. Submersion in aggressive media, e.g. acids or
alkaline solutions, is not permitted.
Review
Gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68-3 were type tested in the factory.
Gearboxes in enclosure protection IP 68-6, IP 68-10 and IP 68-20 undergo a
routine testing for tightness in the factory.
Note:
The enclosure protection IP 68 refers to the interior of the gearboxes, but not to
the coupling compartment.
If the gearboxes are likely to be repeatedly submersed, a higher corrosion
protection KS or KX is required.
. For gearboxes intended for buried service we strongly recommend to use the
higher corrosion protection KS or KX.
. For horizontal outdoor installation of the gearboxes, a sealed pointer cover
should be used.
For gas applications with sealed pointer cover, an air vent in the pointer cover or
venting grooves in the valve mounting flange must be provided.
. In case of permanent submersion of the gearboxes or for buried service, a
protection cover must be fitted instead of a pointer cover. This will be taken into
account in the factory if indicated on the purchase order. Subsequent exchange
of the pointer cover for the protection cover is possible.
.
Use suitable sealing material between valve flange and gearbox.
Water can enter into the coupling compartment along the valve shaft. This would
lead to corrosion of hub and coupling. Therefore a suitable anticorrosive (or
sticky grease) must be applied to the hub and coupling of the gearbox before
mounting.
. With corrosion protection KX, the hub and coupling are provided with a high
quality corrosion protection as standard.
18

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
12. Maintenance
12.1 General notes After commissioning, check worm gearbox for damage to paint finish.
Do a thorough touch-up to prevent corrosion.
Original paint in small quantities can be supplied by AUMA.
AUMA worm gearboxes require only very little maintenance.
To ensure that the worm gearbox is always ready to operate, we recommend for
gearboxes operated less than 10 times per year, the following measures:
. Approximately six months after commissioning and every year after check bolts
between multi-turn actuator, worm gearbox, and valve for tightness. If required,
tighten applying the torques given in table 2 (page 11).
Perform a test run every six months.
Perform a visual inspection for grease leakage on each gearbox every
2 years.
Carry out a detailed functional test for each gearbox every 5 years. Record the
results for future reference.
. For gearboxes permanently exposed to ambient temperatures above
104 °F, maintenance must be performed at shorter intervals.
Seals:
Seals made of elastomeric materials are subject to ageing. The theoretical usable
lifetime of the seals made of NBR is 13.5 years from the date of manufacture.
These figures are based on an average ambient temperature of 104 °F. Seal kits
may be obtained from AUMA.
Grease:
A grease and seal change is recommended after the following operation time:
if operated seldom after 10 – 12 years
.
if operated frequently, after 6 – 8 years
in modulating duty after 4 – 6 years
Only original AUMA grease must be used.
.
For the grease type, refer to the name plate.
Lubricants should not be mixed.
Table 4: Grease quantities for worm gearboxes and primary reduction gearings
GS 50.3 63.3 80.3 100.3 125.3 160.3 200.3 250.3
Qty dm³ 0.1 0.3 0.4 1.0 1.3 3.3 6.6 12.2
Weight1) g 90 270 360 900 1,170 3,000 6,000 11,000
Primary
VZ
GZ
reduction 2.3 3.3 4.3 160.3 200.3 250.3
gearing
4:1/8:1 16:1 4:1/8:1 16:1
Quantity dm³ 0.35 0.35 0.35 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.2 2.8
Weight1) g 320 320 320 900 1,400 1,800 2,000 2,250
1) for ρ = approx. 900 g/dm3; conversion factor: 1 oz corresponds to 28.35 g
The removed lubricant and the cleaning agent used must be
disposed of according to the relevant regulations.
19

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
12.2 Grease change for worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and primary reduction gearing VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3
.
For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator: Remove multi-turn actuator.
Remove gearbox from the valve:
During this time, the valve/pipeline must not be under pressure!
12.2.1 Worm gearboxes Refer to spare parts list GS 50.3 – GS 125.3, page 24.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 19, table 4.
Mark position of the gearbox on the valve, loosen connecting bolts to the valve
and remove the worm gearbox.
Remove fastening bolts with lock washers from the housing cover (518.0) and
take off housing cover.
. Remove bolts with lock washers from the bearing cover (522.0). Lift worm wheel
carefully from the housing. For this, the worm shaft must be pulled from the
bearings and tilted slightly in the worm channel.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts and
clean gear housing. For this purpose, a suitable cleaning agent should be used.
Clean mounting faces at housing and housing cover (518.0). Replace O-rings at
the worm wheel (010, 011) by new ones.
Re-insert worm wheel carefully and bring worm shaft into correct position, fasten
bearing cover (522.0) at housing with bolts and lock washers.
.
Fill with new grease.
Place housing cover (518.0) on housing, while ensuring the proper position of
the O-rings (010, 011) at the worm wheel. Place bolts with lock washers and
fasten them evenly crosswise.
– Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at mounting flange.
– Apply non-acidic grease at splines of coupling
– Mount worm gearbox to valve, ensure correct position,
observe mark made in previous step
– Fasten with bolts of minimum quality 8.8 using lock washers, fasten bolts
crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
Gearbox without primary reduction gearing: Continue with section “After
maintenance”.
. Gearbox with reduction gearings VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3: Perform grease change at the
reduction gearing according to the following subsection.
12.2.2 Primary reduction gearing Refer to spare parts list VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3., page 24.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 19, table 4.
Remove bolts with lock washers from housing cover (020.0) and pull off housing
cover (020.0) with the complete input drive shaft (021.0).
Take off plate with internal teeth (045.0) and planet carrier (022.0) with the
planet wheels.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts and
clean them. For this purpose, a suitable cleaning agent should be used.
Clean mounting faces at housing (019.0), housing cover (020.0) and plate with
internal teeth (045.0). Replace O-rings by new ones.
Insert planet carrier (022.0) with planet wheels.
.
Fill with new grease.
Place plate with internal teeth (045.0) and insert the input drive shaft (021.0)
completely. Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them evenly crosswise to
the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
. Continue with section “After maintenance”, page 22.
20

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
12.3 Grease change for worm gearboxes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3 and primary reduction gearing
GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3
. For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator: Remove multi-turn actuator.
. Remove gearbox from the valve:
During this time, the valve/pipeline must not be under pressure!
12.3.1 Worm gearboxes Refer to spare parts list GS 160.3 – GS 250.3, page 26.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 19, table 4.
Tools: Lock nut tool, can be obtained from AUMA.
Mark position of the gearbox on the valve, loosen connecting bolts to the valve
and remove the worm gearbox.
Remove bolts with lock washers from the housing cover (518.0) and take off
housing cover.
. Remove bolts with lock washers from the bearing cover (522.0). Take off bearing
lock nut (537.0) by loosening the grub screw. Remove protective cap (536.0), pull
off snap ring from end nut (526.0). Remove end stop (523.0). Lift worm wheel
carefully from the housing. For this, the worm shaft must be pulled from the
bearings and tilted slightly in the worm channel.
Pull out worm shaft from housing in direction of the input shaft.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts and
clean gear-housing. For this purpose, a suitable cleaning agent should be used.
Clean mounting faces at housing and housing cover (518.0). Replace O-rings at
the worm wheel (010, 011) by new ones.
. Re-insert worm wheel carefully and bring worm shaft into correct position. Screw
in bearing lock nut (537.0) and secure with grub screw. Fasten bearing cover
(522.0) at the housing with bolts and lock nuts.
.
Fill with new grease.
Place housing cover (518.0) on housing, while ensuring the proper position of
the O-rings (010, 011) at the worm wheel. Place bolts with lock washers and
fasten them evenly crosswise.
– Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at mounting flange and valve.
– Apply non-acidic grease at splines of coupling.
– Mount worm gearbox to valve, ensure correct position, observe mark.
– Fasten with bolts of minimum quality 8.8 using lock washers, fasten bolts
crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
Gearbox without primary reduction gearing: Continue with section “After
maintenance”.
. Gearbox with reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3: Perform grease change
at the reduction gearing according to the following sections.
12.3.2 Single-stage reductions gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1 and 8:1)
Refer to spare parts list GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3, page 28.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 19, table 4.
Remove bolts with lock washers at housing cover (002.0) and pull off housing
cover (002.0) with the input drive shaft (003.0) and the plate with internal teeth).
Remove screws from the plate with internal teeth and separate the plate with
internal teeth from the input drive shaft.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts and
clean them.
For this purpose, a suitable cleaning agent should be used.
Clean mounting faces at housing (001.0), housing cover (002.0) and plate with
internal teeth. Replace O-rings by new ones.
.
Fill housing cover (002) with new grease.
Fix plate with internal teeth (006.0) with screws at housing cover.
21

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
. Fill housing (001.0) with remaining grease and fit the complete housing cover
with input drive shaft (003.0). Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them
evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
. Continue with section “After maintenance”, page 22.
12.3.3 Double-stage primary reduction gearing GZ 200.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratio 16:1)
Refer to spare parts list GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3, page 28.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 19, table 4.
Remove bolts with lock washers from housing cover (002.0) and pull off housing
cover with the complete input drive shaft (003.0).
Take off screws with lock washers from housing frame (010.0) and remove
housing frame with planet carrier and hollow wheel.
Remove screws from the plate with internal teeth and separate the plate with
internal teeth from the input drive shaft (003.0).
Remove screws (021) from the second stage of the plate with internal teeth and
separate it from the pinion (011.1).
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts and
clean them. For this purpose, a suitable cleaning agent should be used.
Clean mounting faces at housing (001.0), housing frame, housing cover (002.0)
and hollow wheels. Replace O-rings by new ones.
Fill housing (001.0) with new grease.
Fix second stage of the plate with internal teeth on housing frame (010.0).
Replace complete housing frame. Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten
them evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 11.
Fill housing frame (010.0) and housing cover (002.0) with the remaining grease.
.
Fix first stage of the plate with internal teeth on the housing cover (002.0).
Place complete housing cover with input drive shaft onto housing frame. Screw
in bolts with lock washers and fasten them evenly crosswise to the appropriate
torque according to table 2, page 11.
. Reset the end stops.
. For gearboxes with multi-turn actuator, check the setting of the limit switching
according to the operation instructions for multi-turn actuators; if required, reset.
12.4 After maintenance . If applicable, mount multi-turn actuator.
. Perform test run to ensure the proper function.
Operation instructions
. Check worm gearbox for damage to paint finish. Do a thorough touch-up to
prevent corrosion. Original paint in small quantities can be supplied by AUMA.
22

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
13. Disposal and recycling
AUMA gearboxes have an extremely long lifetime. However, they have to be
replaced at one point in time.
Our gearboxes have a modular design and may therefore easily be disassembled,
separated and sorted according to materials, i.e.:
. various metals
. plastics
. greases and oils
The following generally applies:
Collect greases and oils during disassembly. As a rule, these substances are
hazardous to water and must not be released into the environment.
Send disassembled material to a sound disposal or to separate recycling center
according to materials.
. Observe the local regulations for waste disposal.
14. Service AUMA offers extensive services such as maintenance and inspection for
gearboxes.
The AUMA service department can be reached at:
phone: 724-743-AUMA (2862)
fax: 724-743-4711
email: mailbox@auma-usa.com
www.auma-usa.com or www.auma.com.
23

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
15. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 125.3 and reduction gearing
VZ 2.3 – VZ 4.3
512.0
512.0
020.0
522.0
S1(009)
S1(034)
522.0
S1(017)
S1(009)
512.0
S1(017)
S1(009)
S1(017)
534.0
021.0
520.0
520.0
520.0
S1(033)
524.0
521.1
045.0
S1(033)
S1(011)
S1(012)
526.0
S1(010)
519.1
S1(010)
525.0
022.0
517.0
518.0
S1(009)
523.0
019.0
S1(076)
S1(009)
S1(073)
527.0
24

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original
AUMA spare parts should be used. Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation
in these instructions.
No. Designation Type
019.0 Housing VZ Sub-assembly
020.0 Housing cover VZ Sub-assembly
021.0 Input drive shaft VZ Sub-assembly
022.0 Planet carrier VZ Sub-assembly
045.0 Plate with internal teeth VZ Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
517.0 Housing Sub-assembly
518.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
519.1 Worm wheel Component
520.0 Worm shaft Sub-assembly
521.1 Travelling nut Component
522.0 Bearing cover Sub-assembly
523.0 Limit stop housing Sub-assembly
524.0 Pointer cover Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
526.0 End stop nut Sub-assembly
527.0 Protection cover Sub-assembly
534.0 Input shaft Sub-assembly
536.0 Cap Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
25

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
16. Spare parts list worm gearboxes GS 160.3 – GS 250.3
537.0
512.0
520.0
522.0
S1(009)
S1(017)
521.1
538.0
538.1
526.0
524.0
518.0
S1(011)
S1(012)
517.0
S1(009)
513.1
S1(010)
519.1
S1(010)
525.0
523.0
S1(056)
536.0
S1(073)
527.0
26

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original
AUMA spare parts should be used.
Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No. Designation Type
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
513.0 Grub screw Component
517.0 Housing Sub-assembly
518.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
519.1 Worm wheel Component
520.0 Worm shaft Sub-assembly
521.1 Travelling nut Component
522.0 Bearing cover Sub-assembly
523.0 Limit stop housing Sub-assembly
524.0 Pointer cover Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
526.0 End stop nut Sub-assembly
527.0 Protection cover Sub-assembly
536.0 Cap Sub-assembly
538.0 Input shaft Sub-assembly
538.1 Input shaft Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
27

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
17. Spare parts list reduction gearings GZ 160.3 – GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1, 8:1 and 16:1)
GZ 200.1 – GZ 250.1
16:1
GZ 160.1 – GZ 250.1
4:1 / 8:1
006.0
S1(003) 006.0
S1(003)
S1(003)
S1(003)
003.0
S1(004)
S1(009)
001.0
S1(004)
S1(009)
001.0
S1(029)
S1(029)
003.0
003.3
S1(014)
512.0
002.0
003.3
011.1
010.0
013.0
S1(014)
002.0
512.0
GZ 200.1 – GZ 250.1
16:1
006.0
S1(003)
S1(003)
003.0
S1(004)
S1(009)
001.0
S1(029)
S1(029)
003.3
S1(014)
512.0
002.0
011.1
013.0
010.0
28

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Note:
Please state type and commission no. of the device (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA
spare parts should be used. Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No.
Designation
001.0 Housing Sub-assembly
002.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
003.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
003.3 Input drive shaft Sub-assembly
006.0 Planetary gear Sub-assembly
010.0 Housing frame Sub-assembly
011.1 Pinion Sub-assembly
013.0 Planetary gear 1st stage Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
29

Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Operation instructions
Notes
30

Operation instructions Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3
Index
B
Bolts for mounting actuators 10
C
Changing the swing angle 16
Corrosion protection 7
D
Disposal and recycling 23
E
Enclosure protection IP 68 18
F
Fitting the handwheel 7
H
Handwheel 7
L
Lubricant 19
M
Maintenance 3,19
Manual operation 12
Motor operation 13
Mounting positions 8
Mounting the multi-turn actuators 9
Mounting to valve 11
P
Packaging 7
R
Range of application 3
S
Safety instructions 3
Service support/ Parts 23
Setting the end stop
with mounted
multi-turn actuator 13
Setting the end stops
for manual operation 12
Spare parts list
GS 50.3 - GS 125.3 24,25
GS 160.3 - GS 250.3 26,27
GZ 160.3 - GZ 250.3
(4:1/8:1/16:1) 28,29
Storage 7
T
Technical data 4
Transport 7
31

North American Sales and Service:
US Headquarters and Factory:
AUMA Actuators, Inc.
100 Southpointe Blvd.
Canonsburg PA 15317
Tel: 724-743-AUMA (2862)
Fax: 724-743-4711
email: mailbox@auma-usa.com
www.auma-usa.com
Regional Offices:
Northeast (Maryland and New York)
Southeast (South Carolina)
Midwest (Illinois)
Midwest (Kansas)
Houston (Texas)
West Coast (Northern and Southern California)
Representatives and Distributors
Anchorage
Atlanta
Baltimore
Baton Rouge
Birmingham
Boston
Charlotte
Chicago
Cincinatti
Corpus Christi
Dallas
Denver
Detroit
Hawaii
Houston
Indianapolis
Kansas City
Los Angeles
Mexicali (Mexico)
Mexico City
Milwaukee
Minneapolis
Montana
Monterrey (Mexico)
New York
Omaha
Orlando
Philadelphia
Phoenix
Pittsburgh
Rochester
Salt Lake City
San Diego
San Francisco
San Juan
Seattle
St. Louis
Toronto
Tulsa
International Headquarters:
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
Müllheim/ Germany
www.auma.com
International Sales and Service:
South America:
Argentina
Brazil
Chile
Colombia
Peru
Venezuela
Europe:
Austria
Benelux
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Greece
Hungary
Italy
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Russia
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Turkey
Ukraine
United Kingdom
Africa
Egypt
South Africa
Asia, Australia
Australia
China
Hong Kong
India
Japan
Korea
Kuwait
Oman
Qatar
Singapore
Taiwan
Thailand
UAE
For the name and phone number of the office
nearest you, call us at 724-743-2862 or visit our
website at www.auma-usa.com/saleserv.htm
2005-06-27
Y003.822/031/us/1.06

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number
Contract Eng.:
Project:
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s:
Shop Drawing:
CUSTOMER DATA
ACTUATOR DATA
Actuator/Gear Weight:
Enclosure:
Rated Torque:
Wiring Diagram:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
HENRY PRATT PO#790944OP, PRATT PART# ZHP151388004
1M017701
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.:
P.O. Item:
Cust. Part Number:
Model No.:
Base:
Stall Torque Range:
Operating Time:
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps:
Rated Load Amps:
*Nominal Load Amps:
*Nom. Motor HP:
1M0177 Line: 1
790944OP
4
ZHP151388004
IQ10FA10B4
FA10
427 lbs
NEMA 4/6
25 lbft
VALVE DATA
Type:
Class:
Handwheel Type:
Paint Spec.:
Conduit 2:
Conduit 4:
TOP
ASA 1.5''
None
35 - 60 lbft Lubrication:
SAE80EP
WD21026
0.09
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size:
Ratio:
Combined Torque:
343 sec
2.16
0.5
0.4 A
IW72R
480:1'
4725 lbft
Date:
Size:
Conduit 1 & 3:
Operating Temp.:
Supply V/Ph/Hz:
Insulation Class/Duty:
Service Factor
Type:
Make:
Lubrication:
Gearbox Base:
2/10/2012
Polyester Powder Coating
ASA 1.0''
-30C TO +70C
480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
H / 30 min
1
Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
Rotork Gears
Grease
FA25

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number 1M0177 Line: 2
Contract Eng.: Date: 2/10/2012
Project:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s: PRATT PO# 790944OP, PRATT PART# ZHP1513188012
Shop Drawing: 1M017702
CUSTOMER DATA
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.: 790944OP Size:
P.O. Item: 4 Type:
Cust. Part Number: ZHP151388012 Class:
ACTUATOR DATA
VALVE DATA
Model No.: IQ10NRB4 Handwheel Type: TOP
Base: NR Paint Spec.: Polyester Powder Coating
Actuator/Gear Weight: 191 lbs. Conduit 1 & 3: ASA 1.0''
Enclosure: NEMA 4/6 Conduit 2: ASA 1.5''
Rated Torque: 25 lbft Conduit 4: None
Stall Torque Range: 35 - 60 lbft Lubrication: SAE80EP
Wiring Diagram: WD21025 Operating Temp.: -30C TO +70C
Operating Time:
181 sec
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps: 2.16 Supply V/Ph/Hz: 480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
Rated Load Amps: 0.55 Insulation Class/Duty: H / 30 min
*Nominal Load Amps: 0.5 A Service Factor 1
*Nom. Motor HP: 0.11 Type: Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size: IWD5R Make: Rotork Gears
Ratio:
350:1'
Lubrication:
Grease
Combined Torque: 2750 lbft Gearbox Base: FA16

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number 1M0177 Line: 3
Contract Eng.: Date: 2/10/2012
Project:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s: PRATT PAO# 790944OP, PRATT PART# ZHP1513188014
Shop Drawing: 1M017703
CUSTOMER DATA
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.: 790944OP Size:
P.O. Item: 14 Type:
Cust. Part Number: ZHP151388014 Class:
ACTUATOR DATA
VALVE DATA
Model No.: IQ10NRB4 Handwheel Type: TOP
Base: NR Paint Spec.: Polyester Powder Coating
Actuator/Gear Weight: 191 lbs. Conduit 1 & 3: ASA 1.0''
Enclosure: NEMA 4/6 Conduit 2: ASA 1.5''
Rated Torque: 25 lbft Conduit 4: None
Stall Torque Range: 35 - 60 lbft Lubrication: SAE80EP
Wiring Diagram: WD21025 Operating Temp.: -30C TO +70C
Operating Time:
181 sec
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps: 2.16 Supply V/Ph/Hz: 480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
Rated Load Amps: 0.55 Insulation Class/Duty: H / 30 min
*Nominal Load Amps: 0.5 A Service Factor 1
*Nom. Motor HP: 0.11 Type: Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size: IWD5R Make: Rotork Gears
Ratio:
350:1'
Lubrication:
Grease
Combined Torque: 2750 lbft Gearbox Base: FA16

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number
Contract Eng.:
Project:
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s:
Shop Drawing:
CUSTOMER DATA
ACTUATOR DATA
Actuator/Gear Weight:
Enclosure:
Rated Torque:
Wiring Diagram:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
PRATT PO# 790945OP, PRATT PART# ZHP1513188013
1M017801
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.:
P.O. Item:
Cust. Part Number:
Model No.:
Base:
Stall Torque Range:
Operating Time:
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps:
Rated Load Amps:
*Nominal Load Amps:
*Nom. Motor HP:
1M0178 Line: 1
790945OP
13
ZHP1513188013
IQ12FA10B4
FA10
427 lbs
NEMA 4/6
60 lbft
VALVE DATA
Type:
Class:
Handwheel Type:
Paint Spec.:
Conduit 2:
Conduit 4:
TOP
ASA 1.5''
None
84 - 144 lbft Lubrication:
SAE80EP
WD21025
0.34
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size:
Ratio:
Combined Torque:
188 sec
5.35
1.7
1.2 A
IW72R
540:1'
12840 lbft
Date:
Size:
Conduit 1 & 3:
Operating Temp.:
Supply V/Ph/Hz:
Insulation Class/Duty:
Service Factor
Type:
Make:
Lubrication:
Gearbox Base:
2/10/2012
Polyester Powder Coating
ASA 1.0''
-30C TO +70C
480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
H / 30 min
1
Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
Rotork Gears
Grease
FA25

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number 1M0178 Line: 2
Contract Eng.: Date: 2/10/2012
Project:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s: PRATT PO# 790945OP, PRATT PART# ZHP1513188015
Shop Drawing: 1M017802
CUSTOMER DATA
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.: 790945OP Size:
P.O. Item: 15 Type:
Cust. Part Number: ZHP1513188015 Class:
ACTUATOR DATA
VALVE DATA
Model No.: IQ12FA10B4 Handwheel Type: TOP
Base: FA10 Paint Spec.: Polyester Powder Coating
Actuator/Gear Weight: 427 lbs Conduit 1 & 3: ASA 1.0''
Enclosure: NEMA 4/6 Conduit 2: ASA 1.5''
Rated Torque: 60 lbft Conduit 4: None
Stall Torque Range: 84 - 144 lbft Lubrication: SAE80EP
Wiring Diagram: WD21025 Operating Temp.: -30C TO +70C
Operating Time:
188 sec
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps: 5.35 Supply V/Ph/Hz: 480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
Rated Load Amps: 1.7 Insulation Class/Duty: H / 30 min
*Nominal Load Amps: 1.2 A Service Factor 1
*Nom. Motor HP: 0.34 Type: Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size: IW72R Make: Rotork Gears
Ratio:
540:1'
Lubrication:
Grease
Combined Torque: 12840 lbft Gearbox Base: FA25

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number 1M0178 Line: 3
Contract Eng.: Date: 2/10/2012
Project:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s: PRATT PO# 790945OP, PRATT PART# ZHP1513188017
Shop Drawing: 1M017803
CUSTOMER DATA
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.: 790945OP Size:
P.O. Item: 17 Type:
Cust. Part Number: ZHP1513188017 Class:
ACTUATOR DATA
VALVE DATA
Model No.: IQ12FA10B4 Handwheel Type: TOP
Base: FA10 Paint Spec.: Polyester Powder Coating
Actuator/Gear Weight: 427 lbs Conduit 1 & 3: ASA 1.0''
Enclosure: NEMA 4/6 Conduit 2: ASA 1.5''
Rated Torque: 60 lbft Conduit 4: None
Stall Torque Range: 84 - 144 lbft Lubrication: SAE80EP
Wiring Diagram: WD21025 Operating Temp.: -30C TO +70C
Operating Time:
188 sec
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps: 5.35 Supply V/Ph/Hz: 480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
Rated Load Amps: 1.7 Insulation Class/Duty: H / 30 min
*Nominal Load Amps: 1.2 A Service Factor 1
*Nom. Motor HP: 0.34 Type: Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size: IW72R Make: Rotork Gears
Ratio:
540:1'
Lubrication:
Grease
Combined Torque: 12840 lbft Gearbox Base: FA25

IQ Electric Motor Actuator Data Sheet
Job Number 1M0178 Line: 4
Contract Eng.: Date: 2/10/2012
Project:
WARD COUNTY WWTP
Consultant:
MOV Tag No.'s: PRATT PO# 790945OP, PRATT PART# ZHP1513188016
Shop Drawing: 1M017804
CUSTOMER DATA
Name: HENRY PRATT Make:
P.O. No.: 790945OP Size:
P.O. Item: 16 Type:
Cust. Part Number: ZHP1513188016 Class:
ACTUATOR DATA
VALVE DATA
Model No.: IQ12FA10B4 Handwheel Type: TOP
Base: FA10 Paint Spec.: Polyester Powder Coating
Actuator/Gear Weight: 405 lbs Conduit 1 & 3: ASA 1.0''
Enclosure: NEMA 4/6 Conduit 2: ASA 1.5''
Rated Torque: 60 lbft Conduit 4: None
Stall Torque Range: 84 - 144 lbft Lubrication: SAE80EP
Wiring Diagram: WD21025 Operating Temp.: -30C TO +70C
Operating Time:
186 sec
MOTOR DATA
Locked Rotor Amps: 4.1 Supply V/Ph/Hz: 480V / 3Ph / 60Hz
Rated Load Amps: 1 Insulation Class/Duty: H / 30 min
*Nominal Load Amps: 0.9 A Service Factor 1
*Nom. Motor HP: 0.26 Type: Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated
*Nominal HP and Run Load Amps are at 1/3 full rated torque output.
SECONDARY GEARBOX DATA
Model Number/Size: IW72R Make: Rotork Gears
Ratio:
360:1'
Lubrication:
Grease
Combined Torque: 8520 lbft Gearbox Base: FA25

NOT ROTORK SUPPLY
X
ACTUATOR TERMINALS
1
2
3
3 PHASE SUPPLY
E
+24VDC SUPPLY
STOP / MAINTAIN
OPEN
CLOSE
-24VDC SUPPLY
20-60VDC OR VAC COMMON
MAKE AT FULLY
CLOSED
S1
5
34
35
33
4
36
6
7
+24 VDC CUSTOMER SUPPLY
REMOTE STOP/MAINTAIN COMMAND
REMOTE OPEN COMMAND
REMOTE CLOSE COMMAND
-24VDC CUSTOMER SUPPLY
REMOTE COMMON
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP/MAINTAIN
COMMAND SIGNALS
LS1 START PERMISSIVE N/C
BREAK AT FULLY
OPEN
S2
8
9
LS2 VALVE CLOSED N/C
MAKE AT FULLY
OPEN
S3
10
11
LS3 VALVE OPEN N/O
BREAK AT 5%
OPEN
S4
12
13
LS4 VALVE FAILURE N/C
MAKE AT 5%
OPEN
S5
14
16
LS5 PUMP START/STOP COMMAND N/O
BREAK AT FULLY
OPEN
S6
17
19
LS6 VALVE CLOSED N/C
MAKE AT FULLY
OPEN
S7
20
24
LS7 VALVE OPEN N/O
BREAK AT TORQUE
TRIP OPEN
S8
30
47
Iss Date Chkd Revision Details
01 020912 RAR FIRST ISSUE
www.
ROTORK CONTROLS LTD
BATH, BA1 3JQ
ENGLAND
Tel:01225-733200
.com
ROTORK CONTROLS INC
ROCHESTER
NY 14624, USA
Tel:585-247-2304
WD21025 HOOKUP DIAGRAM
Drawn by: RAR
Date : 020912
Base WD: 3000-000
1M0177
MI No : --
Circuit Diagram No
Issue
No
Job No : WS21035 01

NOT ROTORK SUPPLY
X
ACTUATOR TERMINALS
1
2
3
3 PHASE SUPPLY
E
+24VDC SUPPLY
STOP / MAINTAIN
OPEN
CLOSE
-24VDC SUPPLY
20-60VDC OR VAC COMMON
BREAK AT FULLY
OPEN
S1
5
34
35
33
4
36
6
7
+24 VDC CUSTOMER SUPPLY
REMOTE STOP/MAINTAIN COMMAND
REMOTE OPEN COMMAND
REMOTE CLOSE COMMAND
-24VDC CUSTOMER SUPPLY
REMOTE COMMON
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP/MAINTAIN
COMMAND SIGNALS
LS1 VALVE OPEN N/C
BREAK AT FULLY
CLOSED
S2
8
9
LS2 VALVE CLOSED N/O
BREAK AT FULLY
OPEN
S3
10
11
LS3 VALVE OPEN N/C
BREAK AT FULLY
CLOSED
S4
12
13
LS4 VALVE CLOSED N/O
Iss Date Chkd Revision Details
01 020912 RAR FIRST ISSUE
www.
ROTORK CONTROLS LTD
BATH, BA1 3JQ
ENGLAND
Tel:01225-733200
.com
ROTORK CONTROLS INC
ROCHESTER
NY 14624, USA
Tel:585-247-2304
WD21025 HOOKUP DIAGRAM
Drawn by: RAR
Date : 020912
Base WD: 3000-000
1M0177
MI No : --
Circuit Diagram No
Issue
No
Job No : WS21034 01

PRATT
Henry Pratt Company
TITLE: OPERATOR MOUNTING POSITION STANDARD
REVISION:
11
DATE:
8/31/11
REVISED BY:
Steve Smick
APPROVAL:
Ed Schutz
EPS # 23
Appendix B
Page 6 of 10

Control and monitoring facilities
IQ & IQT Range
electric valve actuators
with intelligent technology
Publication E120E issue 07/03

Introduction
Rotork’s proven IQ range of actuators is now
further enhanced with the addition of alternative
actuator power supplies and a dedicated part-turn
actuator - IQT.
IQ and IQT range actuators are self-contained,
non-intrusive units for local and remote electrical
operation of valves.
IQ Multi-turn actuator range
●
●
●
IQ - 3 phase power supplies
IQS - single phase power supplies
IQD - DC power supplies
IQT Quarter-turn actuator range
●
●
●
Intelligent, non-intrusive quarter-turn actuator
incorporating all the benefits of standard IQ control
and indication features
Suitable for 3 phase, single phase and 24V DC
power supplies
Operating speed can be varied
Contents
IQ – In control 3
Actuator electrical specification 4
Control specification 7
Indication, Monitoring
and Data Logging 9
Fieldbus Systems 11
Actuator circuit diagrams 12
ESD and interlock control circuits 15
Remote control circuits 16
Analogue control circuits 18
Refer to publication E110E for IQ and IQT range
performance and specification.
The IQ and IQT ranges comprise of an electric motor,
reduction gearing, reversing starter with local controls,
position and torque limitation with electronic logic
controls and monitoring facilities, all housed in a doublesealed
watertight enclosure to IP68 (7 metres - 72 hours),
NEMA 4 and 6.
All settings including torque, limit and indication contacts
are made using the non-intrusive, hand held, infra-red IQ
Setting Tool, included with each order.
Rotork Controls Ltd, Bath, UK
2
The following specification covers standard and optional
features. Options selected must be specified with order.
Rotork Controls Inc, Rochester, USA

IQ – In control
IQ – the first valve actuator you can commission and interrogate without
removing electrical covers.
With the infra-red IQ Setting Tool and PC based IQ-Insight, commissioning
and analysis of IQ actuators is simple, fast and convenient.
IQ Setting Tool
The Setting Tool enables the user to
view all functions via the actuator
display window using a non-intrusive
infra-red link. As each function is
viewed its setting can be checked
and, if required, changed. Setting of
torque levels, position limits and all
other control and indication functions
can be made even in hazardous
locations.
Settings can be protected using a
customer-selected password. As the
Setting Tool is separate to the
actuator, access to the tool and
therefore the configured settings can
be controlled by “permit to work”
systems or allocation only to
authorised technicians.
The Setting procedure is divided into
two stages:
1. Primary functions –
Settings for end of travel limit or
torque action, torque switch values,
limit positions etc.
2. Secondary functions -
Settings covering the control,
indication and optional equipment
functions.
All IQ actuator functions are
configured before dispatch to Rotork
standard default settings, unless
alternatives have been specified with
the order.
Actuator display indication of
instantaneous torque and position
can be monitored with a simple key
press of the Setting Tool.
The Setting Tool can be used to
access real time, grouped Help
displays of control inputs, indication
outputs and actuator status.
Setting Tool Specification
Waterproof IP67, Certified EEx ia
IIC T4 (intrinsically safe).
Power Supply 9V Battery
(supplied & fitted).
Operating range 0.75m from actuator
display window.
Setting Tool(s) are dispatched with
each order. Setting Tools are suitable
for use with any IQ or IQT range
actuator.
For more information on Setting Tool
and commissioning, refer to
publications E170E - IQ range &
E175E - IQT range.
IQ-Insight - Actuator
configuration and
analysis tool for PC
IQ-Insight PC software allows the
actuator set-up, status and data
logger to be reviewed analysed and
reconfigured over a non-intrusive
IrDA interface.
The visually interactive application is
browser based running under
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4+.
All the benefits of Internet browser
systems such as linking, bookmarking,
“back” and “forward” controls along
with file storage make analysing the
data from an IQ simple and fast.
Laptop PC’s with IrDA interface (or
RS232- IrDA serial link) running
IQ-Insight can be “connected” directly
to an actuator located in the field.
Alternatively IQ Pocket-Insight
software allows the actuator to be
configured and data upload/
download in the field using a hand
held personal digital assistant (PDA).
For up to date information on IQ-
Insight and IQ Pocket-Insight visit
www.rotork.com
IQ Communicator II
The intrinsically safe IQ Communicator
II can be used for actuators located in
hazardous areas. The Communicator II
allows the configuration, status and
data logger of the actuator to be
accessed, analysed and reconfigured.
The Communicator II can be used to
transport actuator files to a safe area
where they can be downloaded and
analysed on a PC with IQ-Insight.
3

Actuator electrical specification
Power supply
The electrical supply type and nominal
operating voltage must be specified at
time of order.
Actuator performance is guaranteed
with a voltage tolerance +/-10% and
frequency tolerance +/-2Hz. Actuators
are capable of starting and running up
to speed with a maximum 15% volt
drop.
Non-standard tolerances
Where voltage and/or frequency
variations may be experienced outside
those quoted below, or where
operation under large volt drop
conditions may be required, please
apply to Rotork.
IQ range power supplies
IQ - 3 phase power supplies
IQ actuators are available for operation
with the following standard three
phase, three wire, nominal power
supplies:
50Hz
220, 240, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460,
500, 525, 550, 660 and 690 volts
60Hz
208, 220, 230, 240, 380, 440, 460,
480, 575 and 600 volts
Refer to publication E110E for IQ
performance summary and E130E for
IQ - 3 phase power supply rating data.
Refer to publication E110E for IQD
performance summary and E131E for
IQD DC power supply rating data.
*limited by actuator size - refer to
E110E IQD performance summary.
IQT range power supplies
IQT range of actuators is available for
the following power supplies without
change in performance**.
Refer to publication E110E for IQT
performance summary and E135E
IQT range power supply rating data.
IQT - 3 phase power supplies
Actuators are suitable for operation
with the following standard three
phase, three wire, nominal power
supplies:
50Hz
200 220, 240, 380, 400, 415, 440,
480, 500, 550, 660 and 690 volts
60Hz
200, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380, 400,
440, 460, 480, 575, 590, 600, 660
and 690 volts
IQT - single phase power supplies
50Hz
110,115, 120, 220, 230, 240 volts
60Hz
100, 110, 115, 120, 208, 220, 230,
240 volts
Conduit entries
IQ and IQT range actuators have a
separately sealed terminal
compartment incorporating
a segregated terminal block and
cable/conduit entries.
It is the responsibility of the installer
to ensure the appropriate cable/
conduit adaptors, glands and
blanking plugs are fitted in order to
maintain hazardous area certification
and ingress protection rating.
Certified adaptors and blanking plugs
are available as optional extras.
IQ Range
Three threaded conduit entries are
provided, tapped: 1 x 1 1 /2” and 2 x
1”ASA NPT. Unless otherwise
specified, actuator will be dispatched
with adaptors: 1 x M40 and 2 x M25
metric to BS3643, “Ex” certified or as
an alternative, 1 x PG29 and 2 x PG16.
Options
If specified with order, a fourth
conduit entry can be provided,
tapped 1” ASA NPT with adaptor to
M25 or as an alternative, PG16.
4
IQS - single phase power supplies
IQS actuators are available for standard
nominal voltages:
50Hz
110, 220, 240
60Hz
110, 220, 230
Refer to publication E110E for IQS
performance summary and E131E for
IQ single phase power supply rating
data.
IQD - DC power supplies
IQD actuators are available for
standard nominal voltages:
24V*, 48V*, 110V DC
IQT - DC power supplies
24V DC*
** IQT - 24V DC: speed may vary with
load.
Non-standard voltages
Actuators can be supplied to operate
on power supply voltages other than
those quoted above.
Please apply to Rotork.
Uninterruptible power supplies
Standard actuators can be operated
on UPS systems providing the above
specified tolerances are not exceeded
and waveforms, harmonics, spikes
etc. adhere to recognised supply
standards such as EN50160.
For more information please refer to
publication E130E.
IQT Range
Two threaded conduit entries are
provided tapped M25. When
requested, 2 x 3 /4” ASA NPT
adaptors will be provided.
Options
Adaptors are available to convert
standard conduit entries to the
following: 1”, 1 1 /4”, 1 1 /2” - ASA NPT
or metric M20. Two additional
conduit entries can be provided when
specified, sizes as above.
Terminals
The IQ and IQT range actuators
incorporate a terminal block
containing segregated metric screw
terminal inserts. M5 pan head
terminal screws are provided for
power terminals and M4 pan head
terminal screws for control and
indication. The terminal box cover
carries a terminal identification code
card. Each actuator is supplied with
instruction book and wiring diagram.

Wiring
Jig built harnesses of individually
numbered stranded conductors,
tropical grade PVC insulated, connect
internal components to the sealed
terminal block. All internal control
connections to the printed circuit
boards are via plugs and sockets.
Wiring of contacts to outgoing
terminals is size 1.2mm 2 (18AWG).
Motor
IQ - 3 phase
Class F insulated, squirrel cage motor
of special high torque low inertia
design. 15 minute rated with cyclic
duration factor of 25% at 33% of
actuator output rated torque giving a
temperature rise not exceeding that
permitted for Class B insulation at
standard nominal voltage. Actuator
rated up to 60 starts per hour at a
rate not exceeding 600 starts per hour.
Burnout protection by embedded
thermostats, with facility for bypassing
under emergency shutdown control.
Motors conform to IEC34, NEMA MG1
and BS4999.
IQS Single Phase
Single phase capacitor start/run
squirrel cage induction motor. Class F
insulated, special high torque, low
inertia design. Rating, protection and
compliance as 3 phase specification
above.
IQD DC
Class F insulated, permanent magnet
DC motor. Rating, protection and
compliance as 3 phase specification
above.
IQT
The IQT utilises a 24V permanent
magnet DC motor 15 minute rated
with cyclic duration factor of 20% at
75% of actuator rated torque.
Actuator rated up to 60 starts per
hour at a rate not exceeding 600 starts
per hour. Thermostat protection
coupled to transformer rectifier
package allowing complete power
supply and motor protection.
Note: On AC power supplies the
24V DC supply for the motor is
produced internally by a transformer
rectifier assembly.
Motor options
IQ Range
Class H, 30 minute rated motors
are available for certain applications.
Please apply to Rotork.
Modulating
For applications requiring more than
60 starts/hour please refer to IQM
publication E410E.
Electrical Control
Module – ECM
Control PCB
Incorporating a single integrated
circuit, hard-wired logic control for
the actuator together with infra-red
(IrDA) interface. On board data
logger records operational data, valve
torque/position profiles and statistical
information, all time and date stamped.
Torque Switch and Position Control
Position and torque are adjustable as
follows:
● IQ Range
Position setting range: 2.5 to
100,000 turns, with a minimum
angular resolution of 15° at the
output.
● IQT Range
Position setting range: 80 -100°
(mechanical stops), resolution 0.1°
of full 90° travel.
● Torque switch setting
40% to 100%
For IQ range, output torque is
obtained via measurement of
wormshaft displacement under load
and is independent of voltage,
frequency and temperature
fluctuations. In the case of IQT range,
torque is derived from motor current
by the motor controller and is
independent of speed and supply
voltage.
“Torque off” during unseating or
during starting/reversing in mid travel
against high inertia loads can be
inhibited. A “jammed valve”
protection circuit de-energises the
motor if no movement occurs after
receipt of a signal to open or close.
The IQ and IQT ranges incorporate a
battery to update and maintain both
local LCD and remote “S” contact
indication of actuator/valve status
when power to the actuator is isolated.
Should manual operation of the valve
take place during a power supply
interruption, both local and remote
indication is updated. Unlike other
actuator makes, a secondary low
voltage power supply is not required
to update local and remote valve
position indication.
Expected battery life is 5 years.
The status of the battery is indicated
by the actuator display. Remote
indication of battery status is available
with actuator “S” contact indication.
All actuator configured settings are
stored in non-volatile EEPROM
(Electrically Erasable, Programmable
Read Only Memory). EEPROM does
not require any power supply to
maintain the stored configured
settings and is therefore completely
independent of the battery.
5

Actuator electrical specification
Protection features
The IQ and IQT range includes the
following protection features:
Torque protection
If the torque produced in operating
the valve when closing or opening
reaches that set for the active torque
switch, the motor will be de-energised.
The torque switches are independently
configurable in the range 40 - 100%
of rated torque. In addition the open
torque switch can be configured to
“boost”, allowing the motor to
generate torque in excess of rated
torque to enable operation of “sticky”
valves. Local and remote indication of
torque trip is provided.
Motor over temperature protection
For IQ range two thermostats are
located within the motor stator. IQT
thermostats are located within the
motor supply torroidal power
transformer for AC supply and on the
motor polarity protection bridge
rectifier for 24V DC supply. This
arrangement provides comprehensive
protection for both the power supply
circuitry and the motor. In both cases
the thermostats will trip and
de-energise the motor if the
temperature exceeds its rating. Local
and remote indication of thermostat
tripped is available. The thermostat
can be overridden during an ESD
operation.
Automatic phase rotation
correction
The actuator will always run in the
correct direction regardless of the
sequence of power supply connection.
Lost phase protection
If any one or more power supply
phases are lost, the motor cannot be
energised. Local and remote indication
of lost phase is available.
Instantaneous reversal protection
The motor control logic introduces a
delay in switching the motor as a
response to instant reversal of control
signals, preventing contact damage to
the contactors. Overtorque transients
due to switching high inertia loads are
prevented from causing a torque trip
by the motor control logic.
ASTD Automatic Self Test and
Diagnosis
On power up the actuator
automatically tests its vital operational
circuits and memory devices to ensure
correct operation. In the unlikely event
of a device problem the IQ diagnoses
the cause and will automatically
present this information in the form
of a display icon. Electrical operation
can be inhibited to prevent possible
damage to the actuator and valve.
The problem can then be accurately
investigated and corrected by
maintenance personnel. Local and
remote indication of ASTD Fault is
available.
Power module
The power module incorporates a
mechanically and electronically
interlocked reversing contactor
starter.* For IQ and IQT ranges on AC
supplies the control supply transformer,
fed from two phases of the incoming
power supply, provides internal control
circuit supplies and an isolated,
nominal 24V DC supply rated at 5W
for actuator fed remote control
circuits. The transformer is of a “split
bobbin” double insulated design and
incorporates short circuit and overload
protection. For IQD and IQT-24V DC
the control circuit and customer
supplies are provided via DC/DC
converters. The Rotork Syncrophase
circuit provides automatic phase
rotation correction and lost phase
protection where applicable.
Option
Actuator fed remote control supply:
Nominal 120V AC supply, rated at
15VA. (not available with IQD and IQT
24V DC power supply).
6
Jammed valve protection
Should the actuator stall when
attempting to unseat a valve stuck in
its seat, the motor will be de-energised
within 7 seconds, preventing damage.
Local and remote indication of
jammed valve is available.
* IQS Single Phase, IQT and IQM modulating
units utilise a solid state motor starter.

Control specification
Local Control
Non-intrusive selectors are provided
on the actuator electrical control cover,
one for Local/Stop/Remote selection,
pad-lockable in each position, and the
other Open/Close control. Local
control may be configured for
maintained or inching operation.
Controls may be rotated to suit
actuator orientation.
Local control may be selected to
operate using the supplied IQ Setting
Tool. The Setting Tool incorporates
dedicated Open, Stop and Close
buttons and will operate over a
nominal distance of 0.75 metres from
the display window.
Vandal Resistant Local Control
Option
Control selectors removed, indication
window with or without removable
cover, control of Local, Stop and
Remote selection and local Open
and Closed control is via the IQ
Setting Tool.
Remote Control
There are six control inputs for remote
control:
● Open, closed, stop/maintain
● Emergency shut down (ESD)
● Open interlock and closed interlock
Control can be connected for
maintained or push to run, “inching”
control. Refer to pages 15-18 for
remote control circuit schematics.
Remote control inputs are optoisolated
interfaces with a surge
immunity of 2kV. Standard control is
positive switching (negative switching
is available if specified).
The standard IQ actuator can be
controlled using remote control signals
defined as follows:
Customer fed control circuit supply:
Within the ranges, 20-60V AC/DC
or 60-120V AC.
Actuator fed control circuit supply:
24V DC. (120V AC available if
specified).
The current drawn for each control
input:
5mA at 24V DC, 12mA at 120V AC
Minimum “ON” voltage: 20V,
Maximum “OFF”: 3V.
Minimum signal duration: 300ms.
Maximum remote control cable
capacitance: 2µF core to core.
IQD - DC actuator remote control
Remote control is available within the
ranges 20-120V AC, 20 - 60V DC, only.
Note: for IQD at 110V DC power
supply, the maximum remote control
input voltage is 60V DC.
For applications where the actuator is
powered from a power supply of
limited capacity such as solar power
charged, direct current UPS system,
power conservation is of prime
importance. The IQD includes a “solar”
feature* to minimise power
consumption when not operating,
reducing the current drawn by the
actuator control to 10mA (maximum).
Applying a remote “open”, “close” or
“ESD” control signal or a discreet
“wake up” signal causes the actuator
to power up its control circuits and
after a delay of up to 1 second,
respond to the remote control signal.
Between 3 and 6 seconds after the
control signal is removed, the actuator
returns to the low current “solar” state.
As part of this routine, in order to
save power, the actuator fed 24V DC
remote control supply is disabled when
in solar mode (note that actuator 24V
DC fed remote control supply is
unavailable for applying a signal to
power up the actuator control when
operation is required and therefore a
discreet externally fed “wake up”
signal or externally powered control
signals must be used).
Two modes of control are available:
● Standard - sleep function disabled,
24V DC remote control supply
available at all times
● “Solar” sleep function enabled, 24V
DC remote control supply disabled
when asleep
Unless otherwise specified, the
actuator will be dispatched configured
in the “solar” mode of control.
Remote control signals must therefore
be a minimum of 1.5 second duration.
The 2 wire remote control form is not
available (refer to page 17). For
Fieldbus system control please apply
to Rotork.
In local control and when “awake”,
the actuator will draw approximately
100mA ( with 24V DC Power Supply)
from the supply in the quiescent state.
Remote control option
For customer fed remote control in the
range 60-125V DC and 230V AC an
alternative control circuit is available
(note: IQD is limited to 20-60V DC and
20 - 120V AC only). Remote control
voltages between 150V and 300V AC
must be derived from a designated
Installation Category II supply as
defined in BSEN/IEC61010.
Emergency Shut Down –
ESD
An active ESD signal will override any
local or remote control signal. The
ESD input operates from a separate
common to that used for open, close,
and stop remote control signals. Refer
to page 15 for ESD circuit options.
The following ESD options can be
configured:
● ESD Signal
Active high (contact making)
Active low (contact breaking)
● ESD Action
Close, open, stayput
● ESD Override
Motor thermostat**, local stop,
active interlocks, interrupter timer
option
Unless specified with order, the
actuator will be dispatched set for
the following:
Active high signal (contact making),
Close on ESD. ESD will not override
motor thermostat, local stop, active
interlock or interrupter timer.
* Factory configured.
** Bypassing the motor thermostat will invalidate
hazardous area certification.
7

Control specification
Interlocks
External hardwired interlocks for
opening, closing or both directions
can be configured to inhibit local and
remote operation until the external
contacts are made. Interlock circuits
may be added with any of the remote
control circuits. The interlock inputs
operate from a separate common
allowing for isolation between the
safety system and operation control
system. Refer to page 15 for standard
interlock circuit options.
Conditional control
For applications where a high level of
control integrity is required the IQ can
be configured for “conditional control”.
In this mode, operation is conditional
on two discrete signals being
applied. Looking at an example of a
“close valve” command, by applying a
signal to the “remote close input” and
“close interlock input” simultaneously
the actuator will operate and close the
valve. If only one signal is applied or a
signal is lost, the actuator will failsafe
by staying put or stopping. When
conditional remote control is configured
the interlock inputs are not
required for local operation.
Remote control options
Analogue Control -
Folomatic Option
The IQ Folomatic proportional
controller enables the actuator to
automatically position a valve in
proportion to an analogue current,
voltage or potentiometric signal. A
signal derived from the actuator noncontacting
position sensor is
electronically compared with a signal
proportional to the input signal. The
difference between them (error)
triggers the open or close contactor
via logic circuits to drive the actuator
in the direction that will cancel the
error. Valve position is therefore
automatically adjusted in proportion to
analogue signal. Unnecessarily
frequent operation can be prevented
by the adjustable Folomatic deadband
and the Motion Inhibit Timer features.
Positioning can take place over the
whole valve stroke or if required, a set
portion of stroke. By incorporating a
remote manual/auto selector,
proportional control can be overridden
allowing standard remote control to
take place when manual intervention
is required.
Application
Reversing motor-driven electromechanical
actuators are suitable for
proportional control in automatic
control loops in which the system rate
of change is relatively slow, and high
accuracy continuous modulation is not
essential; level controls in water and
sewage treatment plants are typical
applications. Motor operated
regulating valves and sluice gates are
driven through nut and screw or
wormgear mechanisms which must be
self-locking and are therefore
mechanically inefficient. Frequent
operation will cause rapid wear of
these components. The control
systems should therefore be designed
to avoid this. Stem nut life will be
maximised if the valvemaker uses a
stem thread with a lead of one third
of the diameter.
Standard IQ actuators are suitable for
regulating applications requiring up to
60 starts/hour providing the average
torque required by the valve in mid
stroke does not exceed 33% of the
rated torque of the selected actuator.
Where modulating applications require
increased rates of starts per hour, the
IQM and IQML actuator ranges can
be operated up to a rate of 1200
starts/hour and include configurable
DC injection motor breaking to reduce
overrun.
For more information please refer to
publication E410E.
Accuracy
The Folomatic positioner accuracy is
1%. Because of the backlash in nuts,
screws and gearing of industrial valves,
overall accuracy may not be quantified
prior to the valve and actuator being
put into service. To optimise positional
accuracy, actuator output speeds
should be kept as low as practicable.
Rotork do not recommend output
speeds in excess of 29rpm. The
maximum signal change required to
cause response in the same direction
(ie. not through deadband) is 1%.
Output resolution will be a function of
actuator speed and valve stem thread
or gearing backlash.
Folomatic Configuration
The Folomatic can be configured to
suit signals within the following
ranges:
Analogue signals/input impedance:
0-5mA/1k ohm 0-5V/1M ohm
0-10mA/500 ohm 0-10V/78k ohm
0-20mA/250 ohm 0-20V/52k ohm
4-20mA/250 ohm
Position corresponding to low
input signal:
Closed limit, or percentage open, or
Open limit.
Position corresponding to high
input signal:
Closed limit, or percentage open, or
Open limit.
Deadband:
0-9.9% of travel between Open and
Closed limit positions.
Motion inhibit time:
2-99 sec between actuator movements.
Action on loss of input signal:
Stay-put, move to high or low signal
position. Available for minimum set
“low” signal of 0.5mA. Response on
loss of signal will occur if signal falls
below 50% of set “low” signal.
Connections
For analogue control connections,
and analogue control connections with
remote manual override, refer to
page 18.
8

Indication, monitoring and data logging
Reduced speed,
hydraulic shock and
surge protection -
Interrupter Timer option
Where the operating time of the valve
must be reduced to prevent hydraulic
shock or “water hammer”, or to
prevent surges, the Interrupter Timer
option can be included. Pulsed
operation with independently
adjustable “on” and “off” time
periods in the range 1-99 seconds can
be selected to operate over any
portion of the closing or opening valve
stroke. On/Off time period range may
be extended when configuration is
carried out with the IQ-Insight tool.
The interrupter timer is active for both
local and remote control.
Local Position and
Local Monitoring Indication
A back-lit liquid crystal display gives
digital indication from fully Open to
fully Closed in 1% increments. Three
LED’s coloured red, green and yellow
for indication of Open, Close and
intermediate positions respectively are
also provided. The display includes
four icons for rapid diagnosis of valve
alarm, actuator alarm, control system
alarm and actuator battery status.
With the IQ setting tool, actuator
torque can also be displayed allowing
the valve torque against position to be
monitored in real time.
Help screen diagnosis is available for
monitoring valve, actuator and control
system status. The local display can be
rotated to suit actuator orientation.
LED colours can be reversed. Please
specify at time of order.
Remote position and
monitoring indication
Four latching, volt free, single pole
contacts, S1, S2, S3 and S4 are
provided, each one independently
configurable using the IQ Setting Tool
to signal one of the following:
● Status
Valve opening, closing, moving
(continuous or pulsing signal), local
stop selected, local selected, remote
selected, open or close interlock
active, ESD active
● Valve Alarms
Motor tripped on torque in mid
travel, motor tripped on torque
going open, going closed, valve
jammed, actuator being operated
by handwheel.
● Actuator Alarms
Lost phase, customer 24V DC (120V
AC) supply lost, battery low, internal
failure detected, thermostat tripped.
Each contact can be configured to
either “normally open” or “normally
closed”. Contacts are rated at 5mA to
5A, 120V AC, 30V DC.
Unless otherwise specified S contacts
will be configured as follows:
● S1 – contact makes at fully Closed
● S2 – contact makes at fully Open
● S3 – contact breaks at fully Closed
● S4 – contact breaks at fully Open
Monitor Relay
An independent relay with a volt-free
changeover contact for monitoring
actuator electrical availability. Contact
rating 5mA to 5A, 120V AC, 30V DC.
The relay will de-energise under any
one, or combination, of the following
conditions:
● Loss of one or more of the power
supply phases
● Loss of control circuit supply
● Local control selected
● Local stop selected
● Motor thermostat tripped
Data Logger
The on board data logger allows
infra-red, IrDA download of
historical actuator/valve performance
to PC or PDA. For hazardous areas the
intrinsically safe Rotork IQ
Communicator tool is available. Rotork
IQ-Insight PC software allows data
logger information of operational
events and statistics all time and date
stamped plus valve torque/position
profiles, to be analysed.
● Valve Position
Fully Open, fully Closed (exact) or
any intermediate positions
(0-99% open)
9

Indication options
Indication Options
Remote Valve Position Analogue
Indication - CPT
The Current Position Transmitter
(CPT) provides a non-contacting
internally fed 4-20mA analogue
signal proportional to valve position.
Selectable for minimum signal
corresponding to fully Closed or fully
Open position with automatic zero
and span setting. Available at terminals
22(+ve) and 23(-ve), the maximum
external impedance that may be
connected to the signal is 500 ohms
at nominal supply voltage.
Repeatability is within ± 1% and
linearity ± 1% of total valve travel.
Auxiliary Powered CPT
(not available with IQD)
The auxiliary powered CPT maintains
analogue position indication when the
mains power is switched off. An
auxiliary 24V DC supply is permanently
connected to the actuator, which is
automatically switched in to provide
power to the CPT on mains failure.
On re-instating the mains, the auxiliary
supply is automatically switched out.
Note: on mains failure, a surge of up
to 1 Amp is required to switch in the
auxiliary supply. The “power off”
quiescent load is nominally 180mA,
but will depend on the options fitted.
It is recommended that the 24V
auxiliary supply is permanently applied
to the actuator to limit switch surge
current.
Extra indication contacts
(not available with IQD)
The extra indication contacts option
provides four additional changeover
contacts, S5, S6, S7 and S8. Each
contact is latching, volt free and rated
at 5mA to 5A, 120V AC, 30V DC. The
extra indication contact functions are
independently configurable in the
same way as the standard contacts
using the IQ Setting Tool. The extra
indication contact functions are shown
below:
● Valve Position
fully open, fully closed or
intermediate positions (0-99% open).
● Status
Valve opening, closing, moving
(continuous or pulsing signal), local
stop selected, local selected, remote
selected, open or close interlock
active, ESD active.
● Valve Alarms
Motor tripped on torque in mid
travel, motor tripped on torque
going open, going closed, valve
jammed, actuator being operated by
hand wheel.
● Actuator alarms
Lost phase, customer 24V DC
(120V AC) supply lost, battery low,
internal failure detected, thermostat
tripped.
Remote Valve Torque Analogue
Indication - CTT
The Current Torque Transmitter (CTT)
provides a non-contacting internally
fed 4-20mA analogue signal
proportional to actuator output torque
(0-120% of rated torque). When
stationary the CTT output will continue
to indicate the current torque.
10

Fieldbus systems
Pakscan
Rotork’s own 2 wire system for control
and data transmission to and from the
actuators.
An internally mounted Pakscan field
unit connects the actuator to the field
network. By arranging the field cable
in a loop the system automatically
provides a fault tolerant redundant
path for the data signals. The
communication distance may be up to
20km in length without the need for
repeaters, up to 240 actuators may be
connected to the loop and a master
station supervises the system.
Communication from the master
station to the host uses Modbus
protocol over RS232 and RS485.
System settings for the actuator are
programmable over the infra-red
data link.
Please refer to publication S000E.
Modbus
Single or dual Modbus Modules may
be included in the IQ actuator to
provide remote serial communication
to the control functions and for status
feedback data. The field network uses
an RS485 data highway, either 2 or
4 wire, and can be duplicated
where redundancy is required. The
communication is half duplex and the
protocol used is Modbus RTU with
data rates up to 38 K baud. The
actuator variables necessary to set up
the system are programmable over the
infra-red data link.
Please refer to publication E121E.
Profibus
Profibus connectivity is possible by
fitting the Profibus DP interface
module within the IQ actuator. This
allows the IQ to be integrated into a
standard Profibus network. Full
compatibility with the fieldbus
standard EN 50170 is provided and
the module carries Profibus
certification for inter-operability. The
network allows full control of the
actuator and feedback of status data
to the host. The Rotork Profibus
module has two communication ports
to facilitate redundant fieldbus wiring
where reliability is paramount, data
rates up to 1.5 M baud are supported.
Please refer to publication S113E.
Foundation Fieldbus
IQ actuators may be connected to a
Foundation Fieldbus network (H1) by
the inclusion of a Rotork FF-01
module. The device complies with
fieldbus standard IEC 61158-2, using
a 2 wire electrical connection to the
highway and has been certified for
inter-operability. The Foundation
highway exchanges data and control
between devices and full actuator
functionality is available. Each actuator
has full link scheduler capability and
function blocks for analogue and
digital inputs and outputs and the
standard transducer block. Foundation
fieldbus networks are capable of
operating without a host system as a
supervisor, the field devices
communicating directly between
themselves.
Please refer to publication S114E.
Additional Inputs and Outputs
When used in conjunction with a
fieldbus network the actuator can also
collect additional feedback information
from other devices in the field such as
level switches or proximity detectors.
It is also possible with some systems
to provide additional output control
functions to operate remote
equipment, pump starters etc. In order
to provide these features the actuator
requires the Fieldbus Remote I/0 option
which includes 4 digital inputs for
feedback data and 4 dry contact relay
outputs for control. The availability of
these functions is indicated in the
table below:
Fieldbus Remote I/0 option fitted
Fieldbus Option
4 digital inputs 4 digital outputs
Pakscan
Yes
No
Single Modbus Module
Yes
Yes
Dual Modbus Module
Yes
Profibus
Yes
No
Yes
Foundation Fieldbus
Yes
Yes
11

Actuator circuit diagram – basic
IQ Actuator Basic Circuit Diagram 3000-000, drawn in mid-travel, power off
Motor
Thermostat
Motor
Switching
Module
FS1
3
1
2
E
Actuator Power Supply
Refer to page 4
(power supply connections will vary with
actuator type. Connections shown are
for IQ 3 phase only).
Position &
Torque/Limit
Control
–
+
PS1
4
5
Isolated, nominal 24V DC, 5W
Power Supply (120V AC 15VA option)
Available for actuator fed remote control.
Refer to page 6
Local Indication
Refer to page 9
Remote Indication
MONITOR
RELAY
42
43
44
Monitor Relay Monitors actuator
availability (shown de-energised –
unavailable). Refer to page 9
9V
INFRA RED
%
OPEN
Local and Remote
Position Indication
Back-up Supply
(Main Power Off)
Make at Fully Shut
Make at Fully Open
Break at Fully Shut
Break at Fully Open
S1
S2
S3
S4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Indication Contacts
Shown in default configuration.
Configuration can be changed using
the IQ Setting Tool to indicate any
valve position, status and alarm
settings. Refer to page 9
Local Controls
Refer to page 7
Close – Open
Stop
Local – Remote
Remote Controls
Close
Stop/Maintain
Open
Common –ve 20–60V AC/DC
Common –ve 60–120V AC
ESD
Open Interlock
Close Interlock
Common –ve 20–60V AC/DC
Common –ve 60–120V AC
33
34
35
36
40
25
37
38
31
32
Remote Control Inputs
Refer to pages 15 and 16 for
control circuit types.
Valve
Data
Data Logger/IrDA (page 3)
Condition
Monitoring
Actuator
Configuration
Infra-red/IrDA interface
Optional Control
and Indication Equipment
For applicable Circuit Diagram
refer to the Matrix on page 14
The Infra-red Setting Tool enables
options to be configured
12

Actuator circuit diagram – options
Optional control and indication equipment
Close Limit
Open Limit
Torque Trip Mid-Travel
Remote Selected
S5
S6
S7
S8
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
30
46
47
Extra Indication Contacts
Shown in default configuration.
Configuration can be changed using
the IQ Setting Tool to indicate various
valve and actuator position, status
and alarm settings. Contacts are
shown in not true state.
Refer to page 10
Manual/Auto
–24V DC
Common
–110V AC
Analogue Position Control
Folomatic
26
27
28
29
39
41
45
}
}
Analogue Input Signal
for Folomatic
For manual/auto
connections refer to
page 18
Valve Position – CPT
12V nominal
4–20mA
23
A
22
Valve Torque – CTT
12V nominal
4–20mA
29
A
28
Pakscan
2 Wire Loop
Profibus
RS485 Highway
Care should be taken to ensure that circuits connected
to terminals 4 or 5 are not connected directly or
indirectly to ground.
29
24
26
Screen
Profibus 1–B
Profibus1–A
26
27
28
29
2 Wire 'A' (In)
2 Wire 'B' (Out)
2 Wire 'C' Common
Screen
27
28
45
Profibus 2–B
Profibus 2–A
Screen
Modbus
2 Wire/4 Wire RS485 Highway
Foundation Fieldbus
IEC61158–2 Highway
24
26
27
28
23
29
Field Connection '1A'
Field Connection '1B'
Field Connection '2A'
Field Connection '2B'
Common
Screen
27
28
29
Field Connection '+'
Field Connection '–'
Screen
13

Actuator circuit diagrams – number code
Standard Control and Indication Options
Basic IQ range actuator circuit diagram 3000-000 and IQT range circuit diagram 6000-000 include local control and indication
station, remote open/stop/close ESD and interlock control and 4 configurable indication contacts.
-
IQ
Type
Remote
Digital Indication
Remote
Analogue
Indication
Actuator
Power Supply
Control Polarity
Analogue Control
Speed Control
Actuator Fed
Control Supply
3 IQ, IQS, IQD
5 IQM - Modulating – refer to publication E420E
6 IQT
0 Basic contacts S1 - S4
1 S1 - S4 + Extra indication contacts S5 - S8*
0 No remote analogue indication
1 Valve Position - Internally fed 4-20mA CPT
2 Valve Torque - Internally fed 4-20mA CTT**
3 Valve Position + Valve Torque CPT + CTT**
4 Auxiliary Powered CPT
0 3 - Phase - IQS and IQT
1 Single Phase - IQS only
2 DC - IQD only
- Positive switching control (neg common)
N Negative switching control (pos common)
0 No analogue control
1 Analogue proportional control - Folomatic
0 Single speed
1 2 - Speed control - Interrupter Timer
0 Basic: 24V DC actuator fed remote control supply
1 120V AC actuator fed remote control supply***
* Extra contacts S5 - S8 with Analogue control - Folomatic will be limited due to terminal availability -
Extra contacts S5 -S8 are not available with IQD contact Rotork.
** CTT is not available with Analogue control - Folomatic.
*** 120V AC actuator fed remote control supply not available with IQD actuators and IQT 24V DC
powered actuators.
Fieldbus System Control Options
All Fieldbus systems include basic hardwired remote control: Open/Stop/Close, ESD and interlocks.
IQ
Type
Aux
Digital Output
3 IQ, IQS, IQD
5 IQM - Modulating – refer to publication E420E
6 IQT
0 No Auxiliary digital output
3 Auxiliary digital output
0
-
Actuator
Power Supply
Fieldbus
System
0 3 - Phase - IQ and IQT
1 Single Phase - IQS only
2 DC - IQD only
2 Pakscan
3 Pakscan + Analogue Input
4 Modbus
5 Dual Redundant Modbus
6 Profibus
8 Foundation Fieldbus
Speed Control
0 Single speed
1 2 - Speed control - Interrupter Timer
14
Actuator Fed
Control Supply
0 Basic: 24V DC actuator fed control supply

Emergency Shut Down ESD
and Interlock control circuits
ESD and Interlock control
circuits may be added to any of
the Remote or Analogue circuits
shown on pages 16-18.
Emergency Shut Down ESD signal
will override any existing local or
remote signal. The actuator can be
configured to open, close or stayput
as a response to an ESD signal. ESD
signals must be derived from a
latching contact. The actuator can be
configured to respond to an ESD from
a “making” or “breaking” contact.
If required, ESD operation can be
configured to override the motor
thermostat, local stop, active
interlocks or Interrupter Timer option.
Overriding the motor thermostat
during ESD will invalidate hazardous
area certification.
Unless specified with order the
actuator will be dispatched set for
the following: Active high signal
(contact making), Close on ESD. ESD
will not override motor thermostat,
local stop, active interlock or
interrupter timer.
Changes in ESD configuration are made
using the supplied IQ Setting Tool.
ESD Control Circuits
▲
4
31
32
37
38
25
5
Form 1F
Customer
fitted link
ESD
(Stayput)
ESD - Internally fed ▲
Interlock Control
Circuits
▲
4
31
32
37
38
25
5
Customer
fitted link
Open
permissive
Close
permissive
Open/Close Interlock ▲
active – Internally fed
4
31
32
37
Customer
fitted link
Interlock circuit control
The default setting is for the interlock
function turned OFF. If interlock
facilities are required the IQ Setting
Tool can be used to configure the
interlocks ON.
Interlocks are active in both local and
remote control. If only one interlock is
required, the other must be linked
out as shown.
Traditional hardwired interlock
systems between actuators such as
“Main and Bypass” in steam plant
can be easily arranged using the IQ
“S” contacts to derive the permissive
control signal.
Key
4
31
24V DC -ve
ESD/IL Common 20-60V AC/DC
4
31
32
37
38
25
5
Form 2F
ESD
(Stayput)
Line/+ve
Common 60-120V AC
Common 20-60V AC/DC
38
25
5
Close
permissive
▲ Close Interlock ▲
active – Internally fed
4
31
32
37
Open
permissive
38
Close
permissive
25
32
ESD/IL Common 60-120V AC
5
37
38
25
5
Open Interlock
Close Interlock
ESD/Thermostat bypass
24V DC +ve
▲
ESD - Externally fed ▲
▲
Line/+ve
Common 60-120V AC
Common 20-60V AC/DC
Open/Close Interlock ▲
active – Externally fed
15

Remote control circuits
Remote control system wiring
schematics for standard IQ are
shown opposite.
Open/Close push-to-run
control.
Standard actuators are dispatched
without terminal links.
A commissioning bag located in the
terminal compartment includes
terminal screws, spare cover “O”
rings, actuator circuit diagram, and
the Installation and Maintenance
instruction, publication E170E.The
actuator including the IQ Setting Tool
will be indicated with a yellow label
on the terminal compartment cover.
Remote control inputs are optoisolated
interfaces with a surge
immunity of 2kV. Standard control is
positive switching (negative switching
is available if specified)
Internal supply -ve (zero) ➤
Common for remote controls
on 20V to 60V DC or AC ➤
Common for remote controls
on 60V to 120V AC ➤
Close ➤
Stop/maintain ➤
4
36
40
33
34
Form 1A
Close
The standard IQ actuator can be
controlled using remote control
signals defined as follows:
Open ➤
Internal 24V DC supply +ve
(or internal 120V AC) ➤
35
5
Open
Customer fed control circuit supply:
Within the ranges, 20-60V AC/DC
or 60-120V AC
Actuator fed control circuit supply:
24V DC, 5W rated. (120V AC, 15VA
available if specified)
Internal supply -ve (zero) ➤
4
Form 2A
The current drawn for each control
input:
5mA at 24V DC, 12mA at 120V AC
Minimum “ON” voltage: 20V,
Maximum “OFF”: 3V.
Minimum signal duration: 300ms.
Maximum remote control cable
capacitance: 2µF core to core.
Common for remote controls
on 20V to 60V DC or AC ➤
Common for remote controls
on 60V to 120V AC ➤
Close ➤
36
40
33
Close
Stop/maintain ➤
34
Open ➤
35
Open
Internal 24V DC supply +ve
(or internal 120V AC) ➤
5
Line/+ve
Zero/-ve
16

Open/Close maintained
control with mid-travel
reverse.
Open/Stop/Close
maintained control.
Two-wire control; energize to
Open, de-energize to Close.
(Configure for Open priority).
Customer to link 5 - 33.
Two-wire control; energize to
Close, de-energize to Open.
(Configure for Close priority).
Customer to link 5 - 35.
Form 1B Form 1C Form 1D Form 1E
4
4
4
4
36
36
36
36
40
33
34
35
Close
Open
40
33
34
35
Close
Open
40
33
34
35
Close
Open
40
33
34
35
Open
Close
▲ Internally fed circuits ▲
5
5
5
5
Stop
Form 2B Form 2C Form 2D Form 2E
4
4
4
4
36
36
36
Zero/-ve
36
Zero/-ve
40
33
34
35
Close
Open
40
33
34
35
Close
Open
40
33
34
35
Close
Open
40
33
34
35
Open
Close
▲ Externally fed circuits ▲
5
Line/+ve
5
Stop
5
5
Line/+ve
Zero/-ve
Zero/-ve
Line/+ve
Zero/-ve
Line/+ve
Zero/-ve
Max 60VAC or DC (for higher
voltages, apply to Rotork)
Max 60VAC or DC (for higher
voltages, apply to Rotork)
17

Analogue control circuits
Analogue Folomatic control only
Analogue Folomatic control with
internally fed remote manual override
26
27
Customer analogue
output signal
26
27
Customer analogue
output signal
Manual
5
5
4
41
Customer
fitted links
4
36
Auto
Customer
fitted links
39
41
39
33
Close contact
35
Open contact
34
Stop/maintain
(optional)
Key
Analogue Folomatic control with
externally fed remote manual override
26
27
5
4
Folomatic +ve
Folomatic -ve
24V DC +ve
24V DC -ve
26
27
36
Customer analogue
output signal
36
40
Control Common 20-60V AC/DC
Control Common 60-120V AC
40
41
Common 20-60V AC or DC
41
Folomatic Common 20-60V AC/DC
45
Common 60-120V AC
45
39
Folomatic Common 60-120V AC
Folomatic manual/auto
39
33
Manual
Auto
Line/+ve
Close contact
33
Remote manual Close
35
Open contact
35
34
Remote manual Open
Remote manual Stop/Maintain
34
Stop/maintain
(optional)
18

IQ
IQT

UK head office
Rotork Controls Limited
tel: +44 (0)1225 733200
fax: +44 (0) 1225 333467
mail@rotork.co.uk
USA head office
Rotork Controls Inc
tel: +1 585 328 1550
fax: +1 585 328 5848
info@rotork.com
Rotork Controls Ltd, Bath, UK
Rotork Controls Inc, Rochester, USA
Australia
tel: +61 353 381566
fax: +61 353 381570
mail@rotork.com.au
Germany
tel: +49 2103 95876
fax: +49 2103 54090
info@rotork.de
Italy (Fluid System)
tel: +39 0583 94811
fax: +39 0583 403482
fluid@fluidsystem.it
Russia
tel: +7 0952292463
fax: +7 503 2349125
rotork.russia@mtu-net.ru
Thailand
tel: +66 2 2727165
fax: +66 2 2727167
mail@rotork.co.th
Canada
tel: +1 403 5699455
fax: +1 403 5699414
info@rotork.ca
Hong Kong
tel: +852 25202390
fax: +852 2 5289746
eric.li@rotork.com.cn
Japan
tel: +81 3 5632 2941
fax: +81 3 5632 2942
mail@rotork.co.jp
Saudi Arabia
tel: +966 3 833 1661
fax: +966 3 833 9369
pknair@alhugayet.com
U.K. (Electrics)
tel: +44 1225 733 200
fax: +44 1225 333 467
mail@rotork.co.uk
China (Shanghai)
tel: +86 21 64785015
fax: +86 21 64785035
crouse.shen@rotork.com.cn
India
tel: +91 44 6254219
fax: +91 44 6257108
rotork@rotork.co.in
Korea (South)
tel: +82 31 2650962
fax: +82 31 2651369
ykkim@rotork.co.kr
Singapore
tel: +65 645 71233
fax: +65 645 76011
philip.seah@rotork.com.sg
U.K. (Fluid System)
tel: +44 113 2057 223
fax: +44 113 2363 310
mark.thomas@fluidsystem.co.uk
China (Beijing)
tel: +86 10 64974142
fax: +86 10 64994591
simon.yang@rotork.com.cn
Indonesia
tel: +62 21 580 6764
fax: +62 21 581 2757
rotork@indosat.net.id
Malaysia
tel: +60 3 7880 9198
fax: +60 3 7880 9189
rotork@rotork.com.my
South Africa
tel: +27 11 4539741
fax: +27 11 4539894
howard.mutters@rotork.co.za
USA
tel: +1 585 3281550
fax: +1 585 328 5848
info@rotork.com
France
tel: +33 1 43 111550
fax: +33 1 48 354254
mail@rotork.fr
Italy (Electrics)
tel: +39 0245 703300
fax: +39 0245 703301
rotork.italia@rotork.it
Netherlands
tel: +31 10 4146911
fax: +31 10 4144750
sales@rotork.nl
Spain
tel: +34 94 6766011
fax: +34 94 6766018
rotork@rotork.es
Venezuela
tel: +58 212 2855232
fax: +58 212 2858050
rotorkvz@cantv.net
A full listing of our worldwide
sales and service network is
available on our website at
www.rotork.com
As part of a process of on-going product development, Rotork reserves the right to amend and change
specifications without prior notice. Published data may be subject to change. For the very latest version
release, visit our website at www.rotork.com
The name Rotork is a registered trademark. Rotork recognizes all registered trademarks.
Published and produced in the UK by Rotork Controls Limited.

IQ Range
Installation and
Maintenance Instructions
Please ensure that this publication is thoroughly read and understood
Publication number E170E2
Date of issue 01/05

The Rotork Setting Tool allows actuator control, indication and protection functions
to be configured to suit site requirements. It is essential that all the actuator
settings are checked for compatibility with the process and control system
requirements before the actuator is put into service. Please read this publication.
When Rotork personnel or nominated agents are contracted to carry out site
commissioning and/or acceptance, documentation of commissioned actuator
configuration can be made available for customer records.

This manual provides instruction on:
* Manual and electrical (local and remote) operation.
* Preparation and installation of the actuator onto
the valve.
* Subsequent commissioning and adjustment of the
Primary Settings for correct valve operation.
* Commissioning and adjustment of the Secondary
Settings to suit site-specific control and indication
requirements.
* Maintenance – Troubleshooting.
* Sales and Service.
Refer to Publication E180E2 for repair, overhaul and
spare part instructions.
THE ROTORK IQ RANGE – THE FIRST VALVE ACTUATOR THAT YOU
CAN COMMISSION AND INTERROGATE WITHOUT REMOVING
ELECTRICAL COVERS.
Using the supplied infra-red Setting Tool to access the actuator set up
procedures, “point and shoot” setting of torque levels, position limits and
all other control and indication functions can be made safely, quickly and
conveniently, even in hazardous locations. The IQ allows commissioning
and adjustment to be carried out with the main power supply to the
actuator switched on or off.
Standard diagnostics access information about the control system, valve
and actuator status in the form of display icons and help screens.
Instantaneous valve torque and position can be monitored on the actuator
with a single key press of the Setting Tool.
The on board Datalogger captures operational and valve torque data
enabling informed maintenance choices to be made. IQ Insight software
for PC and PDA allows the Datalogger to be interrogated, as well as the
complete actuator set up to be configured and recorded.
The actuator containing the Setting Tool will be identified with a yellow
label on the terminal cover.
Visit our web site at www.rotork.com for more information on the IQ and
other Rotork actuator ranges.

CONTENTS
Page
1 Health and Safety 2
3
2 Storage 3
3 Operating your IQ Actuator 3
3.1 Operating by Hand 3
3.2 Operating Electrically 3
3.3 Display – 4
Local Indication
3.4 Display – Alarm Indication 5
4 Preparing Drive Bush 7
4.1 IQ10 to IQ35 7
Thrust Base Types A and Z
4.2 IQ10 to IQ35 8
Non-Thrust Base Type B
4.3 IQ40 to IQ95 8
Thrust Base Types A and Z
4.4 IQ40 to IQ95 9
Non-Thrust Base Type B
5 Mounting the Actuator 10
5.1 Rising Stem Valves – 11
Top Mounting
5.2 Valve with Gearbox – 11
Side Mounting
5.3 Non-Rising Stem Valves – 11
Top Mounting
Page
5.4 Handwheel Sealing 11
5.5 IQM Modulating Actuators 12
5.6 IQML Linear Drive Unit 12
5.7 IQML Adjusting Linear Stroke 12
6 Cable Connections 14
6.1 Earth/Ground Connections 14
6.2 Removing Terminal Cover 14
6.3 Cable Entry 14
6.4 Connecting to Terminals 15
6.5 Replacing Terminal Cover 15
7 Commissioning 16
7.1 The Setting Procedure 16
7.2 The Setting Tool 17
7.3 Entering the Actuator 18
Setting Procedure
7.4 Setting Mode – Password 18
7.5 New Password 18
7.6 Checking Mode 18
7.7 Procedure Branch – 19
Crossroad
7.8 The Actuator Display – 19
Setting/Checking Mode
7.9 Returning to Valve 19
Position Display
Page
8 Commissioning –
Primary Functions 20
Primary Functions Contents 21
9 Commissioning –
Secondary Functions 29
Secondary Functions Contents 31
Default Options 63
10 Maintenance, Monitoring
and Troubleshooting 65
10.1 Help Screens 67
10.2 IrDA Diagnostics & Configuration 72
11 Weights and Measures 74
Binary, Hexadecimal and Decimal 75
Conversion Table
12 IQ Approvals 76
1

1
Health and Safety
2
This manual is produced to enable a
competent user to install, operate,
adjust and inspect Rotork IQ range
valve actuators.
The electrical installation, maintenance
and use of these actuators should be
carried out in accordance with the
National Legislation and Statutory
Provisions relating to the safe use of
this equipment, applicable to the site of
installation.
For the UK: Electricity at Work
Regulations 1989 and the guidance
given in the applicable edition of the
“IEE Wiring Regulations’’ should be
applied. Also the user should be fully
aware of his duties under the Health
and Safety Act 1974.
For the USA: NFPA70, National Electrical
Code ® is applicable.
The mechanical installation should be
carried out as outlined in the manual
and also in accordance with relevant
standards such as British Standard
Codes of Practice. If the actuator has
nameplates indicating that it is suitable
for installation in Hazardous Gas Areas
then the actuator is suitable for use in
Zone 1 and Zone 2 (or Div 1 and Div 2)
explosive atmospheres only. It should
not be installed in atmospheres where
gases are present with an ignition
temperature less than 135°C, unless
suitability for lower ignition
temperatures has been indicated on the
actuator nameplate.
Any test instruments applied to the
actuator should be of equivalent
certification. The electrical installation,
maintenance and the use of the
actuator should be carried out in
accordance with the code of practice
relevant for that particular Hazardous
Gas Area certification.
No inspection or repair should be
undertaken unless it conforms to the
specific Hazardous Gas Area
certification requirements. Under no
circumstances should any modification
or alteration be carried out on the
actuator as this could invalidate the
conditions under which its certification
was granted.
Access to live electrical conductors is
forbidden in the hazardous area unless
this is done under a special permit to
work, otherwise all power should be
isolated and the actuator moved to a
non-hazardous area for repair or
attention.
Only persons competent by virtue of
their training or experience should be
allowed to install, maintain and repair
Rotork actuators. Work undertaken
must be carried out in accordance with
instructions in the manual. The user
and those persons working on this
equipment should be familiar with their
responsibilities under any statutory
provisions relating to the Health and
Safety of their workplace.
WARNING:
Motor Temperature
With excessive use the motor surface
temperature could reach 132ºC (270ºF).
Thermostat Bypass
If the actuator is configured to bypass
the motor thermostat, when using the
ESD function, the hazardous area
certification will be invalidated.
Control and Indication
Where the actuator build allows remote
control and indication supplies higher
than 150V a.c. but below 300V a.c.
(refer to actuator wiring diagram) the
remote control and indication supplies
must be derived from a supply which is
designated as installation category
(overvoltage category) ll as defined in
BSEN 61010 (Safety Requirements For
Electrical Equipment for measurement,
control and laboratory use).
Enclosure Materials
IQ10 to IQ35 are manufactured from
aluminium alloy with stainless steel
fasteners and the thrust bases are
manufactured in cast iron. IQ40 to IQ95
enclosures are manufactured in
aluminium alloy and cast iron with
stainless steel fasteners and the thrust
bases are manufactured in cast iron.
The user must ensure that the
operating environment and any
materials surrounding the actuator
cannot lead to a reduction in the safe
use of, or the protection afforded by,
the actuator. Where appropriate the
user must ensure the actuator is
suitably protected against it’s operating
environment.
Should further information and
guidance relating to the safe use of the
Rotork IQ range of actuators be
required, it will be provided on request.
WARNING: Operating by Hand
With respect to handwheel operation
of Rotork electric actuators, see
warning on p3.

2
Storage
3 Operating your
IQ Actuator
3
If your actuator cannot be installed
immediately store it in a dry place until
you are ready to connect incoming
cables.
If the actuator has to be installed but
cannot be cabled it is recommended
that the plastic transit cable entry plugs
are replaced with metal plugs which are
sealed with PTFE tape.
The Rotork double-sealed construction
will preserve internal electrical
components perfectly if left
undisturbed.
It is not necessary to remove any
electrical compartment covers in order
to commission the IQ actuator.
Rotork cannot accept responsibility for
deterioration caused on-site once the
covers are removed.
Every Rotork actuator has been fully
tested before leaving the factory to give
years of trouble free operation,
providing it is correctly commissioned,
installed and sealed.
3.1 Operating by Hand
WARNING
With respect to handwheel
operation of Rotork electric
actuators, under no circumstances
should any additional lever
device such as a wheel-key or
wrench be applied to the
handwheel in order to develop
more force when closing or
opening the valve as this may
cause damage to the valve and/or
actuator or may cause the valve
to become stuck in the
seated/backseated position.
Fig. 3
To engage handwheel drive depress the
Hand/Auto lever into “Hand” position
and turn the handwheel to engage the
clutch. The lever can now be released
when it will return to its original
position. The handwheel will remain
engaged until the actuator is operated
electrically when it will automatically
disengage and return to motor drive. If
required the Hand/Auto lever can be
locked in either position using a
padlock with a 6.5mm hasp.
3.2 Operating Electrically
Check that power supply voltage agrees
with that stamped on the actuator
nameplate. Switch on power supply. It
is not necessary to check phase
rotation.
Do not operate the actuator
electrically without first checking,
using the infra-red Setting Tool,
that at least the Primary Settings
have been made (refer to Section 8
page 20).
Selecting Local/Stop/Remote
Operation
The red selector enables either Local or
Remote control, lockable in each position
using a padlock with a 6.5mm hasp.
When the selector is locked in the Local
or Remote positions the Stop facility is
still available. The selector can also be
locked in the Stop position to prevent
electrical operation by Local or Remote
control.
Fig. 3.1
Local Control
With the red selector positioned at
Local (anti-clockwise) the adjacent black
knob can be turned to select Open or
Close. For Stop, turn red knob
clockwise.
Remote Control
Rotate the red selector to the Remote
position (clockwise), this gives remote

4
control only for Open and Close but
local Stop can still be used by turning
the red knob anti-clockwise.
3.3 Display–Local Indication
3
2
4
1
The liquid crystal display screen has 2
modes of position indication:
1. Valve position – power on
2. Valve position – power off
On power up the actuator’s liquid
crystal display screen is back-lit with a
“soft amber” light and one of the
indicator lamps will be on, dependent
on position. The display screen will
show percentage open or an end of
travel symbol. (See Figs 3.3, 3.4 and
3.5)
As standard, red lamp signifies valve
open, yellow intermediate, and green
lamp signifies valve closed. Open and
closed colour functions can be reversed
on request.
Open
Red indicator and open symbol
displayed
Closed
Green indicator and closed symbol
displayed
5
Fig. 3.2 The Actuator Display
The display consists of:
1. Red – position indication lamp
2. Yellow – position indication lamp
3. Green – position indication lamp
4. Liquid crystal display screen (LCD)
5. Infra-red sensors
6. Infra-red signal confirmation
indicator (Red)
6
Fig. 3.3
Mid Travel
Yellow indicator and percentage open
value displayed
Fig. 3.5
With the main power supply switched
off, the liquid crystal display screen is
powered by a battery and continues to
display actuator position. However, the
battery does not support screen backlighting,
or position indicator lamps.
Fig. 3.4

5
3.4 Display–Alarm Indication
The IQ display incorporates valve,
control system, actuator and battery
alarm indication in the form of four
display icons. Located in the top portion
of the display, each icon represents
certain alarm conditions. Standard help
screens are also available to assist in
determining the actuator operational
and alarm status (refer to Help Screens
page 67).
Fig. 3.6
Valve Alarm
The valve alarm icon, Fig 3.6, is
displayed when a valve problem causes
the actuator to “trip-off’’ due to the
configured torque value being
developed (refer to [tC]/[tO] pages
25/26).The possible causes are:
• Valve tight or obstructed in mid travel.
• Valve stuck or jammed
• Valve process conditions changed
(increase in pressure, flow etc.)
Once the actuator has tripped off on
torque, electrical operation in the same
direction is inhibited. The icon will
remain displayed until movement in the
opposite direction takes place.
The valve alarm icon will not be
displayed when stopping at end of
travel for valves configured to torque
seat or torque back seat at end of
travel (refer to [C2]/[C3] pages 23/24).
Try handwheel operation of the valve to
‘‘feel’’ for stiffness (refer to page 3).
Control Alarm
Fig. 3.7
The control system alarm icon, Fig 4.5,
is displayed when the remote control
system maintains an active ESD or
interlock signal (the ESD, interlock
function or conditional control having
been enabled.)
Local and Remote operation will be
inhibited while an active ESD or
interlock signal is present (refer to [A1]
ESD Action page 34, [A8] External
Interlocks page 36 and Conditional
Control [A9] page 36.)
Investigate the operational conditions
of the actuator remote control system.

6
Actuator Alarm
Fig. 3.8
The actuator alarm icon, Fig. 3.8, is
displayed when an active actuator
alarm is present.
Electrical operation will be inhibited
while an alarm is present. The possible
causes are:
• Transformer thermostat tripped
• Battery low on power up*
• Power supply fault
*see Battery Alarm
(To identify the specific cause of the
alarm refer to Help Screens pages
67-71).
Battery Alarm
Fig. 3.9
The battery alarm icon, Fig. 3.9, is
displayed when the actuator detects its
battery as being low, discharged or
missing.
If, on power up, the actuator detects a
discharged battery and actuator power
loss inhibit feature [OS] is enabled
(refer to page 62), both battery and
actuator alarm icons (Fig.3.8 and 3.9)
will be displayed. Electrical operation
will be inhibited.
When the battery alarm icon
is displayed, the battery should be
replaced immediately (refer to page 65).
The actuator checks the battery status
at approximately 10 minute intervals.
After replacing a battery the alarm icon
will continue to be displayed until the
next check indicates the battery is
healthy. This may take up to 10
minutes.

4
Preparing Drive Bush
7
4.1 IQ10 to IQ35
Thrust Base Types A and Z
Removal of Drive Bush for
Machining
Fig. 4 Bronze Drive Bush Fitted into
Thrust Taking Base
Turn actuator onto its side, remove the
two cap-headed screws holding base
plate onto thrust base, pull out the
drive bush complete with its bearing
assembly.
Before machining the drive bush the
thrust bearing must be removed.
IQ10, IQ12 and IQ18 actuators have a
sealed thrust bearing located on the
drive bush and retained by the steel
Fig. 4.1 Components of Type A
Thrust Base
bearing stop ring. The bearing stop ring
is locked with one socket set screw.
IQ20, IQ25 and IQ35 have a thrust race
ball bearing within the steel bearing
housing, located on the drive bush and
retained by the steel bearing stop ring.
The bearing is sealed within its housing
by O-rings located on the drive bush
and on the bearing stop ring. The
bearing stop ring is locked with two
socket set screws.
1. Locate and loosen the locking socket
set screw(s) in the bearing stop ring.
2. Unscrew the bearing stop from the
drive bush. Slide the bearing off the
drive bush. Keep the drive bush and
stop ring in a safe clean place.
3. For all sizes ensure the drive bush
male thread (stop ring) is not
damaged during machining. For sizes
IQ20, IQ25 & IQ35, ensure the O-ring
located in the drive bush is not
damaged during machining. Machine
drive bush to suit the valve stem,
allowing generous clearance on the
screw thread for rising stem valves.
Re-assembly
1. Remove all swarf from the drive
bush, ensuring the O rings on the
drive bush and bearing stop ring
(where fitted) are undamaged, clean
and greased.
2. Slide the bearing assembly onto the
drive bush and ensure it is fitted
down to the drive bush shoulder.
3. Screw the stop ring with the locking
socket set screw(s) uppermost on to
the drive bush until it comes to a
stop – hand tight and lock with the
locking socket set screws. The
locking socket set screws must be
done up tight to prevent the
assembly working loose, as shown in
Fig 4.2. Refer to the table below for
required tightening torques.
Socket set Allen key Torque Torque
screw size bit size Nm lbs/ft
M4 M2 2.2 1.62
M6 M3 7.8 5.75
Fig. 4.2
4. Refit the drive bush assembly into
the base casting on the actuator,
ensuring that the slots in the drive
bush are located into the drive dogs
of the hollow output shaft.
5. Refit the base plate and secure with
cap-headed screws.

8
4.2 IQ10 to IQ35
Non-Thrust Base Type B
Undo the four set screws securing the
base plate to the gearcase and remove
the base plate.
The drive bush and its retaining clip can
now be seen.
Types B3 and B4 removal:
(refer to Fig. 4.3)
Using external circlip pliers, expand the
circlip while pulling on the drive bush.
The drive bush will detach from the
actuator centre column with the circlip
retained in its groove.
Fig. 4.4
Type B1
(Refer to Fig. 4.4)
The procedure for removal and refitting
of the B1 drive bush is the and same as
for B3 and B4, However the circlip is
replaced with a custom spring clip. The
spring clip operates in the same manner
as the B3/B4 circlip but is expanded
using long-nose pliers.
Fig. 4.5 Locating Set Screw
Loosen set screw and unscrew retainer
using hammer and punch. Remove
drive bush and machine to suit valve
stem or gearbox input shaft.
Allow generous clearance on screw
thread for rising stem valves.
Fig. 4.7 Type A Drive Bush
If the actuator has a type A drive bush
(Fig. 4.7) this can be fitted in position 1
or 2 to suit the position of the valve
mounting flange.
4.3 IQ40 to IQ95
Thrust Base Types A and Z
Removal of Drive Bush for
Machining
Engage “hand” and turn handwheel
until retainer set screw is visible through
hole in actuator base.
Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.8 Type A Drive Bush in
Position 1
Fig. 4.6 Removal of Retainer

9
Fig. 4.9 Type A Drive Bush in
Position 2
If the actuator has a type Z3 drive bush
(Fig. 4.10) this can only be fitted below
the actuator base (Fig. 4.11).
Fig. 4.10 Type Z3 Drive Bush
Fig. 4.11 Type Z3 Drive Bush in
Position 3
Re-Assembly
Having confirmed the position required,
insert the machined drive bush ensuring
that the actuator output shaft dogs are
in full engagement with the bush. Fit
drive bush retainer securely, turning
clockwise until fully tightened using
hammer and punch. Rotate by hand
wheel to align retainer set screw with
hole in the side of base and tighten.
4.4 IQ40 to IQ95
Non-Thrust Base Type B
Type B1
Output shaft bored and keyed to ISO
5210 standard. There is no drive bush
to machine.
Fig. 4.12 Tightening Retainer Set
Screw
Types B3 and B4
Identical drive bushes secured by cap
headed screws.
B3 is supplied pre-machined to ISO
5210 standard.
B4 is supplied blank and must be
machined to suit the input shaft of the
gearbox or valve that it will drive.
Fig. 4.13 B3/B4 Drive Bush
Fig. 4.14 B3/B4 Drive Bush in Situ

5
Mounting the Actuator
10
(Refer to Weights and Measures page 74 for actuator weight.)
Ensure the valve is secure before fitting the actuator as the combination may be top
heavy and therefore unstable.
If it is necessary to lift the actuator using mechanical lifting equipment certified
slings should be attached as indicated in Fig.5 for vertical valve shafts and Fig.5.1
for horizontal shafts.
At all times trained and experienced personnel should ensure safe lifting,
particularly when mounting actuators.
WARNING:
The actuator should be fully supported until full valve shaft
engagement is achieved and the actuator is secured to the valve
flange.
A suitable mounting flange conforming to ISO 5210 or USA Standard MSS SP101
must be fitted to the valve.
Actuator to valve fixing must conform to Material Specification ISO Class 8.8, yield
strength 628 N/sq mm.
WARNING:
Do not lift the actuator and valve combination via the actuator. Always
lift the valve/actuator assembly via the valve.
Each assembly must be assessed on an individual basis for safe lifting.
Fig. 5
Fig. 5.1

11
5.1 Rising Stem Valves –
Top Mounting
a) Fitting the Actuator and
Base as a Combined Unit –
All Actuator Sizes
Fit the machined drive bush into the
thrust base as previously described,
lower the actuator onto the threaded
valve stem, engage “hand” and wind
the handwheel in the opening direction
to engage the drive bush onto the
stem. Continue winding until the
actuator is firmly down on the valve
flange. Wind two further turns, fit
securing bolts and tighten fully.
5.2 Valve with Gearbox –
Side Mounting
Check that the mounting flange is at
right angles to the input shaft, and that
the drive bush fits the shaft and key
with adequate axial engagement.
Engage “hand”, offer up actuator to
the input shaft and turn handwheel to
align keyway and key. Tighten
mounting bolts.
Fig. 5.2
b) Fitting Thrust Base to Valve –
Actuator Sizes 10 to 35 only
Fit the machined drive bush into the
thrust base as previously described.
Remove the thrust base from the
actuator, place it on the threaded valve
stem with the slotted end of the drive
bush uppermost and turn it in the
opening direction to engage the thread.
Continue turning until the base is
positioned onto the valve flange. Fit
securing bolts but do not tighten at this
stage. Lower the actuator onto the
thrust base and rotate the complete
actuator until the drive dogs on the
actuator output shaft engage into the
drive bush. Actuator flange should now
be flush with base flange.
Fig. 5.3
Continue to turn actuator until fixing
holes align. Using bolts supplied fix
actuator to thrust base and tighten
down. Open valve by two turns and
firmly tighten down fixings onto valve
flange.
5.3 Non-Rising Stem Valves –
Top Mounting
Treat as for side mounting except that
when thrust is taken in the actuator, a
thrust nut must be fitted above the
drive bush and securely tightened.
5.4 Handwheel Sealing
Ensure that sealing plug in centre of
handwheel (or spindle cover tube
depending on which is fitted) is sealed
with PTFE tape and fully tightened,
ensuring that moisture does not pass
down the centre column of the
actuator.

12
5.5 IQM Modulating Actuators
The IQM range of actuators are suitable
for modulating control duty of up to
1200 starts per hour in accordance with
IEC 34-1 to S4 50%.
IQM actuators have a dynamic braking
facility as standard. If mechanical
overrun of the actuator and valve prove
to be excessive for accurate control, the
brake can be enabled by fitting a link to
the actuator terminal block as indicated
by the wiring diagram. With dynamic
braking enabled, motor heating effects
increase and therefore the number of
actuator starts should be reduced to
prevent motor thermostat tripping
(refer to publication E 410E for more
information).
Commissioning of IQM range actuators
is identical to the standard IQ (refer to
Sections 7, 8 and 9 commencing on
page 16).
5.6 IQML Linear Drive Unit
Consists of a lead screw assembly
arrangement attached to the base of
the actuator in order to provide a linear
output stroke between 8mm ( 3 /8 in)
minimum and 120mm (4 3 /4in)
maximum.
The IQML can be supplied with or
without a yoke mounting adaptor.
This adaptor consists of four pillars and
a base flange to suit the valve.
Fig. 5.5 IQML without Yoke
5.7 IQML Adjusting Linear Stroke
With actuator securely fitted to valve,
but with the linear drive disconnected,
ensure valve is at its fully closed (down)
position.
Remove cover tube from actuator
handwheel, locate the down stop
adjustment on the linear drive unit and
with two spanners loosen the lock nut,
run the lock nut and tubular down stop
to the end of the thread.
Fig. 5.6 Down Stop two Spanners
Fig. 5.4 IQML with Yoke

13
5.7 IQML Adjusting Linear Stroke
continued
Turn the actuator handwheel clockwise,
linear drive will move down towards
the valve spindle, couple linear drive to
valve spindle.
Turn the tubular down stop clockwise
into the actuator until it comes to a
mechanical stop. If the valve must close
onto its seat by “TORQUE ACTION”
then back off (anti-clockwise) the down
stop by one third of one turn
(equivalent to 1mm). Run the lock nut
down ontothe tubular down stop and
tighten with two spanners. There is no
“up stop” (open) on the linear drive
unit, the mechanical stop in the valve
will give this position. Refit the top
cover tube to the handwheel using
PTFE tape to seal the thread.
The linear drive unit is pre-packed with
grease type Rocol MTS 1000, use this
or an equivalent high temperaturebearing
grease.
A grease nipple is situated in the base
of the actuator to enable lubrication of
the lead screw. Periodically, depending
on usage and temperature, apply two
pumps of a grease gun.

6
Cable Connections
14
WARNING:
Ensure all power supplies are
isolated before removing
actuator covers.
Check that the supply voltage agrees
with that stamped on actuator
nameplate.
A switch or circuit breaker must be
included in the wiring installation of the
actuator. The switch or circuit breaker
shall be mounted as close to the
actuator as possible and shall be
marked to indicate that it is the
disconnecting device for that particular
actuator. The actuator must be
protected with overcurrent protection
devices rated in accordance with Rotork
publication No. E130E Electric motor
performance data for IQ range
actuators.
WARNING:
Actuators for use on phase to
phase voltages greater than 600V
a.c.must not be used on supply
systems such as floating, or
earth-phase systems, where
phase to earth voltages in excess
of 600V a.c. could exist.
6.1 Earth/Ground Connections
A lug with a 6mm diameter hole is cast
adjacent to the conduit entries for
attachment of an external protective
earthing strap by a nut and bolt. An
internal earth terminal is also provided,
however it must not be used alone as
the protective Earth Connection.
6.2 Removing Terminal Cover
Using a 6mm Allen key loosen the four
captive screws evenly. Do not attempt
to lever off the cover with a screwdriver
as this will damage the “O” ring seal
and may damage the flamepath on a
certified unit.
Fig. 6
Actuators containing a Setting Tool
fitted to the inside of the terminal
compartment cover are identified with
a self-adhesive yellow label on the
outside of the terminal compartment
cover.
The wiring code card fixed in the cover
is particular to each actuator and must
not be interchanged with any other
actuator. If in doubt check the serial
number on the code card with that of
the actuator.
Fig. 6.1
A plastic bag in the terminal
compartment contains:
Terminal screws and washers.
Spare cover “O” ring seal.
Wiring diagram.
Instruction book.
Fig. 6.2
6.3 Cable Entry
Only appropriate certified Explosion-
Proof entry reducers, glands or conduit
may be used in hazardous locations.
Remove red plastic transit plugs. Make
cable entries appropriate to the cable
type and size. Ensure that threaded
adaptors, cable glands or conduit are
tight and fully waterproof. Seal unused
cable entries with a steel or brass
threaded plug. In hazardous areas an
appropriately certified threaded
blanking plug must be used.

15
6.4 Connecting to Terminals
On EExde enclosure units connections
to the power and control terminals
must be made using AMP type 160292
ring tabs for power and earth terminals
and AMP type 34148 ring tabs for the
control terminals.
Refer to the wiring diagram inside the
terminal cover to identify functions of
terminals. Check that supply voltage is
the same as that marked on the
actuator nameplate.
Remove power terminal screen.
Begin by connecting these cables and
replace screen.
When all connections are made ensure
wiring diagram is replaced in the
terminal compartment.
6.5 Replacing Terminal Cover
Ensure cover “O” ring seal and spigot
joint are in good condition and lightly
greased before re-fitting cover.

7
Commissioning
16
7.1 The Setting Procedure
The Rotork IQ range of actuators is the
first that enables commissioning to be
carried out without removing covers.
Setting torque, limit and other
functions is achieved by using the Infra-
Red Setting Tool. The Setting Tool is
certified Intrinsically Safe to allow
commissioning in hazardous areas.
All the commissioning functions are
stored in non-volatile memory in the
actuator. The Setting Tool enables the
user to view all the functions in turn via
the actuator display window. As each
function is viewed its setting can be
checked and, if required, changed
within the bounds of that function.
Commissioning may be carried out with
main power switched on or off. Refer
to page 20 for Power Off Setting.
The setting procedure is divided into
two stages:
1. Primary Functions
Settings for end of travel limit
actions, torque values, limit
positions etc.
2. Secondary Functions
Settings covering the control,
indication and optional
equipment functions.
All IQ actuator functions are
configured before dispatch to
Rotork standard default settings
unless alternatives have been
specified with the order. Should
difficulty be encountered during
commissioning the default
settings can be reinstated,
returning the actuator
configuration to its original
manufactured state. Site
commissioning can then begin
again (refer to Section 9.16 page 63).
The default function should be used
with caution as settings selected after
manufacture may be essential for the
safe operation of the valve and/or
plant.
Actuator Display
Position Display 50 This may be an open or closed symbol
◗
or a percentage open value.
Torque and Position Refer to Section 10.
◗
Password P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
Setting Branch cr ❖
(crossroad)
◗
Note: The Primary Functions
must be commissioned first.
Primary Functions
Direction
Limit Actions
Torque Values
Limit Positions
Secondary Functions
Indication Contacts
Control Mode
Options
Help Screens
Defaults

17
7.2 The Setting Tool
Specification
Enclosure IP67
Certification EEx ia IIC T4 (intrinsically safe)
FM, INT SAFE, Class I & II Div 1 Groups A B C D E F G, T4A
CSA, Exia, Class I, II Div 1 Groups A B C D
Power supply 9V Battery (supplied and fitted)
Operating range 0.75m (from actuator display window)
Name
Instruction
1. ◗ Key* Display next function down
2. ❖ Key* Display next function across
3. - Key Decrease/change displayed function’s value or option setting
4. + Key Increase/change displayed function’s value or option setting
5. Key Enter displayed value or option setting
* Pressing the two arrow keys together returns the actuator display to the position
indication mode
Infra-red local operation (when enabled)
5. Key Stop actuator
6. Key Open actuator
7. Key Close actuator
8. Infra-red Transmitter Window
8 2
1
3
5
Fig. 7 The Setting Tool
7
4
Setting Tool Battery Replacement
Battery status can be checked by looking at the Infra-red transmitter window while
depressing any Setting Tool button. A flashing red indicator should be seen.
Battery replacement must be carried out in a safe area. To replace the battery
remove the six caphead screws in the back of the Setting Tool. Remove the back
cover to expose the battery.
In order to maintain hazardous area certification fit only Duracell MN1604 or
Rayovac Alkaline Maximum NoAL-9V battery types. Refit cover ensuring red
indicator LED faces the transmitter window in the back cover.
When a button is depressed the Setting Tool transmits the relevant instruction to
the actuator by infra-red pulses and must therefore be directly in front of the
actuator indicator window and at a distance no greater than 0.75m.
6

18
7.3 Entering the Actuator
Setting Procedure
With the actuator securely mounted on
the valve, the mains supply on and
Local control or Stop selected.
PRESS THE ◗ KEY.
The actuator display will change and
the Torque & Position display will be
seen. (For instantaneous torque &
position monitoring, refer to Section
10, page 66.)
PRESS THE ◗ KEY.
The actuator display will change and
the password protection display will
be seen.
The Actuator Function Settings
can be protected by the Use
of a Password
7.4 Setting Mode – Password
To enable setting and adjustment of the
actuator functions the correct password
must be entered. The factory set (default)
password is [ld]. If the actuator has
previously been set with a site password
this must be displayed.
Use the + or - keys to scroll through the
available passwords 00–FF (hexadecimal).
With the correct password displayed press
the enter key.
PRESS THE KEY.
Two “setting” bars will appear and will
remain visible on every function display
screen.
Default Password,
Setting Mode Enabled
7.5 New Password [PC]
To configure a new password, the
actuator must be in setting mode with
the password display – setting mode
enabled – showing,
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.
The display will change to [PC]. Using the
+ or - key scroll through the available
passwords until the desired password is
displayed.
PRESS THE KEY.
Password Changed to [IE]
NOTE: The new password becomes
effective the next time setting mode is
entered.
7.6 Checking Mode
The actuator function settings can be
checked without entering the correct
password. The settings can only be
viewed and not altered. The setting bars
will not be seen.
Password Display, Checking Mode
Once the procedure has been entered in
the required mode
PRESS THE ◗ KEY.
The procedure branch [Cr] (crossroad)
display can now be seen (refer to Section
7.7 page 19).

19
7.7 Procedure Branch –
Crossroad [Cr]
To access the Primary Function settings
press the arrow ◗ key (refer to
Section 8 Commissioning Primary
Functions page 20).
To access the Secondary Function
settings press the arrow ❖ key (refer
to Section 9 Commissioning Secondary
Functions page 31).
7.8 The Actuator Display –
Setting/Checking Mode
Actuator functions as laid out in the
Primary and Secondary commissioning
stages, can be individually displayed by
using the Setting Tool arrow keys.
The ◗ arrow key will always display
the FIRST function on the next level
DOWN within the procedure.
The ❖ arrow key will always display
the NEXT function on the SAME level
and will wrap around the functions on
the same level.
The actuator display indicator lamps will
continue to indicate valve position.
Actuator functions are displayed in
code form in the top portion of the
liquid crystal display screen.
The setting for the displayed function is
shown in the lower portion of the
screen. Depending on the actuator
function displayed, its setting may be
an option or a value. In setting mode
the Setting
Tool + or - keys will cause the setting
to be changed. In checking mode the
settings cannot be altered.
In setting mode, once displayed, a new
setting can be entered into the actuator
memory by pressing the key.
The setting will flash off and back on,
confirming its selection.
TOP PORTION
Function e.g.
tC = Torque Close
LOWER PORTION
Function Setting
e.g. Value = 40%
Typical Actuator Function Display
Setting Mode Enabled
7.9 Returning to
Valve Position Display
There are four ways of returning to
valve position display:
1. Approximately 5 minutes after the
last Setting Tool operation the
display will automatically return to
position display.
2. Press the ◗ and ❖ arrow keys
together.
3. Press the ◗ arrow key until the
display returns to position.
4. With any actuator function screen
displayed, select Remote control
using the red Local/Stop/Remote
selector.

Fig. 8
8 Commissioning –
Primary Functions
The actuator’s Primary Function settings
affect the correct operation of the valve
by the actuator. If the actuator has
been supplied with the valve, the valve
maker or supplier may have already
made these settings.
ELECTRICAL OPERATION MUST NOT
TAKE PLACE UNTIL THE PRIMARY
SETTINGS HAVE BEEN MADE AND
CHECKED.
This instruction assumes setting mode
has been entered (refer to section 7.4
page 18).
Viewing the Primary
Function Settings
With the actuator mounted on the
valve, the power supply on and Local or
Stop control selected, point the Setting
Tool at the actuator indicator window
from a distance of no more than
0.75m. By pressing the ◗ key and,
when appropriate, the ❖ key, it is
possible to move through the
procedure, displaying the various
functions and their settings as shown in
Fig. 8.1 (refer to page 21).The righthand
side of Fig.8.1 explains the
function of each LCD display.
20
Power Off Setting
IQ allows settings to be viewed and set
without main power. To enable this
function, engage handwheel drive and
rotate until the output drive moves
(refer to page 3). The Setting Tool can
now be used. As long as a Setting Tool
key press takes place within the 30
seconds timeout period, Power Off
Setting will remain enabled. If no infrared
Setting Tool communication takes
place the display will return to
indicating position. The actuator must
then be operated by handwheel to
re-enable Power Off Setting.
Settings and operation must be
verified by electric operation and
function test of the actuator to
ensure correct operation.

21
Viewing the Primary Function Settings
Position Display
50 (This may be an open or closed symbol or a % open value.) Refer to Section 7
◗ ◗ Commissioning
◗
Torque and Position Display
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic Password ❖ Password Change ❖ IrDA ❖ Cell Phone
◗
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
Procedure Branch (crossroad)
◗
Direction to Close ❖ Close Action ❖ Open Action
◗
Torque Value Closing ❖ Torque Value Opening
◗
Limit Closed ❖ Limit Open
◗
50 Position Display
Fig. 8.1 Primary Setting Function Displays
PRIMARY FUNCTIONS CONTENTS
page
C1 Direction to Close 22
C2 Close Action 23
C3 Open Action 24
tC Torque Value Closing 25
tO Torque Value Opening 26
LC Set Limit Closed 27
LO Set Limit Open 27
The actuator can be configured to be clockwise or anti-clockwise to close.

C1
Direction to Close
22
Manually operate actuator and valve to
establish correct closing direction. If the
handwheel labelling is found to be
incorrect please apply to Rotork for
conversion labels.
50
◗
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
Using the + or - key, display character
conforming to correct closing direction.
[C] in the Setting Field Indicating
Clockwise to Close
[A] in the Setting Field Indicating
Anti-clockwise to Close
Having ensured that the display
corresponds to the established
closing direction
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash,
indicating that it has been set.
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.

C2
Close Action
23
The actuator can be configured to close
on torque for seating valves and limit
for non-seating valves.
(Refer to valve manufacturer for
recommended selection).
In the absence of valvemaker
instructions refer to the following table
Using the + or - key, display the
desired option.
NOTE: When set to close on torque,
the actuator will apply the value of
torque as set for [tC] in seating the
valve (refer to [tC] page 25).
50
◗
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
Valve type Close Open
Wedge gate “torque” “limit”
Globe “torque” “limit”
Butterfly “limit” “limit”
Thru conduit “limit” “limit”
Ball “limit” “limit”
Plug “limit” “limit”
Sluice gate “limit” “limit”
Penstock “limit” “limit”
Parallel slide “limit” “limit”
[Ct] in the Setting Field Indicating
Close on Torque - defualt setting.
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
[CL] in the Setting Field Indicating
Close on Limit
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
Having selected the required option
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash,
indicating that it has been set.
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.

C3
Open Action
24
The actuator can be configured to
open on torque for back seating valves
or limit for non back seating valves.
Refer to valve manufacturer for
recommended setting. In the
absence of valvemaker instructions
set “Open Limit”.
Using the + or - key display the desired
option.
NOTE: When set to open on torque,
the actuator will apply the value of
torque as set for [tO] in back seating
the valve (refer to [tO] page 26).
50
◗
[Ot] in the Setting Field Indicates
Open on Torque - defualt setting.
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
[OL] in the Setting Field Indicates
Open on Limit
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash,
indicating that it has been set.
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.

tC
Torque Value Closing
25
The value of torque available in the
close direction can be configured. Refer
to valve manufacturer for
recommended value.
The closing torque value can be varied
between 40% and Rated, in 1%
increments.
50
◗
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
Using the + and - keys display
recommended value. In the absence of
a recommended torque value, try a low
setting and increase until satisfactory
valve operation is achieved.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash, indicating
that it has been set.
Should the set value of torque be
developed in closing, the actuator will
torque trip and stop.
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.
NOTE: Rated torque is quoted on the
actuator nameplate.
40% of Rated Torque
99% of Rated Torque
Rated Torque

tO
Torque Valve Opening
26
The value of torque available in the
open direction can be configured. Refer
to valve manufacturer for
recommended value.
The opening torque value can be varied
between 40% and Rated, in 1%
increments. In addition “Boost” can be
configured when no open torque
protection is required.
Should the set value of torque be
developed in opening, the actuator will
torque trip and stop.
PRESS THE ◗ KEY.
50
◗
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
BOOST SHOULD NOT BE
SELECTED WHEN THE ACTUATOR
HAS BEEN CONFIGURED TO OPEN
ON TORQUE (refer to [C3] page 24)
unless back seating at Rated torque is
acceptable.
Using the + and - keys display the
recommended torque value.
In the absence of a recommended
torque value, try a low setting and
increase until satisfactory valve
operation is achieved.
NOTE: Rated torque is quoted on the
actuator nameplate. Boost torque is at
least 140% of Rated torque.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash, indicating
that it has been set.
40%
99%
Rated
Boost
In checking mode, on pressing the ◗
key after reviewing open torque setting,
the display will revert to valve position.

LC
Set Limit Closed
LO
Set Limit Open
27
NOTE: It is possible to set the Open
Limit Position [LO] first.
With [LC] displayed
50
◗
With [LO] displayed
50
◗
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
Limit Closed
Move valve manually to the closed
position. Allow for overrun by winding
actuator output open by two
handwheel turns.
PRESS THE KEY.
The two bars will flash and the closed
indicator lamp will illuminate, indicating
closed limit position has been set.
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.
To check closed limit position hand
wind valve open until the amber lamp
illuminates. Wind valve back closed
until the closed lamp illuminates.
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
NOTE: When in checking mode Set
Limit Open [LO] does not appear.
Limit Open
Move valve manually to the open
position. Allow for overrun by winding
actuator output closed by two
handwheel turns.
PRESS THE KEY.
The two bars will flash and the open
indicator lamp will illuminate, indicating
open limit position has been set.
PRESS THE ◗ KEY.
The open symbol (refer to Fig. 3.3.
page 4) should now appear.
NOTE: When in checking mode Set
Limit Closed [LC] does not appear.

Return to
Positional Display
28
50
◗
◗
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗
cr
◗
c1 ❖ c2 ❖ c3
◗
tC ❖ tO
◗
LC ❖ LO
◗
50
If the procedure has been followed as
described, the positional display will
indicate that the actuator is in the open
position.
Select Remote control momentarily,
using the red selector to exit setting
procedure and then select required
control: Local, Stop or Remote.
With the correct settings made electric
operation can now be carried out
safely.

Fig. 9
9 Commissioning –
Secondary Functions
The Secondary Functions can be
configured to suit site control and
indication requirements. It is important
that Primary Functions such as limits
and torque switch settings are set
before work commences on
commissioning the Secondary Functions
(refer to page 20). The layout of the
Secondary Functions accessed with the
Setting Tool are detailed in Fig. 9.1. To
successfully commission the Secondary
Functions, information about the site or
process control system will be required.
The supplied actuator Wiring Diagram
details control and indication devices
fitted to the actuator along with
terminal connection detail and standard
remote control wiring systems.
29
Power Off Setting
IQ allows settings to be viewed and set
without main power. To enable this
function, engage handwheel drive and
rotate until the output drive moves by
one turn (refer to page 3).The
Setting Tool can now be used. As long
as a Setting Tool key press takes place
within the 30 seconds timeout period,
Power Off Setting will remain enabled.
If no infra-red Setting Tool
communication takes place the display
will return to indicating position. The
actuator must then be operated by
handwheel to re-enable Power Off
Setting.
Settings and operation must be
verified by electric operation and
function test of the actuator to
ensure correct operation.

30
50
◗
Positional Display
IrDA Cell
◗
comms Phone
P? ❖ PC ❖ Ir ❖ Ic
◗ Contact Function Value Contact Form
cr ❖ Contact S1 r1 ❖ r1 ❖ r1
◗
Primary
Functions
◗
Contact S2 r2 ❖ r2 ❖ r2
◗
Contact S3 r3 ❖ r3 ❖ r3
◗
Contact S4 r4 ❖ r4 ❖ r4
◗ ESD ESD Thermostat ESD Overide ESD Override Maintained 2-wire External Conditional Torque Switch
ESD Action Contact Type Bypass Interlocks Local Stop Local Control Control Interlocks Control Bypass
Control Mode
Configuration
A1 ❖ A2 ❖ A3 ❖ A4 ❖ A5 ❖ A6 ❖ A7 ❖ A8 ❖ A9 ❖ At
◗
Extra Indication Folomatic Remote Bus Interrupter Setting Tool Power Loss
Contacts CPT Remote Control Control Source System Timer Local Control Inhibit
Option Selection OE ❖ OI ❖ OF ❖ Od ❖ OP ❖ OJ ❖ Or ❖ OS
Option Functions
◗
- If OE, OF, OP, or OJ are fitted and selected “ON” their appropriate set-up screens will be inserted here.
◗
Help Screens H1 ❖ H2 ❖ H3 ❖ H4 ❖ H5 ❖ H6 ❖ H7 ❖ H8 ❖ H9
◗
Default Option d1 ❖ d2
◗
Return to Positional Display
Fig. 9.1 Secondary Functions

SECONDARY FUNCTIONS CONTENTS
page
9.1 Accessing the Secondary Settings 31
9.2 Indication Contacts S1, S2, S3 and S4 32
9.3 Control Mode Configuration 34
9.4 Option Extra Indication Contacts S5–S8 37
9.5 Option CPT (Current Position Transmitter) 38
9.6 Option Folomatic Remote Control 39
9.7 Remote Control Source 42
9.8 Bus System Option Pakscan 43
9.9 Bus System Option Modbus 47
9.10 Bus System Option Profibus DP 51
9.11 Bus System Option DeviceNet 55
9.12 Bus System Positioning Control Settings 58
9.13 Option Interrupter Timer 60
9.14 Setting Tool Local Control 62
9.15 Inhibit Operation After Power Loss 62
9.16 Default Options 63
9.17 Default Options 64
10.1 Help Screens 67
10.2 IrDA Diagnostics and Configuration 72
Having established that the Primary
Functions have been correctly set, the
Secondary Functions can now be
configured to suit site control and
indication requirements.
It is possible to move through the
various Secondary Functions as shown
in Fig. 9.1 using the ❖☎and ◗ keys.
The actuator wiring diagram will
indicate any options fitted.
Options Setting Tool Local Control [Or]
and Power Loss Inhibit [OS] are
standard features, their use being
optional.
9.1
Accessing the
Secondary Functions
31
In order to display the Secondary
Functions it is necessary to press the
◗☎key until [Cr] appears.
If you have chosen to enter Secondary
Functions in the checking mode the
display will be as Fig. 9.2.
If you have chosen to enter Secondary
Functions in the setting mode the
display will be as Fig. 9.3 (refer to
Section 7).
Fig. 9.2 Fig. 9.3
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.

9.2 Indication Contacts
S1, S2, S3 and S4
r1
Contact S1 - Function
32
Indication contacts S1 [r1], S2 [r2], S3
[r3] and S4 [r4] may each be set to trip
for any one of the following functions:
Code Function
[CL] closed end position
[OP] open end position
[Po] intermediate position
[tC] torque trip close
[tO] torque trip open
[tt] torque trip any position
[tl] torque trip mid travel
[dC] actuator closing
[dO] actuator opening
[d?] actuator rotating
[St] motor stalled
[bA] battery low
[HA] hand operation
[bL] blinker
[LS] local stop
[Ol] open interlock
[Cl] close interlock
[lL] interlock active
[ES] ESD signal
[LP] lost phase **
[Lo] local selected
[rE] remote selected
[AA] actuator alarm *
[24] 24V power failure ***
[rr] motor running
[UA] Valve alarm*
[Ht] thermostat tripped
[CA] Control alarm*
[rP] relay parity
The S contact form can be set normally
open [no] or normally closed [nc].
The procedures for setting up contacts
S2, S3 and S4 are the same as those
shown for S1.
Unless specified with order, the
default settings for indication
contacts are as follows:
S1 – [CL] closed end position [no]
S2 – [OP] open end position [no]
S3 – [CL] closed end position [nc]
S4 – [OP] open end position [nc]
* Contact alarm indication will operate
under the same conditions as the
display alarm indication icons (refer to
page 5 for information).
** [LP] Function not available for
phases 1 & 2, only for phase 3. For
phase loss detection on phase 1 & 2
please use monitor relay
*** [24] Function not available if the 3
phase supply is lost.
Using the + or - key display the desired
function.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed function will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Contact S1 Configured to Trip
at Valve Closed Limit
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.

1
Contact S1 - Value
r1
Contact S1
Contact Form
33
When the S contact function is set to
[P0], the required intermediate position
value must be set.
No other contact function requires
a value to be set.
The value can be set from 1% open to
99% open in 1% increments.
Using the + or - key, display the
required value.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash indicating
that it has been set.
Value Set to Indicate
25% Open
PRESS THE ❖ KEY.
Use the + or - keys to select between
[nO] (normally open) and [nC]
(normally closed).
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Contact S1 Configured as a
Normally Open Contact
NOTE: If function [PO] is selected and
it is configured as a normally open
contact it will make at the set value
with the actuator moving in the open
direction.
To access S2–S4
PRESS THE ◗ KEY.

9.3
Control Mode
Configuration
A1
ESD Action
A2
ESD Contact Type
A3
ESD Thermostat
Bypass
34
The Control Mode Configuration affects
how the actuator will respond under
conditions of emergency shut down,
local control, remote control interlocks,
and 2-wire remote control. Also
included is an unseating torque switch
bypass function. Unless specified with
order, the control mode configuration
will be set as shown for default
configuration on page 63.
If it is necessary to change the
configuration follow the instructions in
this section.
There are 10 configurable control
functions:
A1 ESD action
A2 ESD contact type
A3 ESD thermostat bypass
A4 ESD override interlock
A5 ESD override local stop
A6 Maintained local control
A7 2-wire remote control
A8 External interlocks
A9 Conditional Control
At Torque switch bypass.
An active ESD signal applied to the
actuator will override any existing or
applied local or remote control signal.
ESD can be configured to override the
transformer thermostat, active
interlocks or local stop selection. Refer
to A3, A4 and A5.
The default action under an active ESD
signal is to stay put [SP].
Press the + or - key to select the
required ESD action:
[CL] Close on ESD
[SP] Stay put on ESD
[OP] Open on ESD
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
ESD Set to Close
The default setting for ESD Contact
Type is [nO].
The actuator responds to a remote
control ESD signal derived from a
normally open contact making. For ESD,
where a remote control ESD signal is
derived from a normally closed contact
breaking, the signal being removed,
press the + or - key.
The display will change to [nC].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Actuator Responds to a Remote,
Normally Open ESD Contact
Making (Signal Applied)
Note: If Folomatic analogue control is
required A2 must be set to [nO].
The default setting for Motor
Thermostat Bypass is [OF] during ESD.
The thermostats remain in circuit and
enabled during ESD.
The motor thermostats can be bypassed
during ESD as a factory set, hard-wired
option only. Contact Rotork for
information.
Danger: Actuator hazardous area
certification is invalidated while
the thermostats are bypassed.
A3 should be set to reflect the factory
set configuration of thermostat bypass.
During an ESD event:
[A3]=[OF] thermostats enabled
[A3]=[On] thermostats bypassed
Thermostats Enabled During ESD

A4
ESD Override
Interlocks
A5
ESD Override
Local Stop
A6
Maintained
Local Control
A7
2-wire Remote
Control
35
The default setting for ESD Override
Interlocks is [OF]. ESD action will not
override an active interlock applied to
the actuator.
If an applied ESD signal is required to
override active interlocks causing the
ESD action as set for A1, press the + or
- key. The display will change to [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
ESD Override Interlock – Off
The default setting for ESD Override
Local Stop is [OF]. ESD will not override
local stop when selected.
If an applied ESD signal is required to
override local stop causing the ESD
action as set for A1, press the + or -
key. The display will change to [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
ESD Override Local Stop – Off
The default setting for Local Actuator
Pushbutton control is self-maintained
[On].
If non-maintained actuator pushbutton
control is required (jogging, inching,
push to run), press the + or - key. The
display will change to [OF].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Self-Maintained Local Control
The default setting for 2-wire Remote
Control is Stayput [SP]. If a open and
closed remote control signal are applied
simultaneously the actuator will stayput
(stop if running). Refer to actuator
wiring diagram or publication E120E.
Use the + or - key to select the
required priority:
[OP] Open
[SP] Stay put
[CL] Close
PRESS THE
KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
2-wire Control – Stayput Priority

A8
External Interlocks
A9
Conditional Control
At
Torque Switch Bypass
36
Actuators are delivered with the
interlock facility disabled [OF] Refer to
the actuator wiring diagram or
publication E120E for interlock control
circuits.
To enable remote external interlocks
press the + or - key.
The display will change to [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Interlocks Disabled
Note: If interlocking is required in only
one direction, it will be necessary to
connect a link between the actuator
terminals associated with the other
direction.
Where a high level of safety integrity is
required, Conditional Control can be
configured. In this mode two discreet
signals are required for remote
operation. Remote control will be
conditional on both a control signal
(open or close) and the appropriate
interlock signal being applied
simultaneously. Failure of either or a
spurious signal will not cause operation.
Interlocks [A8] must be set [On].
Interlock signals are not required for
local operation.
The default setting for conditional
control is [OF]. To enable conditional
control press the + or - key.The display
will change to [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
The default setting for Torque Switch
Bypass is [OF], the torque switches are
not bypassed during the unseating
movement.
To bypass the torque switches during
the unseating movement press the + or
- key.
The display will change to [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
The torque switches will be bypassed
from closed limit to 5% open when
opening and from open limit to 95%
when closing. Bypassing the torque
switches makes torque in excess of
rated and up to actuator stall available
for unseating a ‘‘sticky’’ valve. Outside
these positions the torque setting will
revert to the values set for [tC], see
page 25 and [tO] page 26.
Conditional Control Off
Torque Switch Bypass Off

9.4 Option Extra
Indication Contacts
OE
Display Extra Contact
Set-up Screens
37
Extra indication contacts S5 [r5], S6
[r6], S7 [r7] and S8 [r8] are available as
an option.
Check actuator circuit diagram for
inclusion.
When the Extra Contact Option is
included the set-up procedure and
available contact functions for S5 – S8
are identical to S1–S4 (refer to Section
9.2 page 32).
Unless specified with order the default
setting for the extra indication contacts
will be as follows:
S5 [r5] Close limit indication
S6 [r6] Open limit indication
S7 [r7] Torque trip mid travel
S8 [r8] Remote control selected
NOTE: If the Extra Contact Option is
not included in the actuator build, any
settings made for S5–S8 will have no
effect on the indication output of the
actuator.
The action of turning on the Extra
Contact Option makes an additional
series of set-up screens available
Enabled Disabled
Extra Contact Set-up Displays
Press the + or - key to select the Extra
Contact Option set-up screens [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
PRESS THE ◗ KEY TO ACCESS S5
TO S8 SET-UP DISPLAYS.
The procedure for setting S5 to S8
is the same as that for S1 to S4
(refer to Section 9.2 page 32).

9.5 Option CPT [OI]
(Current Position Transmitter)
38
Setting instructions for actuators
including a CPT providing 4-20
mA analogue position feedback.
The CPT is an optional extra. It may be
internally or externally powered.
Check wiring diagram for inclusion and
connection details.
NOTE: If the actuator has options
Folomatic and CPT, redefining the CPT,
will require the Folomatic to be
recommissioned (refer to Section 9.6
Folomatic [OI] page 39).
With [HI] Displayed, the (CPT)
20mA Output will Correspond to
Actuator Fully Open
If 20mA is required to correspond to
actuator closed use the + or - key to
change to [LO].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that the option has been set.

9.6 Option Folomatic
Remote Control
Folomatic Feedback
OI OF Display Folomatic
Set-up Screens
39
Setting instructions for actuators
including a Folomatic
(proportional) Controller for use
in (analogue) valve position
control.
The Folomatic is an optional
control device. Check actuator
wiring diagram for inclusion.
This instruction lists the Folomatic
function displays in their sequence and
assumes that all Folomatic functions are
to be checked/set.
The actuator should be selected in Local
or Stop with the set point signal
connected to terminals 26(+ve) and
27(–ve) (refer to wiring diagram).
Before commissioning of the Folomatic
functions can begin, the Folomatic
Feedback must be set to suit the
applied set point signal.
The action of turning on the Folomatic
option makes an additional series of
settings available.
Before setting the parameters for
Option Folomatic ensure Remote
Control Source [Od] has been
selected to [bo] in Section 9.7.
Folomatic set-up screens can be turned
OFF to provide extra security.
Once selected ON the option function
displays allow commissioning of the
Folomatic to be undertaken.
NOTE: Turning ON/OFF the Folomatic
set-up screens (when fitted) does not
affect its operation.
With [HI] displayed, an increasing set
point signal will correspond to valve
opening.
If a high set point signal is required to
correspond to valve closing use the + or
- key to change to [LO].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
If setting [OI] is modified after
commissioning the Folomatic, it will be
necessary to recommission the
Folomatic.
Press the ❖ key to access the
Folomatic set-up display [OF].
Folomatic Folomatic
Set-up Screens Set-up Screens
OFF
ON
Use the + or - key to select Folomatic
Display [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ◗ key to access the
Folomatic set-up displays.

FI
Set Point
Signal Type
Fr
Set Point
Signal Range
FL
Valve Position
LOW Set Point
FH
Valve Position
HIGH Set Point
40
Using the + or - key select [ l] for
current set point signal or [ U] for
voltage set point signal.
PRESS THE
Current Mode Selected
KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Fr].
Using the + or - key select [05], [10] or
[20] to correspond with the set point
signals within the range of 0–5mA or
volts, 0–10mA or volts or 0–20mA or
volts (i.e. 4–20mA).
0–20mA or Voltage
Range Selected
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [FL].
APPLY MINIMUM
SET POINT SIGNAL
Using the + or - key select:
[ ][] = valve closed
[00] to [99] = percent open
[ ] = valve open
to correspond with the LOW set point
signal.
Valve Closed
on LOW Signal
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash indicating
that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [FH].
APPLY MAXIMUM
SET POINT SIGNAL
Using the + or - key select:
[ ][] = valve closed
[00] to [99] = percent open
[ ] = valve open
to correspond with the HIGH set point
signal.
Valve Open
on HIGH Signal
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash indicating
that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Fd].

Fd
Deadband
Adjustment
Ft
Motion Inhibit
Timer Adjustment
FA
Action On Loss of
Set Point Signal
FF
Failsafe Action
41
If the actuator hunts or responds
unnecessarily to a fluctuating set point
signal the deadband must be increased.
If more accurate control is required the
deadband may be decreased.
Use the + or - key to select the
deadband width. Range 00–99
corresponds to 0–9.9% of setpoint
signal.
NOTE: Maximum deadband is 9.9% of
valve stroke. Normally minimum
deadband should not be less than 1%.
The motion inhibit timer introduces a
delay in the actuator response to a
rapidly fluctuating set point signal,
preventing unnecessary movement.
Once the system stabilises the actuator
will respond to steady changes in the
set point signal as necessary.
Use + or - key to adjust motion inhibit
time in seconds: range 0–99. Normally
it is recommended that motion inhibit
time should not be set to less than 5
seconds (refer to note on page 62).
Use + or - key to enable [On] or disable
[OF] action on loss of set point signal.
[On] – Failsafe as determined by [FF].
[OF] – Failsafe to position
corresponding to low set point.
Failsafe action when [FA] enabled.
Use + or - key to select, on loss of set
point signal:
[Lo] – move valve to position
corresponding to minimum set
point.
[SP] – stayput on loss of set point.
[Hl] – move valve to position
corresponding to maximum set
point.
Enabled
Deadband Set to 1.2%
of Valve Stroke
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash indicating
that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Ft].
Motion Inhibit
Time Set to 5 Seconds
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed value will flash indicating
that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [FA].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
NOTE: Failsafe action “ON” will be
effective only for systems using an
offset or live zero signal range, for
example 4–20 mA.
Press the ❖ key to display [FF].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Commissioning of the Folomatic is now
complete. Remote control may be
selected.

9.7
Remote Control Source
Od
Remote Control Source
42
The available forms of remote control
are listed below:
Standard hardwired control
Analogue control-Option Folomatic
Network control including:
Option Pakscan
Option Modbus
Option Profibus
The setting for Remote Control Source
will depend on the type of remote
control required and the option
specified and fitted. Check actuator
circuit diagram for remote control form.
The setting of Remote Control Source
will be determined by the option that
has been fitted, if any.
[rE] Standard hardwired remote
control.
[bo] Option Folomatic.
[oP] Options Pakscan, Profibus,
Modbus, Foundation Fieldbus
or DeviceNet.
[OF] All remote control disabled
(Actuator available for local
control only).
To change the remote source press the
+ or - key until the required setting is
displayed.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Standard Hardwired
Remote Control

9.8 Bus System
Option Pakscan [OP]
Pakscan Address
PA Pb Pakscan
Baud Rate
43
Setting instructions for actuators
including an optional Pakscan Field
Control Unit – check wiring diagram for
inclusion.
Before setting the parameters for
Option Pakscan ensure Remote
Control Source [Od] has been
selected to [oP] in Section 9.7.
(refer to page 42)
Pakscan set-up screens can be turned
off to provide extra security. The action
of turning screens on or off does not
affect its operation.
Use the + or - key to turn on Pakscan
set-up screens.
Pakscan Set-up Screens ON
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ◗ key to display the Pakscan
set-up screens.
The actuator Pakscan Field Control Unit
must be allocated a unique loop
address.
The actuator must be in “Loopback”
for its address to be set or changed.
Loopback can be achieved in two ways:
1. Turn OFF the master station.
2. Isolate the actuator from the
2-wire control loop.
Using the + or - keys display the
required loop address.
Address to be set within the range
01–F0 Hexadecimal. (refer to table on
page 75).
The actuator Pakscan Field Control Unit
baud rate must be set to the loop baud
rate. For a Pakscan 2-wire control loop
the selected baud rate must be common
to the master station and all the field
control units included in the loop.
The actuator must be in “Loopback”
for its baud rate to be set or changed.
Loopback can be achieved in two ways:
1. Turn OFF the master station.
2. Isolate the actuator from the
2-wire control loop.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Pb].
Continued

Pb
Pakscan Baud Rate
PF
Pakscan Remote
Auxiliary Input
44
Using the + or - keys display the
required baud rate.
01 = 110 baud
03 = 300 baud
06 = 600 baud
12 = 1200 baud
24 = 2400 baud
2400 baud rate set
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [PF].
The IQ actuator has the facility to accept 4 auxiliary inputs (AUX1–AUX4). These are
used when supplementary remote control or digital auxiliary inputs are required in
addition to the standard control and feedback features incorporated into the
Pakscan card. It is also possible to have a combination of both remote control and
volt-free inputs to provide, for example, open and close control as well as a high
and low tank level alarm indication, supplied via an external transducer.
The hexadecimal number displayed under PF can be considered as a ‘‘software
mask’’. It is this mask that tells the Pakscan card what type of input to expect,
control or input signal, and what form the input will be, normally open or normally
closed (refer to page 75 for Binary, Hexadecimal and Decimal Conversion Table).
To decipher the mask the number needs to be split into two separate hexadecimal
characters, each of which can be sub-divided into 4 binary bits. The first 4 bits
represent the function and the second 4 represent the input source (known as
invert). Pictorially this can be represented as:
Left side hex character Right side hex character
Aux 4 to 1 (function)
AUX 4 to 1 (Invert)
Bits 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
When used for remote control of the actuator bits 4 to 1 of the function character
have been designated as follows:
Bit 4 (AUX4) – ESD
Bit 3 (AUX3) – Stop/Maintain
Bit 2 (AUX2) – Close
Bit 1 (AUX1) – Open
(When used for digital signal inputs they are simply designated as AUX 4 to AUX 1)

PF
Pakscan Remote
Auxiliary Input
45
Rules
1. Function bit set to ‘‘0’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘0’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital signal for field status reporting, e.g. a level switch or motor running status.
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘0’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
"1" and a closed contact is reported as a logic ‘‘0’’ (i.e. this will invert the input).
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
"0" and a closed contact is reported as a logic ‘‘1’’ (i.e. this gives a noninverting
input).
2. Function bit set to ‘‘1’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘1’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital command to operate the actuator.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘0’’ this represents an N.C. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact de-energises the input and an
opening contact energises the input.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, this represents an N.O. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact energises the input and an
opening contact de-energises the input.
3. ESD Control
When using ESD (aux input 4), the ESD contact mode setting [A2] should be set to
the default value of [nO]. The [A1]–ESD direction setting should be set to either
Open or Close the valve (refer to page 34).
4. Stop/Maintain Control
When energised this will make the Aux input Open/Close/ESD control push-to-run,
(non-maintained).
When de-energised, the Aux input Open/Close/ESD control will be maintained.
5. Remote I/P Setting
Ensure that the correct [Od] setting is selected (refer to page 42).
For Pakscan this is [oP].
The factory default for [PF] is [OF].
Examples
1. The full range of remote controls is needed. Open and Close are NO and ESD
and Stop/maintain is NC.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 1 1 = F
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [F3]
2. Open and close control is required along with 2 inverted digital signal inputs
(Note that with this setting the open and close commands will be maintained.)
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 0 0 1 1 = 3
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [33]
3. Only an ESD input is needed. The requirement is for push to run control with a
NO contact input.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 0 0 = C
Invert 1 0 0 0 = 8 i.e. set [PF] to [C8]

PF
Pakscan Remote
Auxiliary Input
PP
46
Using the + or - keys display the
required mask setting.
Setting [PP] is not used by
Pakscan. Entered settings will be
ignored.
Auxiliary Input Mask [OF]
PRESS THE
KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
If Pakscan positioning control is
required, return to the position display
by pressing ◗ and ❖ keys together.
Display [OF] (refer to page 58).

9.9 Bus System
Option Modbus [OP]
PA
Modbus Address
Pb
Modbus Baudrate
47
Setting instructions for actuators
including an optional Modbus RTU
module – check wiring diagram for
inclusion.
Before setting the parameters for
Option Modbus ensure Remote
Control Source [Od] has been
selected to [oP] in Section 9.7.
(refer to page 42).
Modbus module set-up screens can be
turned off to provide extra security. The
action of turning screens on or off does
not affect its operation.
Use the + or - keys to turn on Modbus
set-up screens.
Modbus Set-up Screens [On]
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ◗ key to display the Modbus
set-up screens.
The Modbus module must be allocated
a unique address.
To set the address the Modbus module
must be isolated from the host by
disconnecting the RS485 highway or
turning off the host device.
Using the + or - keys display the
required address.
Address to be set within the range 01
to F7 Hexadecimal (refer to page 75 for
conversion). If an address value outside
this range is entered, the address set
will revert to 01 (for 00) or F7 (for value
above F7).
The Modbus module must be set to the
RS485 highway baudrate. To set the
baudrate the Modbus module must be
isolated from the host by disconnecting
the RS485 highway or turning off the
host device.
Using the or keys display the required
baudrate:
[01] 110
[03] 300 [06] 600
[12] 1200 [24] 2400
[48] 4800 [96] 9600
[19] 19200 [38] 38400
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Pb].
2400 Baud
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [PF].

PF
Modbus Remote
Auxiliary Input
48
The IQ actuator has the facility to accept 4 auxiliary inputs (AUX1 – AUX4). These
are used when supplementary remote control or digital auxiliary inputs are required
in addition to the standard control and feedback features incorporated into the
Modbus module. It is also possible to have a combination of both remote control
and volt-free inputs to provide, for example, open and close control as well as a
high and low tank level alarm indication, supplied via an external transducer.
The hexadecimal number displayed under PF can be considered as a ‘‘software
mask’’. It is this mask that tells the Modbus module what type of input to expect,
control or input signal, and what form the input will be, normally open or normally
closed (refer to page 75 for Binary, Hexadecimal and Decimal Conversion Table).
To decipher the mask the number needs to be split into two separate hexadecimal
characters, each of which can be sub-divided into 4 binary bits. The first 4 bits
represent the function and the second 4 represent the input source (known as
invert). Pictorially this can be represented as:
Left side hex character Right side hex character
Aux 4 to 1 (function)
AUX 4 to 1 (Invert)
Bits 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
When used for remote control of the actuator bits 4 to 1 of the function character
have been designated as follows:
Bit 4 (AUX4) – ESD
Bit 3 (AUX3) – Stop/Maintain
Bit 2 (AUX2) – Close
Bit 1 (AUX1) – Open
(When used for digital signal inputs they are simply designated as AUX 4 to AUX 1.)
Rules
1. Function bit set to ‘‘0’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘0’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital signal for field status reporting, e.g. a level switch or motor running status.
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘0’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
‘‘1’’ and a closed contact is reported as a logic ‘‘0’’ (i.e. this will invert the input).
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
"0" and a closed contact is reported as a logic ‘‘1’’ (i.e. this gives a noninverting
input).
2. Function bit set to ‘‘1’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘1’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital command to operate the actuator.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘0’’ this represents an N.C. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact de-energises the input and an
opening contact energises the input.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, this represents an N.O. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact energises the input and an
opening contact de-energises the input.
3. ESD Control
When using ESD (aux input 4), the ESD contact mode setting [A2] should be set to
the default value of [nO]. The [A1]–ESD direction setting should be set to either
Open or Close the valve (refer to page 34).

PF
Modbus Remote
Auxiliary Input
PP
Modbus Parity
49
4. Stop/Maintain Control
When energised this will make the Aux input Open/Close control push-to-run.
When de-energised, the Aux input Open/Close control will be maintained. ESD is
always push to run (non maintained).
5. Remote I/P Setting
Ensure that the correct [Od] setting is selected (refer to page 42).
For Modbus this is [rE].
The factory default for [PF] is [OF].
Examples
1. The full range of remote controls is needed. Open and Close are NO and ESD
and Stop/maintain is NC.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 1 1 = F
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [F3]
2. Open and close control is required along with 2 inverted digital signal inputs.
(Note that with this setting the open and close commands will be maintained.)
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 0 0 1 1 = 3
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [33]
3. Only an ESD input is needed. The requirement is for push to run control with a
NO contact input.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 0 0 = C
Invert 1 0 0 0 = 8 i.e. set [PF] to [C8]
Using the or keys display the required
mask setting.
Auxiliary Input Mask [OF]
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [PP].
Where Modbus parity bit detection is
used the module must be set with the
parity bit setting of the host.
Using the + or - keys display the
required parity bit:
[no] No parity bit
[En] Even parity bit
[Od] Odd parity bit
No Parity Bit
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Continued

50
For Modbus module positioning
settings and action on loss of signal
setting [OF] (refer to page 58).
If Modbus positioning control and
action on loss of communication are
required, return to the position display
by pressing ◗ and ❖ keys together.
Display [OF] (refer to page 58).

9.10 Bus System
Option Profibus DP [OP]
PA
Profibus Address
51
Setting instructions for actuators
including an optional Profibus DP
module – check wiring diagram for
inclusion.
Before setting the parameters for
Option Profibus ensure Remote
Control Source [Od] has been
selected to [oP] in Section 9.7.
(refer to page 42).
Profibus module set-up screens can be
turned off to provide extra security. The
action of turning screens on or off does
not affect its operation.
Use the + or - keys to turn on Profibus
set-up screens.
Profibus set-up screens [On]
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ◗ key to display the Profibus
set-up screens.
The Profibus DP module must be
allocated a unique address.
To set the address the Profibus module
must be isolated from the host by
disconnecting the RS485 highway or
turning off the host device.
Using the + or - keys display the
required address.
Address to be set within the range 01
to 7E Hexadecimal (refer to page 75 for
conversion). If an address value outside
this range is entered, the address set
will revert to 01 (for 00) or 7E (for value
above 7E).
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ to display [Pb].

PF
Profibus Remote
Auxiliary Input
52
The IQ actuator has the facility to accept 4 auxiliary inputs (AUX1–AUX4). These are
used when supplementary remote control or digital auxiliary inputs are required in
addition to the standard control and feedback features incorporated into the
Profibus module. It is also possible to have a combination of both remote control
and volt-free inputs to provide, for example, open and close control as well as a
high and low tank level alarm indication, supplied via an external transducer.
The hexadecimal number displayed under PF can be considered as a ‘‘software
mask’’. It is this mask that tells the Profibus module what type of input to expect,
control or input signal, and what form the input will be, normally open or normally
closed (refer to page 75 for Binary, Hexadecimal and Decimal Conversion Table).
To decipher the mask the number needs to be split into two separate hexadecimal
characters, each of which can be sub-divided into 4 binary bits. The first 4 bits
represent the function and the second 4 represent the input source (known as
invert). Pictorially this can be represented as:
Left side hex character Right side hex character
Aux 4 to 1 (function)
AUX 4 to 1 (Invert)
Bits 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
When used for remote control of the actuator bits 4 to 1 of the function character
have been designated as follows:
Bit 4 (AUX4) – ESD
Bit 3 (AUX3) – Stop/Maintain
Bit 2 (AUX2) – Close
Bit 1 (AUX1) – Open
(When used for digital signal inputs they are simply designated as AUX 4 to AUX 1.)

PF
Profibus Remote
Auxiliary Input
53
Rules
1. Function bit set to ‘‘0’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘0’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital signal for field status reporting, e.g. a level switch or motor running status.
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘0’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
‘‘1’’ and a closed contact is reported as a logic "0" (i.e. this will invert the input).
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
‘‘0’’ and a closed contact is reported as a logic ‘‘1’’ (i.e. this gives a noninverting
input).
2. Function bit set to ‘‘1’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘1’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital command to operate the actuator.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘0’’ this represents an N.C. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact de-energises the input and an
opening contact energises the input.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, this represents an N.O. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact energises the input and an
opening contact de-energises the input.
3. ESD Control
When using ESD (aux input 4), the ESD contact mode setting [A2] should be set to
the default value of [nO]. The [A1]–ESD direction setting should be set to either
open or close the valve (refer to page 34).
5. Remote Source Setting [Od]
Ensure that the correct [Od] setting is selected (refer to page 42).
For Profibus this is [OP].
The factory default for [PF] is [OF]
Examples
1. The full range of remote controls is needed. Open and Close are NO and ESD
and Stop/maintain is NC.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 1 1 = F
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [F3]
2. Open and close control is required along with 2 inverted digital signal inputs.
(Note that with this setting the open and close commands will be maintained.)
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 0 0 1 1 = 3
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [33]
3. Only an ESD input is needed. The requirement is for push to run control with a
NO contact input.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 0 0 = C
Invert 1 0 0 0 = 8 i.e. set [PF] to [C8]
4. Stop/Maintain Control
When energised this will make the Aux input Open/Close control push to run When
de-energised, the Aux input Open/Close control will be maintained. ESD is always
push to run (non maintained).

PF
Profibus Remote
Auxiliary Input
PP
54
Using the + or - keys display the
required mask setting.
Setting [PP] is not used by
Profibus. Entered settings will
be ignored.
PRESS THE
Auxiliary Input Mask OF
KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
If Profibus positioning control and
action on loss of communication are
required, return to the position display
by pressing ◗ and ❖ keys together.
Display [OF] (refer to page 58).

9.11
Option DeviceNet
PA
DeviceNet Address
Pb
DeviceNet Baudrate
55
Setting instructions for actuators
including an optional DeviceNet DFU
module – check wiring diagram for
inclusion.
DeviceNet module set up screens can
be turned off to provide extra security.
The action of turning screens on or off
does not effect its operation.
Use the + or - key to turn on
DeviceNet set up screens.
The DeviceNet module must be
allocated a unique address.
Using the + or - keys display the
required address.
Address to be set within the range 01
to 3F Hexadecimal. See page 72 for
conversion. If an address value outside
this range is entered, the address set
will revert to 01 (for 00) or 3F (for value
above 3F).
The DeviceNet module must be set to
the DeviceNet highway baudrate.
Using the + or - keys display the
required baudrate:
[01] 125 k baud
[03] 250 k baud
[06] 500 k baud
DeviceNet Set-up Screens ON
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ◗ key to display the
DeviceNet set up displays.
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Pb].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [PF].

PF
DeviceNet Remote
Auxiliary Input
56
Press the ❖ key to display [PF].
The IQ actuator has the facility to accept 4 auxiliary inputs (AUX1–AUX4). These are
used when supplementary remote control or volt free digital auxiliary inputs are
required in addition to the standard control and feedback features incorporated
into the DeviceNet module. It is also possible to have a combination of both remote
control and volt free inputs to provide, for example, open and close control as well
as a high and low tank level alarm indication, supplied via an external transducer.
The hexadecimal number displayed under PF can be considered as a ‘‘software
mask’’. It is this mask that tells the DeviceNet module what type of input to expect,
control or input signal, and what form the input will be, normally open or normally
closed.
To decipher the mask the number needs to be split into two separate hexadecimal
characters, each of which can be sub-divided into 4 binary bits. The first 4 bits
represent the function and the second 4 represent the input source (known as
invert). Pictorially this can be represented as:
Left side hex character Right side hex character
Aux 4 to 1 (function)
AUX 4 to 1 (Invert)
Bits 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
When used for remote control of the actuator bits 4 to 1 of the function character
have been designated as follows:
Bit 4 (AUX4) – ESD
Bit 3 (AUX3) – Stop/Maintain
Bit 2 (AUX2) – Close
Bit 1 (AUX1) – Open
(When used for digital signal inputs they are simply designated as AUX 4 to AUX 1.)
Rules
1. Function bit set to ‘‘0’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘0’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital signal for field status reporting, e.g. a level switch or motor running
status.If the corresponding invert bit is set to a "0", an open contact is reported as
a logic ‘‘1’’ and a close contact is reported as a logic ‘‘0’’ (i.e. this will invert the
input).
If the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, an open contact is reported as a logic
"0" and a close contact is reported as a logic ‘‘1’’ (i.e. this gives a non-inverting
input).
2. Function bit set to ‘‘1’’
Any function bit set to ‘‘1’’ indicates that the particular aux input is to be treated as
a digital command to operate the actuator.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a "0" this represents an N.C. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact de-energises the input and an
opening contact energises the input.
When the corresponding invert bit is set to a ‘‘1’’, this represents an N.O. contact as
being the command source, i.e. a closing contact energises the input and an
opening contact de-energises the input.
3. ESD Control
When using ESD (aux input 4), the ESD contact mode setting [A2] should be set to
the default value of [nO]. The [A1]–ESD direction setting should be set to either
open or close the valve (refer to page 34).

PF
DeviceNet Remote
Auxiliary Input (continued)
PP
DeviceNet Parity
57
4. Stop/Maintain Control
When energised this will make the Aux input Open/Close control push-to-run.
When de-energised, the Aux input Open/Close control will be maintained. ESD is
always push to run (non maintained).
5. Remote I/P Setting
Ensure that the correct “Od” setting is selected (refer to page 42).
For DeviceNet this is [OP].
The factory default for [PF] is [OF].
Examples
1. The full range of remote controls is needed. Open and Close are NO and ESD
and Stop/maintain is NC.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 1 1 = F
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [F3]
2. Open and close control is required along with 2 inverted digital signal inputs.
(Note that with this setting the open and close commands will be maintained.)
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 0 0 1 1 = 3
Invert 0 0 1 1 = 3 i.e. set [PF] to [33]
3. Only an ESD input is needed. The requirement is for push to run control with a
NO contact input.
Aux I/P 4 3 2 1
Function 1 1 0 0 = C
Invert 1 0 0 0 = 8 i.e. set [PF] to [C8]
Using the + or - keys display the
required mask setting.
PRESS THE
Auxiliary Input Mask OF
KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [PP].
This option is not used by the
DeviceNet DFU Module.
No Parity Bit
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.

9.12 Bus System Positioning
Control Settings
OF
Display Bus System
Positioning Set-up Screens
FL
Bus System Valve
Position at 0% DV
FH
Bus System Valve
Position at 100% DV
58
If the system control strategy for
Pakscan, Modbus or Profibus requires
intermediate valve travel positioning,
certain control parameters need to be
checked: the Limited Range Position
Settings, the Motion Inhibit Time and
its Deadband. There are an additional
two ‘‘Action on Loss of Signal’’
parameters relating only to Modbus
and Profibus systems that also need to
be checked.
Limited Range Positioning is a selectable
option whereby positioning limits, 0%
and 100%, can be at different positions
to those used for digital Closed and
Open limit commands. Limited range
positioning can be set using the [FL]
and [FH] screens.
It should be noted that the actuator will
respond to a digital Open or Close host
command by moving the valve to the
set limits irrespective of settings made
for positioning control.
Settings for Deadband and Motion
Inhibit Time affect accuracy and
response time.
Bus system positioning control set-up
screens can be suppressed to provide
extra security.
Use the + or - key to turn on the
positioning set-up screens.
Bus System Positioning Control
Screens [On]
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ◗ key to display Bus System
Positioning Control Settings.
Once [FI] is displayed, press the ❖ key
to display [FL].
[FL] is the position to which the
actuator will move if a 0% command is
sent and is the position at which the
actuator will report 0% to the host.
The default setting is for 0% to be the
Close limit.
If altered, it is possible that the position
indicated by the actuator display will
differ to that indicated by the host.
Use the + or - key to select the desired
valve position for a 0% command.
0% DV = Valve Closed
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [FH].
[FH] is the position to which the
actuator will move if a 100% command
is sent and is the position at which the
actuator will report 100% to the host.
The default setting is for 100% to be
the Open limit.
If altered, it is possible that the position
indicated by the actuator display will
differ to that indicated by the host.
Use the + or - key to select the desired
valve position for a 100% command.
100% DV = Valve Open
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Fd].

Fd
Bus System Deadband
Adjustment
All positioning commands are subject to
a deadband tolerance.
The deadband sets the expected
positioning accuracy of the actuator
and is dependent on various factors
including, actuator output speed,
number of turns and valve torque. If
the deadband is set too low the valve
may ‘‘hunt’’ around the set point.
Use the + or - key to display the
required setting:
[00] to [99] – 0% to 9.9% of valve
stroke.
2.5% Deadband
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [Ft].
Ft
Bus System
Motion Inhibit Time (MIT)
MIT sets the minimum time between
successive position commands being
actioned. It is used in situations to
reduce the number of starts per hour
and to smooth out fluctuations if
continuous positioning is implemented.
Setting the longest possible time while
maintaining acceptable control will
maximise the life of the motorised
valve.
Use the + or - key to display the
required setting:
[02] to [99] – 2 to 99 seconds.
5 Second MIT
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [FA].
FA Modbus, Profibus &
DeviceNet
Action on Loss of Signal
Modbus, Profibus & DeviceNet modules
can be set to respond on loss of host
communication by positioning the
valve. Modbus checks for a loss of
general highway communications
whereas Profibus checks for a loss of
communications addressed specifically
to itself.
The default setting is off [OF] and the
default timeout is 255 sec.
Use the + or - key to display the
required setting:
[On] Failsafe determined by setting [FF]
[OF] No failsafe action
Failsafe Action Enabled
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [FF].
59
FF Modbus, Profibus
& DeviceNet
Failsafe Action
Modbus, Profibus & DeviceNet failsafe
action when [FA] is enabled.
Use the + or - key to display the
required setting:
[Lo] Close valve
[SP] Stay put
[HI] Open valve
Failsafe Close
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.

9.13 Option
Interrupter Timer
Setting instructions for actuator
including an interrupter timer.
The interrupter timer enables pulsed
“stop/start” operation by the actuator
as a response to local and remote
control commands.
This effectively increases the valve
stroke time and can be adjusted to
prevent hydraulic shock (water
hammer) and flow surges in pipelines.
The interrupter timer is an optional
extra – check wiring diagram for
inclusion.
OJ
Interrupter Timer
Enabled/Disabled
When fitted, the timer will be
made available for operation.
The Interrupter cannot be
enabled or disabled using the
Setting Tool.
Interrupter Timer Interrupter Timer
Disabled Enabled
When the timer option is available an
additional series of settings can be
accessed by pressing the ◗ key.
NOTE: If the timer option is not
available pressing the ◗ key will not
access setting.
Press the ◗ key to display interrupter
timer set-up screens.
Jd
Interrupter Timer
Direction
The default for timer direction is [CL],
timer operation will start in closing
and stop in opening – pulsing
operation around the close position.
If pulsing operation is required to stop
in closing and start in opening – around
the open position, use the + or - key.
The display will change to [OP].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Pulsed Operation Around the
Closed Position
NOTE: Instructions [JC] and [JO] are for
timer operation around the Closed
position. For timing around the Open
position, read stop for start [JC] and
start for stop [JO].
Press the ❖ key to display [JC].
JC
60
Position in Valve
Closing Stroke for
Timer to Start
Using the + or - key select the position
for the TIMER TO START WHEN THE
VALVE IS CLOSING.
[ ][] = valve closed
[00] to [99] = percentage open
[ ] = valve open
Timer Set to Start Pulsing when
Closing Valve Reaches 25% Open
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
If the timing is not required in the
closing stroke select [JC] to [ ][] valve
closed position.
Press the ❖ key to display [JO].

JO
Position in Valve Opening
Stroke for Timer to Stop
Jn
Contactor On Time
Contactor Off Time
JF JE ESD Override
Interrupter Timer
61
Using the + or - key select the position
for the TIMER TO STOP WHEN THE
VALVE IS OPENING.
[ ][] = valve closed
[00] to [99] = percentage open
[ ] = valve open
Timer Set to Stop Pulsing
when Opening Valve
Reaches 25% Open
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
If timing is not required in the opening
stroke select [JO] to [ ][].
Press the ❖ key to display [Jn].
Using the + or - key select the actuator
run period in the range 1–99 seconds.
Actuator Run Period
Set for 5 Seconds
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [JF].
Using the + or - key select the actuator
stop period in the range 1–99 seconds.
Actuator OFF Period
Set for 25 Seconds
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
Press the ❖ key to display [JE] (refer
to note on Page 62).
The interrupter timer may be overridden
when the actuator is under ESD signal
command. This will mean the actuator
will run to limit without “stop/start”
action under ESD command.
Refer to A1–A3 (refer to page 34 for
ESD settings).
The default for ESD override interrupter
timer is [OF]. The interrupter timer will
continue “stop/start” action during ESD
action.
If ESD must override the timer use the
+ or - to display [On].
ESD Override Timer OFF
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.

Example
Note
9.14 Setting Tool
Local Control [Or]
9.15 Inhibit Operation
After Power Loss [OS]
62
An actuator fitted with the interrupter
timer and set as the example shown in
these instructions would operate at:
Rated speed from full Open to 25%
Open.
1
/6 rated speed from 25% Open to Fully
Closed and from Fully Closed to 25%
Open.
Rated speed from 25% Open to Fully
Open.
With a Folomatic option fitted and the
Interrupter Timer enabled, the
Folomatic Motion Inhibit Timer must be
adjusted to the same time as that set
for the Interrupter Timer “contactor
off”.
Failure to do so will cause the actuator
response to defer to the lower time
which may cause control or process
problems.
For “ON” and “OFF” times in excess of
99 seconds apply to Rotork.
The default setting for Setting Tool
Local Control is [OF].
To enable Setting Tool Control press the
+ or - key to select [On].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating that it has been set.
With the red control selector in Local,
the Setting Tool control keys are active
(refer to page 17).
The default setting for this protection option
is disabled [OF]. When disabled it is
important that the actuator is not manually
operated during a power failure if the battery
is low as changes in position cannot be
tracked - refer to page 6 for battery level
status display. Should this occur the limits
must be reset before electric operation takes
place- refer to LC/LO page 27. Locking the
hand auto lever can prevent manual
operation - refer to 3.1 page 2.
Local Setting Tool Control Enabled
The protection may be enabled by using the
+ or - key to select [On]
PRESS THE KEY.
Vandal resistant actuators ONLY
(red/black selectors not supplied).
For control, the selection of [Or] is as
follows:
[On] Local Setting Tool control only.
[OF] Local/Remote Control disabled.
[rE] Remote Control only.
The displayed option will flash indicating that
it has been set.
When protection is enabled, on power up if a
low battery is detected, the actuator will
inhibit electrical operation and display Power
Loss Inhibit via actuator alarm display (refer
to page 6) and the monitor relay will deenergise.
Limits must reset and the battery
replaced – refer to page 65.

9.16 Default Options
[d1] and [d2]
All IQ functions are configured to a set of Rotork default (standard) settings before
despatch, see the table opposite. When requested, alternative settings specified
with the order will be used. When site commissioning takes place, entered settings
overwrite Rotork defaults and these ‘‘current’’ settings are used for operation along
with the remaining unadjusted defaults.
Should difficulty be encountered during commissioning the default settings can be
reinstated, returning the actuator configuration to its original manufactured state.
Site commissioning must then begin again.
There are two levels of default:
d1 Rotork standard or customer specified primary and secondary settings.
d2 Limit positions only – factory set limits.
NOTE: Settings associated with control options Folomatic, Pakscan, Modbus
Profibus and Foundation Fieldbus are not affected by d1 or d2.
Functions will remain as set.
If d1 is entered, all Primary and Secondary Functions except limit positions
will return to their default setting. See the table opposite for Rotork
standard settings. Primary setting (except limits) and secondary settings
must then be checked and reset as required (refer to Primary Functions page 15
and Secondary Functions page 29).
If d2 is entered the limits will be reset, with the actuator positioned at
50%. Limits must then be reset to the suit the valve (refer to Primary
Functions page 20).
Rotork standard [d1] Default settings for IQ:
Function
[d1] Default Setting
[P?] Password Unaffected – will remain as set
[Ir] IrDA – Insight [On] IrDA Enabled
[Ic] Cell Phone [OF] Disabled
Primary Functions
[C1] Close Direction [C] Clockwise
[C2] Close Action [Ct] Close Torque
[C3] Open Action [Ot] Open Torque
[tC] Close Torque [40] 40% of rated
[tO] Open Torque [40] 40% of rated
Secondary Functions
[r1] Indication Contact S1 [CI]/[nO] Close, Normally Open
[r2] Indication Contact S2 [OP]/[nO] Open, Normally Open
[r3] Indication Contact S3 [CI]/[nC] Close, Normally Closed
[r4] Indication Contact S4 [OP]/[nO] Open, Normally Closed
[A1] ESD Action [SP] Stay put on ESD
[A2] ESD Contact Type [nO] Normally Open (make for ESD)
[A3] ESD Thermostat Override [OF] Thermostats Active during ESD
[A4] ESD Override Interlocks [OF] Interlocks Active during ESD
[A5] ESD Override Local Stop [OF] Local Stop Active during ESD
[A6] Maintained Local Control [On] Maintains in Local Control
63

9.17 Default Options
[d1] and [d2]
Rotork standard [d1] Default settings continued:
Function [d1] Default Setting
[A7] 2-wire Remote Control [SP] Stayput on 2-wire signal
[A8] Interlocks [OF] I/L function disabled
[A9] Conditional Control [OF] Function disabled
[AE] Torque Switch Bypass [OF] Function disabled
[OE] Option Extra Indication Contacts [OF] Unless fitted. See wiring diagram
[OI] Option CPT [HI] 4mA at Closed
[OF] Option Folomatic [OF] Unless fitted. See wiring diagram
[Od] Remote Source [rE] Unless option fitted
(refer to 9.7 page 42.)
[OP] Option Bus System Control [OF] Unless fitted. See wiring diagram
[OJ] Option Interrupter Timer [OF] Unless fitted. See wiring diagram
[Or] Setting Tool Local Control [OF] Setting Tool Control disabled
[OS] Power Loss Inhibit [OF] Protection off
64
The Rotork standard default settings are subject to change without notice.
If specified with order, [d1] settings will be configured as requested.
To reinstate [d1] settings, with [d1] displayed.
PRESS THE KEY.
The setting bars will flash, indicating the [d1] default settings have been reinstated.
To reinstate factory set limits (actuator positioned at 50%) with [d2] displayed,
PRESS THE KEY.
The setting bars will flash, indicating the [d2] default limits have been reinstated.
[d1] Displayed
[d2] Displayed
Option Extra Indication Contacts (when fitted) - refer to wiring diagram
[r5] Indication Contact S5 [CI]/[nO] Close, normally open
[r6] Indication Contact S6 [OP]/[nO] Open, normally open
[r7] Indication Contact S7 [tI]/[nO] Torque Trip Mid Travel,
normally open
[r8] Indication Contact S8 [rE]/[nO] Remote Selected,
normally open

10 Maintenance, Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
65
Maintenance
Every Rotork actuator has been fully
tested before dispatch to give years of
trouble-free operation providing it is
installed, sealed and commissioned in
accordance with the instructions given
in this publication.
The IQ actuator’s unique double sealed,
non-intrusive enclosure provides
complete protection for the actuator
components.
Covers should not be removed for
routine inspection as this may be
detrimental to the future reliability of
the actuator.
The electrical control module cover is
bonded by the Rotork quality control
seal. It should not be removed as the
module contains no site-serviceable
components.
All electrical power supplies to the
actuator must be isolated before any
maintenance or inspection is carried
out, except replacement of the battery.
Electrical supplies must be isolated
before actuator covers are removed
refer to Battery replacement
instructions.
Routine maintenance should include
the following:
* Check actuator to valve fixing bolts
for tightness.
* Ensure valve stems and drive nuts are
clean and properly lubricated.
* If the motorised valve is rarely
operated, a routine operating
schedule should be set up.
* Replace actuator battery every
5 years.
* Check the actuator enclosure for
damage, loose or missing fasteners.
* Ensure there is not an excessive
build up of dust or contaminant
on the actuator.
* Check for any loss of lubricant.
The Actuator Battery
The battery supports the actuator
position updating circuits and the
position (LCD) display when the main
power supply is turned off. It ensures
the current position is updated and
displayed when manual operation takes
place with the main power turned off.
The battery is not required to retain any
actuator settings.
WARNING:
The battery holder in the actuator
gearcase also protects the user from
the hazardous live connections
inside the actuator and therefore it
must not be damaged. The actuator
must be isolated or disconnected if
the battery holder has to be
removed from the actuator
gearcase.
A unique circuit has been incorporated
into the battery function of the IQ,
effectively reducing the overall drain
and significantly increasing the battery
life.
In normal circumstances battery
replacement interval should not
exceed 5 years. Ambient
temperature and plant operating
conditions may affect battery life.
Battery level status is indicated by an
icon on the actuator display, refer to
Section 3.4 Alarm Indication (refer to
page 5).
If the battery icon is displayed the
battery must be replaced.
Battery Replacement
If the actuator is located within a
hazardous area permission must be
obtained in the form of a ‘‘hot work
permit’’ or other local regulation before
removal and/or replacement of the
battery.
Removal of the battery with the main
electrical power switched off will result
in stored Datalogger records being lost.
It is therefore recommended that the
battery is replaced with the main
electrical supply to the actuator
switched on.
If main electrical power is not available
or if main power has been switched off
while the battery was discharged, it is
recommended that the actuator limits
be checked after battery replacement
(refer to Section 8 Commissioning
Primary Functions, page 20).
Battery Removal
The actuator must be selected to Stop
using the red selector (refer to page 3).
Access to the battery is via a labelled
sealing plug situated on the main
gearcase near the handwheel hub.

10 Maintenance, Monitoring
and Troubleshooting cont.
66
Use an 8mm Allen key to remove the
sealing plug, ensuring the ‘‘O’’ ring seal
remains on the plug. Disconnect the
battery wiring loom from the battery
terminals. Using the black pull strap, lift
the battery out of the rubber sealing
pocket.
Fig. 10
Battery Types
For European hazardous area certified
actuators (ATEX) use an Ultralife U9VL
lithium manganese dioxide battery only.
For FM and CSA certified enclosures
use an Ultralife U9VL lithium
manganese dioxide battery. Equivalent,
UL recognised, batteries may be used.
For watertight (WT) actuator enclosures
use an Ultralife U9VL lithium
manganese dioxide battery or any
equivalent 9V battery.
If in doubt regarding the correct battery
type, contact Rotork.
Fitting Replacement Battery
Fit the pull strap around the
replacement battery and insert into the
rubber sealing pocket. Reconnect the
battery wiring loom to the battery
terminals. Refit the battery sealing plug
ensuring ‘‘O’’ ring is in good condition
and correctly fitted. Hand tighten
sealing plug using an 8mm Allen key.
Oil
Unless specially ordered for extreme
climatic conditions, Rotork actuators are
dispatched with gearcases filled with
SAE 80EP oil which is suitable for
ambient temperatures ranging from
–22°F / –30°C to 160°F / 70°C.
IQ actuators do not require regular oil
changes (refer to Weights and
Measures Section 11, page 74).
Torque and Position Monitoring
The IQ range of actuators incorporate
real time, instantaneous Torque &
Position monitoring as standard.
Torque & Position can be used to
monitor valve performance during
operation. The effect of process
changes (differential pressure etc.) can
be evaluated. Tight spots in valve travel
can be pinpointed as well as gauging
torque developed through stroke for
torque value setting (refer to pages 25,
26).
Using the Setting Tool, the display can
be set to indicate Torque and Position
as follows:
With the actuator displaying Current
Position and selected to Local or Stop,
using the Setting Tool,
PRESS THE KEY.
The display will split, the top indicating
the instantaneous torque (as a % of
rated), the bottom indicating the
measured position (% open).
Example shows 19% (of rated) torque
at 50% open position. Display torque
range: [00] to [99]% of rated torque in
1% increments. For values of torque
above 99% the display will indicate [HI].
Display position range:
[ ][] = valve closed
[00] to [99] = percentage open
[ ] = valve open
For a stationary actuator the display will
indicate the actual torque value as
applied by the actuator.
To keep the torque + position display
active press the + or - keys. The display
will remain active for approximately 5
minutes from the last key operation.

10 Maintenance, Monitoring
and Troubleshooting cont.
10.1
Help Screens
67
Troubleshooting
The IQ range of actuators is the world’s
first that can be commissioned and
interrogated without removing electrical
covers. Help Screen diagnostics enable
fast and complete fault finding to be
carried out.
With power off, the actuator
display is not backlit. Position
indicator lamp not illuminated.
With mains power on, the actuator’s
display should be backlit (refer to
Section 3.3 page 4 – The Actuator
Display).
Check that 3 phase supply is available
and is of the correct voltage as stated
on the actuator nameplate. Measure
voltage phase to phase across terminals
1, 2 and 3 of the actuator terminal
bung.
With power Off, the actuator does
not display position.
With mains power off the actuator
battery supports position indication
liquid crystal display only.
(Refer to Section 3.3 page 4 – The
Actuator Display).
If the display is blank the actuator
battery must be replaced and the limits
of travel reset (refer to Section 10 page
65 – The Actuator Battery).
With the actuator powered up and
Local or Stop selected, eight Help
Screens can be accessed using the
Setting Tool (refer to Fig. 9.1 page 30
for their location).
With Remote selected press the ◗ key
on the Setting Tool twice. The Help
Screens will displayed.
Each screen uses bars to indicate the
status of a particular control or
indication function. Each bar reacts to
changes in the status of its actuator
function by turning ‘‘on’’ or ‘‘off’’.
For troubleshooting, access the
following Help Screens and refer to
text:
H1 – Factors inhibiting electrical
operation.
H2 – Monitor battery level and ESD
control input.
H3 – Monitor the position limit and
actuator power supply status.
H4 – Monitor remote control inputs to
the actuator.
H5 – Monitor remote interlocks local
control inputs and motor
thermostats.
H6 – Monitor torque switch status and
IR Setting Tool communication for
vandal proof applications.
H7 – Monitor travel limits, centre
column and position limit status.
H8 – Monitor the actuator’s positionsensing
devices.
H9 – Rotork use only.
Help screen bars shown
are undefined and may be ON, OFF or
flashing.

H1
Local
Controls
Error
Factors Inhibiting
Electrical Operation
Phase
Loss
Battery Low
on
Power-up
H1
Position
Error
Help Screen 1
POSITION ERROR
Bar ON = Current Position Error
Present.
During power up the actuator position
processor compares the current position
to that stored in the Eeprom. If there is
a discrepancy this is shown as a current
position error.
Re-setting of both actuator limits
should now be carried out (refer to
page 27).
BATTERY LOW ON POWER UP
Bar ON = Low battery detected On
Power Up.
If [OS] is selected [On] (set as default )
the actuator operation will be inhibited
when powered up with a discharged
battery (refer to [OS] page 58).
The battery should be replaced at the
earliest opportunity (refer to page 65).
LOCAL CONTROLS ERROR
Bar ON = Invalid Local Control
Signals Detected.
For example if a Local Open and Close
signal is detected at the same time this
would be classed as an invalid or fault
condition.
PHASE LOSS
Bar ON = Phase Lost (3 Phase
Actuators Only).
Loss of third monitored power supply
phase connected to actuator terminal 3.
H2
Low
Battery
Battery
Discharged
Battery Level and
ESD Control Input
H2
ESD
Active
Help Screen 2
BATTERY DISCHARGED
Bar ON = Battery Discharged.
Bar ON when the battery is no longer
able to support actuator functions
under loss of power conditions.
The battery must be replaced (refer to
Section 10 page 65) and limit positions
reset (refer to [LC] and [LO] page 27).
68
LOW BATTERY
Bar ON = Battery level low.
Bar OFF = Battery OK.
Bar ON when the battery is low but still
able to support the necessary actuator
functions.
The battery should be replaced at the
earliest possible opportunity.
ESD SIGNAL ACTIVE
Bar ON = ESD Signal is present.
When applied, an Emergency
Shutdown Signal will override any
existing local or remote control signal,
causing the actuator to respond in the
direction selected for ESD.
The ESD function will be determined by
the settings on Control Mode
Configuration screens [A1] to [A5]
(refer to Section 9.3 page 34).
The actuator will not respond to any
local or remote control while an ESD
signal is maintained.

H3
Factors Inhibiting
Electrical Operation
H3
Clockwise
Limit
H4
Remote Control
Inputs
H4
Remote Remote
Maintain 2 Open 1
REMOTE CLOSE 1
Bar OFF = Remote Close Signal
Present.
ESD 1
Bar OFF = ESD signal present.
H5
Remote Interlocks,
Local Control
Inputs, & T/stat
Local Stop
not
Selected
H5
Open
Interlock
69
Inhibit
Help Screen 3
CLOCKWISE LIMIT
Bar ON = Actuator has reached
clockwise limit of travel.
ANTI-CLOCKWISE LIMIT
Bar ON = Actuator has reached
Anti-clockwise limit.
INHIBIT
Bar ON = Actuator inhibited.
Possible Causes:
Phase Loss (3 phase only).
Power Loss Inhibit (page 62).
Internal Failure.
Anti
Clockwise
Limit
ESD 2
Remote
Close 1
Remote
Close 2 ESD 1
Remote Remote
Open 2 Maintain 1
Help Screen 4
All remote signals designated with ‘1’
are standard hard wired remote inputs.
When a Pakscan, Profibus or
Foundation Fieldbus card is fitted,
remote control inputs are designated
with a ‘2’.
REMOTE OPEN 1
Bar OFF = Remote Open Signal
Present.
REMOTE MAINTAIN 1
Bar OFF = Remote Maintain
signal present.
Bar ON = Remote Maintain not
present and/or Remote Stop
active.
REMOTE OPEN 2
Bar OFF = Remote Open signal
present from BUS option pcb.
REMOTE CLOSE 2
Bar OFF = Remote Close signal
present from BUS option pcb.
ESD 2
Bar OFF = ESD signal present
from BUS option pcb.
REMOTE MAINTAIN 2
Bar OFF = Remote Maintain
signal present from BUS option
pcb.
Thermostat
Tripped
Local Open
not Present
Local Close Remote
not not
Present Selected
Help Screen 5
Close
Interlock
Local not
Selected
OPEN INTERLOCK
Bar ON = Open Interlock Active.
(Actutator disabled)
Unauthorised Open electrical operation
can be prevented by interlocking the
actuator (Open) control with an
external interlock contact.
If external interlocks are not required
the interlock function must be selected
OFF.

H5
Remote Interlocks,
Local Control Inputs,
& T/stat continued
CLOSE INTERLOCK
Bar ON = Close Interlock Active.
(Actuator disabled)
Unauthorised Close electrical operation
can be prevented by interlocking the
actuator (Close) control with an
external interlock contact.
If external interlocks are not required
the interlock function must be selected
OFF.
REMOTE NOT SELECTED
Bar ON = Remote control not selected.
Bar OFF = Remote control selected.
LOCAL CLOSE NOT PRESENT
Bar ON = Local Close signal not present.
Bar OFF = Local Close signal present.
LOCAL OPEN NOT PRESENT
Bar ON = Local Open signal not present.
Bar OFF = Local Open signal present.
THERMOSTAT TRIPPED
Bar ON = Thermostat tripped.
The actuator motor is protected by
thermostats.
Should the motor become overheated
the thermostats will trip and the
actuator will stop. On cooling the
thermostat will automatically reset,
enabling operation. See the actuator
nameplate for the motor rating.
LOCAL STOP NOT SELECTED
Bar ON = Local Stop not selected.
Bar OFF = Local stop selected.
LOCAL NOT SELECTED
Bar ON = Local control not selected.
Bar OFF = Local control selected.
H6
IR Local
Control
Disabled
IR Closed
Signal not
Present
Torque Switch Status & IR
Setting Tool Comms for
Vandal Proof Applications
H6
IR Remote
Control not
Selected
Local
Controls
not Fitted
IR Open Torque
Signal not Switch
Present Tripped
Help Screen 6
When actuators are supplied for Vandal
Proof applications the local control
knobs are removed to prevent
unauthorised operation.
The local control functions are then
carried out by using the Infra-red
Setting Tool.
LOCAL CONTROLS NOT FITTED
Bar OFF = Local controls fitted
(standard).
Bar ON = Local controls not fitted
(vandal proof).
70
TORQUE SWITCH TRIPPED
Bar OFF = Torque switch tripped.
When the actuator generates a value of
torque equal to that set for Open
(when opening) or Close (when closing)
it will stop, protecting itself and the
valve from damage. This feature is
known as Over Torque Protection.
Once a torque trip has occurred further
operation IN THE SAME DIRECTION is
prevented.
This ‘‘latching’’ of the event protects the
actuator and valve from repeated
“hammering” against the obstruction
as a response to a maintained control
signal.
To ‘‘de-latch’’ the actuator it must be
reversed.
(For actuator torque adjustment, refer
to [tC ] and [tO] pages 25 and 26)

H6
Torque Switch Status &
IR Setting Tool Comms for
Vandal Proof Applications cont.
IR OPEN SIGNAL NOT PRESENT
Bar OFF = IR Open signal present.
IR CLOSE SIGNAL NOT PRESENT
Bar OFF = IR Close signal present.
IR LOCAL CONTROL DISABLED
Bar OFF = IR Local control enabled.
To operate the actuator locally with the
IR Setting Tool refer to the option
selection screen [Or] Section 9.14 page
62.
[Or] must be selected to [On].
IR REMOTE CONTROL NOT
SELECTED
Bar OFF = IR Remote control
selected (vandal-proof units only).
When actuator is supplied without local
controls for vandal proof applications
the option selection screen [Or] must
be set to [rE] for
Remote operation (refer to Section 9.14
page 62).
H7
Relay 3
Relay 2
Travel Limits,
Centre Column &
Remote Indication Outputs
Relay 4
H7
Open
Limit
Relay 1
Help Screen 7
Close
Actuator
Moving
OPEN LIMIT
Bar ON = Actuator has reached
open limit.
CLOSE LIMIT
Bar ON = Actuator has reached
Close limit.
ACTUATOR MOVING
Bar ON = Actuator moving.
SWITCH CONTACTS S1, S2, S3, S4
Bar ON = S contact is close circuit.
Bar indication is real time and reactive
(refer to Section 9.2 [r1] page 32 for
configuration of ‘‘ S’’contacts).
H3
Actuator Position
Sensing Devices
H8
Position
Sensor A
Help Screen 8
Position
Sensor B
POSITION SENSOR A
Senses output rotation. Used for the
position sensing circuit. Correct
operation of the sensor is indicated by
the bar being ON (and OFF) 12 times
per output revolution. When the motor
is running, ON and OFF bit duration
should be equal.
POSITION SENSOR B
Senses output rotation. Used for the
position sensing circuit. Correct
operation of the sensor is indicated by
the bar being ON (and OFF) 12 times
per output revolution.
When the motor is running, ON and
OFF bit duration should be equal.
For the two sensors, A and B, correct
operation is indicated by the following
truth table.
To observe this function, select manual
operation and turn the actuator
handwheel clockwise, starting with all
sensors OFF:
CLOCKWISE 30 Deg.
Sensor B 0 1 1 0 0
Sensor A 0 0 1 1 0
71

10.2
IrDA Diagnostics &
Config. IQ Insight –
IrDA Comms [Ir]
72
IQ Insight software tool for PC has been
developed to enable the actuator
configuration and onboard datalogger
to be reconfigured and analysed.
To enable communication with IQ
Insight the actuator IrDA interface must
be enabled.
A PC running IQ Insight software may
be located at the actuator or, using a
cell phone link, at a remote site (for
information on IQ Insight see
www.rotork.com).
The default setting for IQ IrDA is [On],
enabling IrDA.
To disable IrDA use the + or - key. The
display will change to [OF].
PRESS THE KEY.
The displayed option will flash
indicating it has been set.
IQ Insight – IrDA Communication
Enabled.
10.2 IrDA Diagnostics &
Config. IQ Insight –
Cell Phone [Ic]
Using IQ Insight software tool, remote
diagnostics can be enabled using a cell
phone located at the actuator to
transmit and receive data to and from a
remote PC running IQ Insight software.
The cell phone must be IrDA
compatible and have access to a
transmit/receive data line (contact your
cell phone manufacturer and service
provider).
(For information on IQ Insight software
refer to publication E111E).
The actuator IrDA feature must be
enabled (refer to [Ir] IQ Insight – IrDA
Comms).
Before starting, the cell phone must be
configured for "data" as opposed to
‘‘voice’’ and be positioned in direct line
of sight to the actuator display, no
more than 0.5m (2ft) from the display.
The default setting for IQ Insight – Cell
Phone is [OF].
To enable remote diagnostics use the +
or - key. The display will change to
[On].
PRESS THE
KEY.
The actuator display will automatically
return to indicating the current
position.
The actuator will search for a
compatible IrDA device within range for
approximately 30 seconds.
On establishing communication, the
actuator display will indicate the symbol
shown below.

10.2
IrDA Diagnostics &
Config. IQ Insight –
Cell Phone [Ic] cont.
The cell phone must be kept within
range for the duration of the remote
diagnostic session.
If communication is not established or
is lost, after 30 seconds the actuator
will stop searching.
To resume remote cell phone
diagnostics the process outlined above
must be started again.
IQ Insight software is available free of
charge from the Rotork web site,
www.rotork.com, or for sale as a ‘‘pak’’
which includes an IrDA serial link for
convenient connection when using a
notebook PC in the field.
NOTE: The use of a notebook PC or
cell phone with actuators located in
hazardous areas will be subject to local
regulations.
It is the responsibility of the user to
seek guidance and permission.
The IQ Setting Tool is certified
Intrinsically Safe (IS) and therefore can
be used in defined hazardous areas
(refer to page 17).
Diagnostic devices are available for local
configuration, analysis and
transportation of actuator data to other
areas.
Contact Rotork for further information.
73

11
Weights and Measures
74
Oil
Unless specially ordered for extreme
climatic conditions, Rotork actuators
are dispatched with gearcases filled
with SAE 80EP oil suitable for ambient
temperatures ranging from –22°F/
–30°C to 160°F/70°C.
NOTE: Excludes second stage gearbox
if fitted.
Food grade lubricating oil is available
as an alternative: contact Rotork.
Actuator Size Nett Weight Oil Capacity
kg/lbs
litres/pt.-US
IQ10 32/70 0.3/0.63
IQ12 32/70 0.3/0.63
IQ18 32/70 0.3/0.63
IQ20 52/115 0.8/1.7
IQ25 52/115 0.8/1.7
IQ35 75/165 1.1/2.3
IQ40 200/441 7.5/15.8
IQ70 215/474 7.0/14.7
IQ90 230/507 7.0/14.7
IQ91 220/485 7.0/14.7
IQ95 230/507 7.0/14.7

BHD
Binary, Hexadecimal and
Decimal Conversion Table
75
BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC BINARY HEX DEC
0000 0000 00 0 0010 0000 20 32 0100 0000 40 64 0110 0000 60 96 1000 0000 80 128 1010 0000 A0 160 1100 0000 C0 192 1110 0000 E0 224
0000 0001 01 1 0010 0001 21 33 0100 0001 41 65 0110 0001 61 97 1000 0001 81 129 1010 0001 A1 161 1100 0001 C1 193 1110 0001 E1 225
0000 0010 02 2 0010 0010 22 34 0100 0010 42 66 0110 0010 62 98 1000 0010 82 130 1010 0010 A2 162 1100 0010 C2 194 1110 0010 E2 226
0000 0011 03 3 0010 0011 23 35 0100 0011 43 67 0110 0011 63 99 1000 0011 83 131 1010 0011 A3 163 1100 0011 C3 195 1110 0011 E3 227
0000 0100 04 4 0010 0100 24 36 0100 0100 44 68 0110 0100 64 100 1000 0100 84 132 1010 0100 A4 164 1100 0100 C4 196 1110 0100 E4 228
0000 0101 05 5 0010 0101 25 37 0100 0101 45 69 0110 0101 65 101 1000 0101 85 133 1010 0101 A5 165 1100 0101 C5 197 1110 0101 E5 229
0000 0110 06 6 0010 0110 26 38 0100 0110 46 70 0110 0110 66 102 1000 0110 86 134 1010 0110 A6 166 1100 0110 C6 198 1110 0110 E6 230
0000 0111 07 7 0010 0111 27 39 0100 0111 47 71 0110 0111 67 103 1000 0111 87 135 1010 0111 A7 167 1100 0111 C7 199 1110 0111 E7 231
0000 1000 08 8 0010 1000 28 40 0100 1000 48 72 0110 1000 68 104 1000 1000 88 136 1010 1000 A8 168 1100 1000 C8 200 1110 1000 E8 232
0000 1001 09 9 0010 1001 29 41 0100 1001 49 73 0110 1001 69 105 1000 1001 89 137 1010 1001 A9 169 1100 1001 C9 201 1110 1001 E9 233
0000 1010 0A 10 0010 1010 2A 42 0100 1010 4A 74 0110 1010 6A 106 1000 1010 8A 138 1010 1010 AA 170 1100 1010 CA 202 1110 1010 EA 234
0000 1011 0B 11 0010 1011 2B 43 0100 1011 4B 75 0110 1011 6B 107 1000 1011 8B 139 1010 1011 AB 171 1100 1011 CB 203 1110 1011 EB 235
0000 1100 0C 12 0010 1100 2C 44 0100 1100 4C 76 0110 1100 6C 108 1000 1100 8C 140 1010 1100 AC 172 1100 1100 CC 204 1110 1100 EC 236
0000 1101 0D 13 0010 1101 2D 45 0100 1101 4D 77 0110 1101 6D 109 1000 1101 8D 141 1010 1101 AD 173 1100 1101 CD 205 1110 1101 ED 237
0000 1110 0E 14 0010 1110 2E 46 0100 1110 4E 78 0110 1110 6E 110 1000 1110 8E 142 1010 1110 AE 174 1100 1110 CE 206 1110 1110 EE 238
0000 1111 0F 15 0010 1111 2F 47 0100 1111 4F 79 0110 1111 6F 111 1000 1111 8F 143 1010 1111 AF 175 1100 1111 CF 207 1110 1111 EF 239
0001 0000 10 16 0011 0000 30 48 0101 0000 50 80 0111 0000 70 112 1001 0000 90 144 1011 0000 B0 176 1101 0000 D0 208 1111 0000 F0 240
0001 0001 11 17 0011 0001 31 49 0101 0001 51 81 0111 0001 71 113 1001 0001 91 145 1011 0001 B1 177 1101 0001 D1 209 1111 0001 F1 241
0001 0010 12 18 0011 0010 32 50 0101 0010 52 82 0111 0010 72 114 1001 0010 92 146 1011 0010 B2 178 1101 0010 D2 210 1111 0010 F2 242
0001 0011 13 19 0011 0011 33 51 0101 0011 53 83 0111 0011 73 115 1001 0011 93 147 1011 0011 B3 179 1101 0011 D3 211 1111 0011 F3 243
0001 0100 14 20 0011 0100 34 52 0101 0100 54 84 0111 0100 74 116 1001 0100 94 148 1011 0100 B4 180 1101 0100 D4 212 1111 0100 F4 244
0001 0101 15 21 0011 0101 35 53 0101 0101 55 85 0111 0101 75 117 1001 0101 95 149 1011 0101 B5 181 1101 0101 D5 213 1111 0101 F5 245
0001 0110 16 22 0011 0110 36 54 0101 0110 56 86 0111 0110 76 118 1001 0110 96 150 1011 0110 B6 182 1101 0110 D6 214 1111 0110 F6 246
0001 0111 17 23 0011 0111 37 55 0101 0111 57 87 0111 0111 77 119 1001 0111 97 151 1011 0111 B7 183 1101 0111 D7 215 1111 0111 F7 247
0001 1000 18 24 0011 1000 38 56 0101 1000 58 88 0111 1000 78 120 1001 1000 98 152 1011 1000 B8 184 1101 1000 D8 216 1111 1000 F8 248
0001 1001 19 25 0011 1001 39 57 0101 1001 59 89 0111 1001 79 121 1001 1001 99 153 1011 1001 B9 185 1101 1001 D9 217 1111 1001 F9 249
0001 1010 1A 26 0011 1010 3A 58 0101 1010 5A 90 0111 1010 7A 122 1001 1010 9A 154 1011 1010 BA 186 1101 1010 DA 218 1111 1010 FA 250
0001 1011 1B 27 0011 1011 3B 59 0101 1011 5B 91 0111 1011 7B 123 1001 1011 9B 155 1011 1011 BB 187 1101 1011 DB 219 1111 1011 FB 251
0001 1100 1C 28 0011 1100 3C 60 0101 1100 5C 92 0111 1100 7C 124 1001 1100 9C 156 1011 1100 BC 188 1101 1100 DC 220 1111 1100 FC 252
0001 1101 1D 29 0011 1101 3D 61 0101 1101 5D 93 0111 1101 7D 125 1001 1101 9D 157 1011 1101 BD 189 1101 1101 DD 221 1111 1101 FD 253
0001 1110 1E 30 0011 1110 3E 62 0101 1110 5E 94 0111 1110 7E 126 1001 1110 9E 158 1011 1110 BE 190 1101 1110 DE 222 1111 1110 FE 254
0001 1111 1F 31 0011 1111 3F 63 0101 1111 5F 95 0111 1111 7F 127 1001 1111 9F 159 1011 1111 BF 191 1101 1111 DF 223 1111 1111 FF 255

12
IQ Approvals
76
Refer to actuator nameplate for unit specific approval details
European – Hazardous area
EExd IIB T4. ATEX (94/9/EC) II 2GD
CENELEC Norm EN50014 and EN50018
Temperature -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +158°F).
*Option -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F).
*Option -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F).
*Option -50°C to +40°C (- 58°F to +104°F).
EExd IIC T4. ATEX (94/9/EC) II 2GD
CENELEC Norm EN50014 and EN50018.
Temperature -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +158°F).
EExde IIB T4. ATEX (94/9/EC) II 2GD
CENELEC Norm EN50014, EN50018 and EN50019.
Temperature -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to +158°F).
*Option -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F).
*Option -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F).
*Option -50°C to +40°C (-58°F to +104°F).
EExde IIC T4. ATEX (94/9/EC) II 2GD
CENELEC Norm EN50014, EN50018 and EN50019.
Temperature -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +158°F).
International – Hazardous area
IEC. Exd IIB T4
IEC60079-0 and IEC60079-1 for Exd IIB T4
Temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
IEC. Exd IIC T4
IEC60079-0 and IEC60079-1 for Exd IIC T4
Temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
USA – hazardous Area
FM. Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F, G hazardous areas.
Factory Mutual - Explosionproof to NEC Article 500.
Temperature -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F).
*Option -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +40°F).
*Alternative for Group B hazardous area. Temperatures as for Groups C and D.
Canada – hazardous Area
CSA EP. Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous areas.
Canadian Standard Association - Explosionproof
Temperature -30°C to +70°C -22°F to +158°F).
*Option -50°C to +40°C (-58°F to +104°F).
*Alternative for Group B hazardous area. Temperatures as for Groups C and D.
International Non hazardous
WT: Standard watertight, BS EN 60529 :1992, IP68, 7 metres/72 hours.
Temperature -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F).
*Option -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F).
*Option -50°C to +40°C (-58°F to +104°F).
US – Non hazardous
NEMA 4, 4X and 6.
Temperature -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F).
*Option -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F).
*Option -50°C to +40°C (-58°F to +104°F).
Canada – Non hazardous
CSA WT: Canadian Standard Association –Watertight.
Wiring and components complying with CSA Enclosure 4 and 4X.
Temperature -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to +158°F).
*Option -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F).
*Option -50°C to +40°C (-58°F to +104°F).
Rotork can supply actuators to national standards not listed above.
For details please contact Rotork.

If your Rotork actuator has been correctly
installed and sealed, it will give years of
trouble-free service.
Should you require technical assistance or
spares, Rotork guarantees the best service
in the world. Contact your local Rotork
representative or the factory direct at the
address on the nameplate, quoting the
actuator type and serial number.
Algeria
Tel: + 213 6 37 4854
Fax: + 213 6 37 2613
E-Mail:
Argentina
Tel: +54 11 4755 5560/4753 7533
Fax: +54 11 4755 5560/4753 7533
E-Mail: metalart@ciudad.com.ar
Australia
Rotork Company HQ
Tel: +61 3 53 381566
Fax: +61 3 53 381570
E-Mail: mail@rotork.com.au
Australia
Brisbane
Rotork Company
Tel: +61 7 3373 2050
Fax: +61 7 3255 5388
E-Mail:
Australia
Sydney
Rotork Company
Tel: +61 2 9 567 2735
Fax: +61 2 9 567 2739
E-Mail:
Australia
Western Australia Agent
Tel: +61 8 9314 1827
Fax: +61 8 9314 1837
E-Mail: sales@pipact.com.au
Austria
Agent
Tel: +43 7224 66008
Fax: +43 7224 66008
E-Mail: kilches_keg@magnet.at
Bahrain
Rotork Regional Office
Tel: +973 791 976
Fax: +973 791 976
E-Mail: hmrotork@batelco.com.bh
Bahrain
Agent
Tel: +973 727790
Fax: +973 727811
E-Mail: aeradio@batelco.com.bh
Belgium
Agent
Tel: +32 2 7263300
Fax: +32 2 7263633
E-Mail: prodim@brutele.be
Bolivia
Agent
Tel: +591 3 532615
Fax: +591 3 552528
E-Mail: inca@roble.entelnet.bo
Brazil
Agent
Tel: +55 71 235 6588
Fax: +55 71 235 3299
E-Mail: bahia@fluxopet.com.br
Brunei
Agent
Tel: +673 3 336122
Fax: +673 3 336142
E-Mail: cnets@brunet.bn
Canada
Rotork Company HQ
Tel: +1 403 569 9455
Fax: +1 403 569 9414
E-Mail: info@rotork.ca
Canada
Edmonton
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 780 449 6663
Fax: +1 780 449 6578
E-Mail: info@rotork.ca
Canada
Montreal
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 514 355 3003
Fax: +1 514 355 0024
E-Mail: info@rotork.ca
Canada
S.W. Ontario
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 519 337 9190
Fax: +1 519 337 0017
E-Mail: info@rotork.ca
Canada
Toronto
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 905 602 5665
Fax: +1 905 602 5669
E-Mail: info@rotork.ca
Caribbean (Puerto Rico)
Agent
Tel: +1 787 751 4415
Fax: +1 787 250 1842
E-Mail:
Chile
Agent
Tel: +56 2 441 1033/699 2001
Fax: +56 2 441 1023
E-Mail: valvulas@ineco.cl
China
North/Beijing
Rotork Company
Tel: +86 10 6497 4142/94590
Fax: +86 10 6499 4591
E-Mail: rotorkbj@public3.bta.net.cn
China
Shanghai
Rotork Company
Tel: +86 21 6478 5015
Fax: +86 21 6478 5035
E-Mail: rotorksh@public6.sta.net.cn
China
Sichuan
Rotork Branch
Tel: +86 28 6521191
Fax: +86 28 6521056
E-Mail: rotorkcd@mail.sc.cninfo.net
China (South)
Guangzhou
Rotork Branch
Tel: +86 20 81320500
Fax: +86 20 81320499
E-Mail:
rotorkgz@public.guangzhou.gd.cn
China
Hong Kong
Rotork Company
Tel: +852 2520 2390
Fax: +852 2528 9746
E-Mail:rotorkhk@netvigator.com
Colombia
Agent Main Office
Tel: +57 1 621 27 40
Fax: +57 1 621 25 61
E-Mail: autom2@col1.telecom.com.co
Costa Rica
Agent
Tel: +506 228 8630/1
Fax: +506 289 4350
E-Mail:eiomega@sol.racsa.co.cr
Croatia
Agent
Tel: +385 1 4 577 217
Fax: +385 1 4 577 220
E-Mail:
Cyprus
Agent
Tel: +357 2 434131
Fax: +357 2 433416
E-Mail: ltdinfo@stavrinides.com.cy
Czech Republic
Agent
Tel: +420 5 48321534
Fax: +420 5 48216240
E-Mail:

Denmark
Agent
Tel: +45 32531777
Fax: +45 32530504
E-Mail:
Ecuador
Agent
Tel: +593 2 222 585
Fax: +593 2 569 950
E-Mail: ecuador@cadrai.com
Egypt
Agent
Tel: +20 2 2574830/2573456
Fax: +20 2 2575695
E-Mail: mamer@pyramid.com.eg
Finland
Agent
Tel: +358 9 350 7410
Fax: +358 9 374 3590
E-Mail:
France
Rotork Company
Tel: +33 1 43 11 15 50
Fax: +33 1 48 35 42 54
E-Mail: (name)@rotork.fr
Germany
Rotork Company
Tel: +49 2103 95876
Fax: +49 2103 54090
E-Mail: info@rotork.de
Greece
Agent
Tel: +30 1 6549433/6536610
Fax: +30 1 6517810
E-Mail: melco@otenet.gr
Hungary
Agent
Tel: +36 76 495932
Fax: +36 76 495936
E-Mail: galatea@externet.hu
India
Bangalore
Rotork Factory
Tel: +91 80 8395576
Fax: +91 80 8391601
E-Mail: rotorkblr@vsnl.com
India
Calcutta
Rotork Branch
Tel: +91 33 282 3306
Fax: +91 33 282 3473
E-Mail: rotorkcal@vsnl.com
India
Chennai
Rotork Company
Tel: +91 44 625 4219/625 8136
Fax: +91 44 625 7108
E-Mail: rotork@vsnl.com
India
Mumbai
Rotork Branch
Tel +91 22 5584578
Fax: +91 22 5584540
E-Mail: rotorkbom@vsnl.com
India
New Delhi
Rotork Branch
Tel +91 11 5616305
Fax: +91 11 5502840
E-Mail: rotorkdel@vsnl.com
Indonesia
Rotork Company
Tel +62 21 5806764
Fax: +62 21 5812757
E-Mail: rotork@indosat.net.id
Ireland (Northern)
Agent
Tel: +44 28 90 841004
Fax: +44 28 90 841007
E-Mail: flotecsales@aol.com
Ireland (Southern)
Dublin Agent
Tel: +353 1 2952182
Fax: +353 1 2953713
E-Mail: pkelly@pli.ie
Italy
Rotork Company
Tel: +39 02 45703300
Fax: +39 02 45703301
E-Mail: rotork.italia@rotork.it
Japan
Osaka
Rotork Company
Tel: +81 728 35 7555
Fax: +81 728 35 7548
E-Mail:
Japan
Tokyo
Rotork Company HQ
Tel: +81 3 3294 8551
Fax: +81 3 3294 6460
E-Mail: mail@rotork.co.jp
Jordan
Agent
Tel: +962 6 581 9982
Fax: +962 6 582 5818
E-Mail: tcops@go.com.jo
Korea (South)
Rotork Company
Tel: +82 331 265 0962
Fax: +82 331 265 1369
E-Mail: rotork@unitel.co.kr
Kuwait
Agent
Tel: +965 241 5921
Fax: +965 241 2485
E-Mail: Unetcon@hotmail.com
Latvia
Agent
Tel: +371 7 315086/315087
Fax: +371 7 315084
E-Mail: rino@mailbox.neonet.lv
Libya
Agent
Tel: +218 21 47 72628/78598
Fax: +218 21 47 72782
E-Mail: cpsi@go.com.jo
Lithuania
Agent
Tel: +370 7 202410
Fax: +370 7 207414
E-Mail: agava@kaunas.aiva.lt
Malaysia
East Malaysia
Agent
Tel: +60 85 410079
Fax: +60 85 419484
E-Mail:
Malaysia
West Malaysia
Rotork Company
Tel: +60 3 7880 9198
Fax: +60 3 7880 9189
E-Mail: rotork@rotork.com.my
Mexico
Agent
Tel: +52 5 559 2959/2777
Fax: +52 5 575 1092
E-Mail: rotork@iwm.com.mx
Netherlands
Rotork Company
Tel: +31 10 414 6911
Fax: +31 10 414 4750
E-Mail: sales@rotork.nl
New Zealand
Auckland
Agent North Island
Tel: +64 9 634 0456
Fax: +64 9 625 2678
E-Mail:
New Zealand
Christchurch
Agent South Island –
Head Office
Tel: +64 3 353 4665
Fax: +64 3 353 4666
E-Mail:

New Zealand
Wellington
Agent North Island
Tel: +64 4 477 5070
Fax: +64 4 477 5049
E-Mail:
Nigeria
Agent
Tel: +234 1 4522955/523225
Fax: +234 1 4522887
E-Mail: cakasa3@linkserve.com.ng
Norway
Stavanger
Agent HQ
Tel: +47 51 844204
Fax: +47 51 844102
E-Mail:
Norway
Bergen
Agent Sales Office/Workshop
Tel: +47 56 312900
Fax: +47 56 312910
E-Mail:
Norway
Oslo
Agent Sales Office
Tel: +47 67 906120
Fax: +47 67 906472
E-Mail:
Oman
Agent
Tel: +968 601438
Fax: +968 699446
E-Mail:techsales@gpsoman.com
Pakistan
Agent
Tel: +92 21 5861509/5861510
Fax: +92 21 5874674
E-Mail: tumair@attglobal.net
Peru
Agent
Tel: +51 1 330 7728
Fax: +51 1 330 7728
E-Mail:
autinsa@mail.cosapidata.com.pe
Philippines
Manila Agent
Tel: +63 2 7312610/7326125
Fax: +63 2 7312610
E-Mail:resi@evoserve.com
Poland
Agent
Tel: +48 22 723 1770
Fax: +48 22 723 1780
E-Mail:
Portugal
Agent
Tel: +351 21 486 43 25
Fax: +351 21 483 57 17
E-Mail:Lca.Lcaeng@clix.pt
Qatar
Agent
Tel: +974 44 19603
Fax: +974 44 19604
E-Mail:petrotec@qatar.net.qa
Romania
Agent
Tel: +40 44 114187/114664
Fax: +40 44 114664 Manual
E-Mail:technoplus@technoplus.ro
Russia
Rotork Company
Tel: +7 095 229 24 63
Fax: +7 503 234 91 25
E-Mail: rotork.russia@mtu-net.ru
Saudi Arabia
Agent/J.V.
Tel: +966 3 833 1661
Fax: +966 3 833 9369
E-Mail:
Saudi Arabia
Rotork Company
Tel: +966 3 858 1464
Fax: +966 3 858 1464
E-Mail: rotork@concept.net.sa
Singapore
Rotork Company
Tel: +65 4571233
Fax: +65 4576011
email:
South Africa
Rotork Company
Tel: +27 11 453 9741-3
Fax: +27 11 453 9894
E-Mail:
Spain
Rotork Company
Tel: +34 94 676 60 11
Fax: +34 94 676 60 18
E-Mail:rotork@rotork.es
Sweden
Partille
Agent Head Office
Tel: +46 53 3763952
Fax: +46 53 3763955
E-Mail:alnab@alnab.se
Sweden
Saffle
Agent Local Office
Tel: +46 533 763952
Fax: +46 533 763955
E-Mail:alnab@alnab.se
Syria
Agent
Tel: +963 31 230 289
Fax: +963 31 237 867
E-Mail:
Taiwan
Agent
Tel: +886 2 2577-1717
Fax: +886 2 2577-5588
E-Mail:jerdiing@ms24.hinet.net
Thailand
Rotork Company
Tel: +66 2 272 7165-6
Fax: +66 2 272 7167
E-Mail:mail@rotork.co.th
Trinidad
Agent
Tel: +1 868 6524889/6523422
Fax: +1 868 6522651
E-Mail:trinval@tstt.net.tt
Turkey
Agent
Tel: +90 216 327 34 71
Fax: +90 216 327 34 72
E-Mail:orhant@omasteknik.com
U.K.
Head Office,
Tel: +44 1225 733200,
Fax +44 1225 333467
E-mail: mail@rotork.co.uk
United Arab Emirates
Agent
Tel: +971 2 632 5111
Fax: +971 2 621 1934
E-Mail: unitech@emirates.net.ae
United States of America
Rotork Company HQ
Rochester
Tel: +1 716 328 1550
Fax: +1 716 328 5848
E-Mail:info@rotork.com
United States of America
Rotork Company
Duluth
Tel: +1 770 623 6301
Fax: +1 770 623 6124
E-Mail:miguel.lopez@rotork.com
United States of America
Chicago & Mid West
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 815 436 1710
Fax: +1 815 436 1789
E-Mail:

United States of America
Houston
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 713 7825888
Fax: +1 713 7828524
E-Mail:
United States of America
New York City
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 716 328 1550
Fax: +1 716 328 5848
E-Mail:dave.littlejohns@rotork.com
United States of America
North East
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 814 835 8349
Fax: +1 814 835 8909
E-Mail:
United States of America
Northern California
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 707 769 4880
Fax: +1 707 769 4888
E-Mail:
United States of America
Northwest Area
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 253 838 5500
Fax: +1 253 838 5400
E-Mail: info@rotork.com
United States of America
Philadelphia
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 609 223 1926
Fax: +1 609 223 9012
E-Mail: charlie.haynes@rotork.com
United States of America
South Central Region
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 972 459 4957
Fax: +1 972 745 2041
E-Mail: skip.kuehn@rotork.com
United States of America
Southern California
Rotork Company
Tel: +1 949 348 2913
Fax: +1 707 769 4888
E-Mail:
Venezuela & N. Antilles
Rotork Company HQ
Tel: +58 2 212 5232/4208
Fax: +58 2 212 8050
E-Mail: rotorkvz@cantv.net
Venezuela & N. Antilles
Cagua
Rotork Company
Tel: +58 4 4635911
Fax: +58 4 4635911
E-Mail:
Venezuela & N. Antilles
Maracaibo
Rotork Company
Tel: +58 61 579315/492611
Fax: +58 61 579315
E-Mail:rotorkvgz@cantv.net
Venezuela & N. Antilles
Puerto La Cruz
Rotork Company
Tel: +58 281 268 0759
Fax: +58 281 266 3554
E-Mail:
Vietnam
Agent
Tel: + 84 8 84 62525
Fax: + 84 8 8423218
E-Mail:info@vam-net.com
Yemen
Agent
Tel: +967 1 272988
Fax: +967 1 271890
E-Mail:ssl@y.net.ye

Heading
ATTENTION: RED PLASTIC PLUGS IN CONDUIT ENTRIES ARE FOR TRANSIT ONLY.
FOR LONG TERM PROTECTION FIT SUITABLE METAL PLUGS.
ATTENZIONE: I TAPPI IN PLASTICA ROSSA PER L'ENTRATA CAVI SONO SOLO
TEMPORANEI. PER UNA PROTEZIONE PERMANENTE PREGO SOSTITUIRLI CON
APPOSITI TAPPI METALLICI.
ATENCION: LOS TAPONES ROJOS DE PLASTICO EN LAS ENTRADAS DE CABLE
SON UNICAMENTE PARA TRANSPORTE. PARA PROTECCION PERMANENTE
COLOCAR TAPONES METALICOS APROPIADOS.
ACHTUNG: DIE ROTEN PLASTIKSTOPFEN SIND NUR FÜR DEN TRANSPORT
GEEIGNET. FÜR DAVERHAFTEN SCHUTZ SIND DIESE GEGEN GEEIGNETE
BLINDSTOPFEN AUSZÜTAUSCHEN.
ATTENTION: LES BOUCHONS PLASTIQUES ASSURENT UNE PROTECTION
TEMPORAIRE. POUR UNE PROTECTION DEFINITIVE UTILISER DES BOUCHONS
METALLIQUES.
As we are continually developing our products,
the design of Rotork actuators is subject to
change without notice. The latest product and
technical information is available at our
website: www.rotork.com.
The name Rotork is a registered trade mark.
Rotork recognises all registered trade marks.
Published and produced in the U.K. by Rotork Controls Ltd.